Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s ManualC-Class Sedan

Order No. 6515 0149 13 Part No. 203 584 26 71 USA Edition C 2005

Ê4Ct:grË2035842671

Oper

ator

’s M

anua

lC-C

lass

Sed

an

mpressor Sport

ATIC

ATICort

G

C 230 KoC 240C 240 4MC 320C 320 4MC 320 SpC 55 AM

� Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.

� Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are de-signed to acquaint you with the opera-tion of your Mercedes-Benz.

� Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc-cupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.

Your selection of our product is a demon-stration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-men. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passen-gers, we ask you to make a small invest-ment of time:

Contents

IntrodProducOperat

SerImpretaMeMaRoaChaOpthe

WhereSymboOperat

ProProbleReport

RepVehicle

Inforec

Getting started ................................... 31Unlocking ............................................. 32

Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 32Starter switch positions.................. 33

Adjusting .............................................. 35Seats .............................................. 35Steering wheel................................ 39Mirrors............................................ 41

Driving.................................................. 43Fastening the seat belt ................... 43Starting the engine ......................... 46Switching on headlamps................. 50Turn signals .................................... 50Windshield wipers........................... 51Problems while driving.................... 53

Parking and locking.............................. 54Parking brake ................................. 54Switching off headlamps................. 55Turning off engine........................... 56

uction .......................................... 9t information................................ 9or’s Manual ............................... 10vice and warranty information .. 10ortant notice for California il buyers and lessees of

rcedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11intenance .................................. 12dside Assistance ...................... 12nge of address or ownership.... 12

erating your vehicle outside USA or Canada......................... 13 to find it .................................... 14ls............................................... 15ing safety .................................. 16per use of the vehicle ............... 16ms with your vehicle.................. 17ing safety defects...................... 18orting Safety Defects ............... 18 data recording......................... 19rmation regarding electronic

ording devices........................... 19

At a glance .......................................... 21Cockpit................................................. 22Instrument cluster ................................ 24Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26Center console ..................................... 27

Upper part ...................................... 27Lower part ...................................... 28

Overhead control panel ........................ 29Door control panel................................ 30

Contents

Safety aOccupan

Air bSeatChildBlocoper

Panic alActivDeac

Driving sABSBASESP.Foursyste

Anti-theImmAnti-Tow-

ighting ............................................. 110Exterior lamp switch .................... 110Combination switch ..................... 114Cornering fog lamps* (All models with Bi-Xenon* headlamps, except C 230 Kompressor Sport, C 320 Sport, and C 55 AMG) ....... 115Hazard warning flasher ................ 116Interior lighting ............................ 117Door entry lamps ......................... 118Trunk lamp................................... 118

strument cluster ............................. 119Instrument cluster illumination .... 119Coolant temperature gauge ......... 120Trip odometer .............................. 121Tachometer.................................. 121Outside temperature indicator ..... 121

ontrol system .................................. 123Multifunction display.................... 123Multifunction steering wheel........ 124Menus.......................................... 126Standard display menu ................ 128AUDIO menu ................................ 129NAV* menu.................................. 132Vehicle status message memory menu............................................ 132

nd Security ........................... 57t safety................................... 58

ags .......................................... 59 belts ....................................... 64ren in the vehicle.................... 67

king of rear door window ation........................................ 75arm* ........................................ 76ating ....................................... 76tivating ................................... 76afety systems......................... 77................................................ 77................................................ 78................................................ 79 wheel electronic traction m (4MATIC) with the ESP ....... 82

ft systems................................ 83obilizer..................................... 83theft alarm system*................ 83away alarm* ........................... 85

Controls in detail ............................... 87Locking and unlocking ......................... 88

SmartKey ....................................... 88Opening the doors from the inside. 92Opening the trunk .......................... 93Closing the trunk............................ 94Trunk lid emergency release .......... 96Automatic central locking .............. 97Locking and unlocking from the inside ....................................... 97

Seats ................................................... 99Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 99Removing and installing front seat head restraints............. 100Rear seat head restraints ............. 102Multicontour seats* ..................... 105Seat heating*............................... 106

Memory function* ............................. 107Storing positions into memory ..... 108Recalling positions from memory. 108Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position ........................... 109

L

In

C

Contents

SetTripTEL

ManuaShi

AutomOnGeaGeaAutDriSte(SpMaEm(Lim

Good vHeaReaSunReaRea

Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents ...................... 198

Audio system...................................... 199Audio and telephone, operation.... 199Operating safety ........................... 199Operating and display elements ... 200Button and soft key operation ...... 202Operation...................................... 202Radio operation ............................ 207Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only)..................................... 212CD mode....................................... 217GSM network phones ................... 224TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 230Emergency calls “911” ................. 237

Power windows .................................. 239Opening and closing the windows 239Synchronizing power windows...... 242

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 243Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 243Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof........................ 246

tings menu.............................. 134 computer menu..................... 150 menu* ................................... 152l transmission ......................... 156fting into reverse..................... 157atic transmission*................... 158e-touch gearshifting................. 160r ranges ................................. 161r selector lever position ......... 162omatic shift program .............. 164ving tips................................... 165ering wheel gearshift control eedshift) C 55 AMG ................ 166nual shift program C 55 AMG.. 168ergency operation p Home Mode) ...................... 170

isibility .................................... 171dlamp cleaning system* ........ 171r view mirrors......................... 171 visors .................................... 173r window sunshade* .............. 174r window defroster ................. 175

Climate control................................... 176Deactivating the climate control system .......................................... 179Setting the temperature................ 179Adjusting air distribution and volume.......................................... 180Defrosting ..................................... 180Air recirculation mode .................. 181Air conditioning............................. 183Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents....................... 184

Automatic climate control* ................ 186Deactivating the automatic climate control system ................. 189Setting the temperature................ 189Adjusting air distribution............... 190Adjusting air volume ..................... 191Defrosting ..................................... 192Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 192Air recirculation mode .................. 193Charcoal filter ............................... 194Air conditioning............................. 196Residual heat and ventilation (available on automatic climate control panel design A only).......... 197

Contents

Driving sCruis

LoadingRoofSki sSplitLoadCarg

Useful feStoraAshtCigaElectpassTelepTele Gara

t the gas station .............................. 291Refueling...................................... 291Check regularly and before a long trip..................................... 293

ngine compartment ......................... 294Hood ............................................ 294Engine oil ..................................... 295Transmission fluid level................ 298Coolant level ................................ 299Battery ......................................... 300Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... 301

ires and wheels................................ 302Important guidelines .................... 302Tire care and maintenance........... 303Direction of rotation..................... 305Loading the vehicle ...................... 305Recommended tire inflation pressure....................................... 311Checking tire inflation pressure ... 313Tire labeling ................................. 315Load identification ....................... 319DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................. 320Maximum tire load ....................... 321Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 322

ystems ................................. 247e control............................... 247.............................................. 250 rack*.................................... 250ack* (Canada only) ............... 250 rear bench seat* .................. 253ing instructions..................... 255o tie-down rings* .................. 256atures .................................. 257ge compartments................. 257

rays ....................................... 261rette lighter ........................... 263rical outlet in the rear enger compartment .............. 263hone*................................... 264

Aid* ...................................... 265ge door opener* ................... 272

Operation ......................................... 279The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 280Driving instructions............................ 281

Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 281Drinking and driving ..................... 281Pedals .......................................... 281Power assistance ......................... 281Brakes.......................................... 282Driving off .................................... 283Parking......................................... 283Tires ............................................. 284Hydroplaning................................ 284Tire traction.................................. 285Tire speed rating .......................... 285Winter driving instructions ........... 286Standing water............................. 287Passenger compartment .............. 288Driving abroad.............................. 288Control and operation of radio transmitters ................................. 288Catalytic converter....................... 289Emission control .......................... 289Coolant temperature.................... 290

A

E

T

Contents

UniStaTireTireRot

WinterWinBloSno

MainteCleserMaexcCalserResser

VehicleCle

Replacing bulbs .................................. 385Bulbs............................................. 385Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 388Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 392

Replacing wiper blades ...................... 393Removing wiper blades................. 393Installing wiper blades .................. 393

Flat tire............................................... 394Preparing the vehicle .................... 394Mounting the spare wheel ............ 394

Battery ............................................... 401Disconnecting the battery ............ 402Removing the battery ................... 402Charging and reinstalling the battery .................................... 402Reconnecting the battery ............. 403

Jump starting...................................... 404Towing the vehicle.............................. 406

Installing towing eye bolt .............. 409Fuses.................................................. 410

Aids for changing fuses ................ 410Main fuse box in passenger compartment ................................ 411Fuse box in engine compartment . 411Fuse box in trunk.......................... 412

form Tire Quality Grading ndards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 322 ply material ........................... 324 and loading terminology........ 325ating tires ............................... 328 driving .................................... 330ter tires .................................. 330ck heater (Canada only) .......... 331w chains................................. 331nance...................................... 332aring the maintenance vice indicator........................... 333intenance service term eeded ..................................... 333ling up the maintenance vice indicator........................... 333etting the maintenance vice indicator........................... 334 care....................................... 335aning and care of the vehicle .. 335

Practical hints .................................. 341What to do if … ................................... 342

Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 342Lamp in center console................. 348Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display..................... 349

Where will I find ...? ............................ 370First aid kit.................................... 370Vehicle tool kit.............................. 370Minispare wheel (except C 55 AMG) ....................... 374Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) ... 375Spare wheel bolts ......................... 377

Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 378Unlocking the vehicle.................... 378Locking the vehicle ....................... 379Fuel filler flap ................................ 380Manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever ... 381

Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 382Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ........... 382

Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 383SmartKey ...................................... 384

Contents

TechnicParts seWarrant

LossInfor

IdentificLayout o

C 23C 24(all m

Engine..Rims an

SamMixeMiniColla(C 55

ElectricaMain dimWeights

al data.................................. 413rvice ...................................... 414y coverage............................. 415 of Service and Warranty mation Booklet...................... 415ation labels............................ 416f poly-V-belt drive ................. 4170 Kompressor (all models) .... 4170 (all models)/C 320 odels)/C 55 AMG ................ 417

.............................................. 418d Tires ................................... 420e size tires ............................. 421d size tires ............................ 422spare wheel ........................... 423psible tire AMG only) ........................... 423

l system................................ 424ensions................................ 425

.............................................. 426

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 427Capacities .................................... 427Engine oils.................................... 430Engine oil additives ...................... 430Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 430Brake fluid.................................... 430Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 431Fuel requirements ........................ 431Gasoline additives ........................ 432Flexible Fuel Vehicles................... 432Coolants....................................... 434Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system* ......................... 436

Technical terms ............................... 437

Index ................................................. 443

9

Product information

�

Introduction

Plebe

WeMepaby

Wethesu

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive informa-tion, also on permissible technical modifi-cations, and where proper installation will be performed.

Produase obst inter

recomrcedes

rts and us for y

have tir relia

itability

ct informationserve the following in your own est:

mend using genuine -Benz parts as well as conversion accessories explicitly approved our vehicle model.

ested these parts to determine bility, safety and special for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in indi-vidual cases an official approval or authori-zation by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and acces-sories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.

Introduction

a

e u ce

rveonl.thr

for

he

oral. eriz d

ervice and warranty information

he Service and Warranty Information ooklet contains detailed information bout the warranties covering your ercedes-Benz, including:

New Car Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont only)

State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws)

10

Oper

This Opdeal ofread itwith th

For youof the structimanuaage to or otheure to the Me

Your veequipmTherefoptionvehiclethe opauthorglad todures.

tor’s Manual

rator’s Manual contains a great seful information. We urge you to arefully and familiarize yourself vehicle before driving.

own safety and longer service life hicle, we urge you to follow the in-s and warnings contained in this

Ignoring them could result in dam-e vehicle or personal injury to you

s. Vehicle damage caused by fail-llow instructions is not covered by cedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

icle may have some or all of the nt described in this manual. e, you may find explanations for equipment not installed in your If you have any questions about ation of any equipment, your ed Mercedes-Benz Center will be emonstrate the proper proce-

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-mation, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instruc-tions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.

The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

S

TBaM

�

�

�

�

�

11

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Imporbuyersautom

Under a replaof the Mercedthorizeone orfunctioits expnumberiod ofthe veh18000odomefirst, atemptslesseecurs:

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub-stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days.

Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer Assistance Center, One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.

tant notice for California retail and lessees of Mercedes-Benz obiles

California law you may be entitled to cement of your vehicle or a refund purchase price or lease price, if es-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-

d repair or service facilities fail to fix more substantial defects or mal-ns in the vehicle that are covered by ress warranty after a reasonable r of repair attempts. During the pe- 18 months from original delivery of icle or the accumulation of miles (approx. 29000 km) on the ter of the vehicle, whichever occurs reasonable number of repair at- is presumed for a retail buyer or

if one or more of the following oc-

(1) the same substantial defect or mal-function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or mal-function of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct-ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

12

Introduction

Opera

Mainten

The Mainnecessabe perfo

Always hyou whethorizedvice. Theservice i

hange of address or ownership

you change your address, be sure to end in the “Change of Address Notice” und in the Service and Warranty Informa-

on Booklet, or simply call the ercedes-Benz Customer Assistance enter (in the USA) at -800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer ervice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It in your own interest that we can contact ou should the need arise.

you sell your Mercedes, please leave all terature with the vehicle to make it avail-ble to the next operator.

you bought this vehicle used, be sure to end in the “Notice of Purchase of Used ar” found in the Service and Warranty In-rmation Booklet, or call the ercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-r (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,

r Customer Service (in Canada) at -800-387-0100.

tor’s Manual

ance

tenance Booklet describes all the ry maintenance work which should rmed at regular intervals.

ave the Maintenance Booklet with n you take the vehicle to your au- Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- service advisor will record each n the booklet for you.

Roadside Assistance

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.

C

IfsfotiMC1Sisy

Iflia

IfsCfoMteo1

13

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

Operaor Can

If you peign co

� serma

� unlalythecat

� gaser ocau

ting your vehicle outside the USA ada

lan to operate your vehicle in for-untries, please be aware that

vice facilities or replacement parts y not be readily available,

eaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-tic converters may not be available; use of leaded fuels will damage the alysts,

oline may have a considerably low-ctane rating, and improper fuel can se engine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-pean Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:

In the USA:

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Introduction

e

em, oat

an

ouls

our

ctdebo

a

ous

echnical data

ll important technical data for your vehi-le can be found in this section.

dexes

he glossary provides explanations of the ost important technical terms.

he table of contents and the index are de-igned to help you find information quickly nd easily.

he following publications are part of your ehicle documentation:

this Operator’s Manual

the Maintenance Booklet

eparate operating instructions will be rovided as required depending on the quipment options installed in your vehi-le.

14

Wher

This Opvide cofor youhas itsinform

At a gl

Here ycontrodriver’s

Getting

Here yneed fothis seMerceing or

Safety

Here yfeature

to find it

rator’s Manual is designed to pro-prehensive support information

the vehicle operator. Each section wn reference color so you can find ion quickly.

ce

will find an overview of all the that can be operated from the seat.

started

will find all the information you your first drive. You should read ion first if this is your first s-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-rrowing this vehicle.

nd Security

will find descriptions of the safety of your vehicle.

Controls in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi-cle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes techni-cal innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Operation

Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi-cle.

Practical hints

This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.

T

Ac

In

Tm

Tsa

Tv

�

�

Spec

15

Introduction

Symbols

�ThOp

*

� This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.

� A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.

� Page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.

�� This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page.

-> In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions.

Display Words appearing in the multi-function display are printed in the type shown here.

Symbe followerator’

Opwiteqthethithecle

olsing symbols are found in this

s Manual:

tional equipment is identified h an asterisk. Since standard uipment varies between models, descriptions and illustrations in

s manual may differ slightly from actual equipment of your vehi-.

Warning! G

Warning notices draw your attention to haz-ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

!Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.

iHelpful hints or further information you may find useful.

Introduction

a

roper use of the vehicle

roper use of the vehicle requires that you re familiar with the following information nd rules:

the safety precautions in this manual

the “Technical data” section in this manual

traffic rules and regulations

motor vehicle laws and safety standards

i

imon thonro

se

n paon

imee

se tu

Warning! G

Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle. These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.

16

Oper

Warn

Work compcausethe veintercmay psystemseriouvehicl

See afor recomp

Othervehiclthe op

Someenginnever

ting safety

P

Paa

�

�

�

�

ng! G

properly carried out on electronic ents and associated software could

hem to cease functioning. Because icle’s electronic components are nected, any modifications made duce an undesired effect on other

s. Electronic malfunctions could ly impair the operating safety of your .

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center irs or modifications to electronic ents.

proper work or modifications on the could also have a negative impact on rating safety of the vehicle.

afety systems only function while the is running. You should therefore rn off the engine while driving.

Warning! G

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur-bance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

17

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle

�If y affect its safe operation, we urge you to im and corrected if required. If the matter is no r management, or if necessary contact us at

In

CuMeOnMo

In

CuMe98To

Problou shomediatt handleone of

the USA

stomerrcedese Mercntvale,

Canada

stomerrcedesVande

ronto, O

ems with your vehicleuld experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe mayely contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed d to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Cente

the following addresses:

:

Assistance Center-Benz USA, LLCedes Drive NJ 07645-0350

:

Relations Department-Benz Canada, Inc.rhoof Avenue ntario, M4G 4C9

Introduction

rt

Ulo ral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the na

ti

e or death, you should immediately inform ti s-Benz USA, LLC.

A ty defect exists in a group of vehicles, it d dual problems between you, your dealer, c

ta r 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or o: obtain other information about motor ve-af

18

Repo

For theThe fol“Natio

Repor

If you bthe Na

If NHTSmay oror Mer

To conwrite thicle s

ing safety defects

SA only:wing text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fedel Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

ng Safety Defects

lieve that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injuryonal Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercede

receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safeer a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indiviedes-Benz USA, LLC.

ct NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (o NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can alsoety from the Hotline.

19

Introduction

Vehicle data recording

�Infre

(In

Ple and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, ma

Th ntinuously improve vehicle safety. Da

�

�

�

� ganization and/or

�

Ple tion that may be recorded or transmitted via

Vehicormat

cording

cluding

ase noy trans

is informimlerCh

for saf

with th

in resp

for use

as oth

ase ch that sy

le data recordingion regarding electronic devices

notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

te that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems datamit some data in certain accidents.

ation helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to corysler may access the information and share it with others

ety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes

e consent of the vehicle owner or lessee

onse to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency

in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service or

erwise required or permitted by law.

eck the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the informastem.

20

21

At a glance

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Multifunction steering wheel

Center console

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

At a glance

p

22

Cock

it

23

At a glance

Cockpit

I

1 Sc

2 C

3 Mw

4 H

5 I

6 O

Item Page

g Door control panel 30

h Parking brake release 48

j Combination switch

� Turn signals 50

� Windshield wipers 51

� High beam 50

k Exterior lamp switch 50,110

l Exterior rear view mirror adjustment

41,109

m Headlamp washer switch* 171

tem Page

teering wheel gearshift ontrol (C 55 AMG only)

166

ruise control lever 247

ultifunction steering heel

26,124

orn

nstrument cluster 24,119

verhead control panel 29

Item Page

7 Glove box lid release 257

8 Glove box lock 257

9 Center console 27

a Starter switch 33

b Hood lock release 294

c Steering wheel adjustment handle (manual)

40

d Steering wheel adjustment stalk (electrical)*

40

e Parking brake pedal 48, 54

f Remote trunk lid switch 94

At a glance

m

24

Instru

ent cluster

25

At a glance

Instrument cluster

I

1 S

v

;

3

B

2 L

3 Mw

T

M

Gp

Item Page

< Seat belt telltale 64,347

A High beam head-lamp indicator lamp

50,114

6 Fuel gauge with:

Fuel reserve warning lamp 347

4 Fuel filler cap location indicator: The fuel filler cap is on the rear right-hand side.

7 Coolant temperature gauge

120

8 Reset button for: 119

� Resetting trip odometer

121

� Resetting individual settings

135

� Instrument cluster illumination

119

tem Page

peedometer with:

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) warning lamp

79,346

Brake warning lamp, USA only

48,54,

343

Brake warning lamp, Canada only

48,54,

343

Low beam head-lamp indicator lamp

50,110

Left turn signal indicator lamp

50

ultifunction display ith:

123

rip odometer 121

ain odometer 123

ear selector lever osition

47,123,162

Item Page

Program mode 123,164,168

Status indicator (outside temperature/digital speedometer

121,138

Digital clock 123

4 K Right turn signal indicator lamp

50

5 Tachometer with: 121

- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp

77,342

ú Engine malfunction indicator lamp, USA only

344,345

± Engine malfunction indicator lamp, Canada only

344,345

1 Supplemental restraint system indicator lamp

58,347

At a glance

fu

Item Page

4 Menu systems:Press button

è for next menu

ÿ for previous menu

5 Moving within a menu:Press button

j for next display

k for previous display

iC 230 Kompressor Sport, and C 320 Sport:Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to Sport models as well.

26

Multi

nction steering wheel

Item Page

1 Multifunction display 123

Operating control system

124

2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

3 Telephone*:Press button

s to take a call

t to end a call

27

At a glance

Center console

�Up Item Page

8 Seat heating*, passenger side

106

9 Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp

70,348

a Audio system, 199

or

COMAND* (see separate operating instructions)

b Climate control 176

Rear window defroster 175

Centeper pa

r consolert Item Page

1 Seat heating*, driver’s side 106

2 Rear window sunshade switch*

174

3 ESP control switch 79

4 Hazard warning flasher switch – switching on/off

116

5 Central locking switch 97

Central unlocking switch 97

6 Switch for folding back rear seat head restraints

103

7 Tow-away alarm switch* 85

Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp*

84

28

At a glance

Center

Lower p

console

art Item Page

1 Ashtray 261

Cigarette lighter 263

2 Gear selector lever for automatic transmission*

47,162

Gearshift lever for manual transmission

46,156

3 Cup holders 259

4 Armrest 258

5 Program mode selector switch for automatic transmission*

� Automatic shift program

164

� Manual shift program (C 55 AMG only)

168

29

At a glance

Overhead control panel

�

Item Page

6 Interior rear view mirror 41,171

7 Garage door opener* 272

8 Left reading lamp on/off 118

9 Tele Aid* (emergency call system) button

265

Overh

ead control panel

Item Page

1 Rear interior lighting on/off

118

2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 243

3 Right reading lamp on/off 118

4 Interior lighting control 117

5 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid* (emergency call system) and telephone*

152,224,265

At a glance

c

30

Door

ontrol panel

Item Page

1 Door handle 92

2 Memory function* (for storing seat, exterior mirror and steering wheel settings)

107

3 Switches for seat adjustment*

35, 99

4 Switches for opening/closing front door windows

239

5 Switch for rear door window override

75

6 Switches for opening/closing rear door windows

239

7 Remote trunk lid switch 94

31

Getting started

Unlocking

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and locking

Getting started

ewi

p g

rn satc

n

k

Press unlock button Πon the SmartKey.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up.The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-armed.

Get in the vehicle and insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

or more information, see “Locking and nlocking” (� page 88).

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

32

The “Govervietions. Fshouldmation

If you afunctiodetail”informreferensegme

Unloc

tting started” section provides an of the vehicle’s most basic func-

rst-time Mercedes-Benz owners ay special attention to the infor-iven here.

e already familiar with the basic s described here, the “Controls in ection will provide you with further ion. The corresponding page es are located at the end of each t.

ing

Unlocking with the SmartKey

SmartKey with remote control

1 ‹ Lock button2 Š Opening button for the trunk lid3 Œ Unlock button4  Panic button* (� page 76)

�

�

Fu

iCanada only:Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic button* 4.

33

Getting started

Unlocking

Starte 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position.All lamps (except low beam headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp in-dicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instru-ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster re-mains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (� page 342).

3 Starting position

Warn

WhenSmartwith ychildraccesvised an ac

r switch positions SmartKey

Starter switch

0 For removing SmartKeyThe steering is locked when the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.

1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment

ing! G

leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key from the starter switch, take it ou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle, or with s to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-use of vehicle equipment may cause cident and/or serious personal injury.

34

Getting started

Unlock

iWheindiclow bhigh and activcomrespThe iceptlamplampactivengin

iVehiThe Sfromselec

ing

n you switch on the ignition, the ator and warning lamps (except eam headlamp indicator lamp, beam headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal indicator lamps unless ated) in the instrument cluster e on. This indicates that the ective systems are operational. ndicator and warning lamps (ex- low beam headlamp indicator , high beam headlamp indicator , and turn signal indicator lamps if ated) should go out when the e is running.

cles with automatic transmission: martKey can only be removed

the starter switch with the gear tor lever in position P.

!If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the battery may not be sufficiently charged.

� Check the battery and charge it if necessary (� page 401).

� Get a jump start (� page 404).

To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation.

35

Getting started

Adjusting

�

Se

Thor eq

W

Artt

W

DAt

Nbtdud

Warning! G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Other-wise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur-er’s instructions.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

��

Adjus

ats

e seatselectricuipmen

arning

ll seat, hear viewening ofhe vehic

arning

o not addjusting

he drive

ever ridack in ahis can ber the snder it, tomen o

ting

can be adjusted either manually ally, depending on the vehicle’s t.

! G

ead restraint, steering wheel, and mirror adjustments, as well as fas- seat belts, must be done before le is put into motion.

! G

just the driver’s seat while driving. the seat while driving could cause

r to lose control of the vehicle.

e in a moving vehicle with the seat n excessively reclined position as e dangerous. You could slide un-

eat belt in a collision. If you slide he belt would apply force at the ab-

r neck.

That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly posi-tioned on the body. Your seat must be ad-justed so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (� page 43).

Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad-justed.

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the power seats* can be operated when the respective door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-ment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

36

Getting started

Adjust

Manual

1 Seat2 Seat3 Seat4 Seat

eat cushion tilt

Turn handwheel 2 forward or back-ward until your upper legs are lightly supported.

eat backrest tilt

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Press switch 3 in direction of arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

eat height

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Press switch 4 in direction of arrow until your legs are lightly supported.

A child’significare notthe chilrestrain

��

ing

seat adjustment

fore and aft adjustment cushion tilt backrest tilt height

Seat fore and aft adjustment

� Lift handle 1.

� Slide seat to the desired position.

� Allow handle 1 to reengage.

� Check for proper engagement before driving.

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-tion should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

S

�

S

�

�

S

�

�

s risk of serious or fatal injuries is antly increased if the child restraints properly secured in the vehicle and d is not properly secured in the child t.

!When moving the seat, make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat. Otherwise you could damage the seat.

37

Getting started

Adjusting

Head r

1 Rel

Raising

� Mares

Loweri

� To relethe

Head restraint tilt

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

� Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion.

For more information, see “Seats” (� page 99).

estraint height

ease button

:

nually adjust the height of the head traint by pulling it upward.

ng:

lower head the restraint, push ase button 1 and push down on head restraint.

Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intend-ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-dent.

iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible.

38

Getting started

Adjust

Power s

The seatin each

1 Head2 Seat3 Seat4 Seat5 Seat

� Swit

or

� Open

eat cushion tilt

Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 3 until your upper legs are lightly supported.

eat backrest tilt

Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 5 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

eat height

Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 2.

ead restraint height

Press switch up or down in direction of arrow 1.

iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible.

ing

eat* adjustment

adjustment switches are located front door.

restraint height height cushion tilt fore and aft adjustment backrest tilt

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

the respective door.

Seat fore and aft adjustment

� Press switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4.

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The posi-tion should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

S

�

S

�

S

�

H

�

!When moving the seat, make sure that there are no items in the footwell or behind the seat. Otherwise you could damage the seat.

iThe memory function* (� page 107) lets you store the setting for the seat position together with the settings for the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors.

39

Getting started

Adjusting

Steering wheelWarn

For yopositi

Adjusthe hehead tial foevent

Do nohead intendaccide

Warning! G

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the steering wheel adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the electrical steering wheel adjustment feature* can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Head restraint tilt

Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.

� Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion.

For more information, see “Seats” (� page 99).

ing! G

ur protection, drive only with properly oned head restraints.

t head restraint so that the center of ad restraint supports the back of the

at eye level. This will reduce the poten-r injury to the head and neck in the of an accident or similar situation.

t drive the vehicle without the seat restraints. Head restraints are ed to help reduce injuries during an nt.

40

Getting started

Adjust

Steerin

1 Hand

� To uhand

� Moveposit

� To lohandenga

The slocke

teering wheel adjustment, electrical*

he stalk for steering wheel adjustment is cated on the steering column (lower left).

Adjusting steering column, in or outAdjusting steering column, up or down

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

or

Open the driver’s door.

ing

g wheel adjustment, manual

le

nlock the steering column, pull le 1 out to its stop limit.

steering wheel to the desired ion.

ck the steering column, push le 1 all the way in until it ges.

teering wheel is once again d into position.

� Make sure the steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

S

Tlo

12

�

�

Warning! G

Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering wheel is securely locked in place before driving off.

Driving without the steering wheel adjust-ment locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

41

Getting started

Adjusting

Adjust

� Modireablwitelb

Adjust

� Moof a

Maandtionme

Interior rear view mirror

� Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror.

For more information, see “Rear view mir-rors” (� page 171).

Exterior rear view mirrors

iTheletsstesetext

Warning! G

Exercise care when using the passen-ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your in-terior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

ing steering column in or out

ve stalk forward or back in the ction of arrow 1 until a comfort-

e steering wheel position is reached h your arms slightly bent at the ow.

ing steering column up or down

ve stalk up or down in the direction rrow 2.

ke sure your legs can move freely that all the displays (incl. malfunc- and indicator lamps) on the instru-

nt cluster are clearly visible.

Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic condi-tions.

memory function* (� page 107) you store the setting for the ering wheel together with the tings for the seat position and erior rear view mirrors.

Warning! G

In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-low the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

!Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

42

Getting started

Adjust

The buttlamp sw

1 Adju2 Pass

mirro3 Drive

butto

� Swit

or more information, see “Rear view mir-rs” (� page 171).

iThe memory function* (� page 107) lets you store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and seat position.

iAt low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.

ing

ons are located above the exterior itch.

stment buttonenger-side exterior rear view r buttonr’s side exterior rear view mirror n

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

� Press button 3 for the driver’s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

� Push adjustment button 1 up, down, left, or right according to the desired setting.

Fro

!If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally.

43

Getting started

Driving

�

Fa

W

Dwta

Dtpa

W

Aopr

Warning! G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Other-wise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur-er’s instructions.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

��

Drivin

stening

arning

o not laell. Be c

he drivence for

uring suhe objecedals. Yccelerat

arning

lways faff. Alwayroperly rear and

g

the seat belt

! G

y any objects in the driver’s foot-areful that floor mats or carpets in

r’s footwell have sufficient clear-the pedals.

dden driving or braking maneuvers ts could get caught between the ou could then no longer brake or e.

! G

sten your seat belt before driving s make sure your passengers are estrained, even those sitting in the pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passengers should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts (� page 64).

44

Getting started

Drivin

Latch plateRelease buttonBuckle

With a smooth motion, pull the belt from the belt outlet.

Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.

Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until it clicks.

A child’significare notthe chilrestrain

Warni

Never rbackresas this under tunder itdomen even faseat bewearer belt is p

��

g

123

�

�

�

s risk of serious or fatal injuries is antly increased if the child restraints properly secured in the vehicle and d is not properly secured in the child t.

ng! G

ide in a moving vehicle with the seat t in an excessively reclined position

can be dangerous. You could slide he seat belt in a collision. If you slide , the belt would apply force at the ab-or neck. That could cause serious or tal injuries. The seat backrest and lt provide the best restraint when the is in a nearly upright position and the roperly positioned on the body.

Warning! G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning! G

Read and observe the additional warning no-tices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (� page 62) and (� page 64).

45

Getting started

Driving

� If na sup.

Seat b

Adjustlocatedof yourneck o

Belt ou

4 Rel

� Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

� Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

� Check your seat belt during travel to make sure that it is properly posi-tioned.

� Make sure that the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.

ecessary, tighten the lap portion to nug fit by pulling shoulder portion

elt height adjustment

seat belt so that shoulder portion is as close as possible to the middle shoulder (it should not touch the r pass under the arm).

tlet, front seats

ease button

Raising

� Slide belt outlet upward.

Lowering

� Press button 4 and slide belt outlet downward.

Proper use of seat belts

� Do not twist the belt when fastening.

� Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm. For this purpose, you can adjust the height of the belt outlet.

� Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

46

Getting started

Drivin

anual transmission

earshift pattern for manual transmission

or more information, see “Manual trans-ission” (� page 156).

Warni

Do not could te

Do not door orThis co

Never aseat beness of

Do not severelnot be

DamagstresseContacCenter.

g

Starting the engine M

G

Fm

ng! G

pass belts over sharp edges. They ar.

allow the belt to get caught in the in the seat adjustment mechanism. uld damage the belt.

ttempt to make modifications to lts. This could impair the effective- the belts.

bleach or dye seat belts as this may y weaken them. In a crash, they may able to provide adequate protection.

ed seat belts or belts that were highly d in an accident must be replaced. t an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Warning! G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause uncon-sciousness and lead to death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as garage) which are not properly ven-tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected imme-diately. If you must drive under these condi-tions, drive only with at least one window fully open.

47

Getting started

Driving

Startin

� Dep

� Maneu

� Ful

Othstainte

� Do

� Turto psta

For infsee “Tu

Starting

� Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P.

� Do not depress the accelerator.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts (� page 33).

� Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever lock is released.

For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” (� page 56).

iYou can also use the “touch-start” function. Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.

g

ress brake pedal.

ke sure the gearshift lever is in tral position (no gear selected).

ly depress clutch pedal.

erwise the engine cannot be rted due to the integrated safety rlock.

not depress the accelerator.

n the SmartKey in the starter switch osition 3 and hold until the engine

rts (� page 33).

ormation on turning off the engine, rning off engine” (� page 56).

Automatic transmission*

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P Park position with gear selector lever lock

R Reverse gearN NeutralD Drive position

For more information, see “Automatic transmission*” (� page 158).

48

Getting started

Drivin

Starting

If the encarry ou

� Turnto poproc

Remattem

� Get a

If the enstarting functionfuel sup

� NotifCent

Release parking brake by pulling on handle 1.

The warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster goes out.

riving

Depress the brake pedal.

Move gear selector lever to position D or R (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

Release the brake pedal.

Carefully depress the accelerator.

Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down.

iVehicles with automatic transmission: Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.

g

difficulties

gine does not start as described, t the following steps:

the SmartKey in the starter switch sition 0 and repeat starting

edure (� page 46).

ember that extended starting pts can drain the battery.

jump start (� page 404).

gine does not start after several attempts, there could be a mal- in the engine electronics or in the ply system.

y an authorized Mercedes-Benz er.

Parking brake

1 Release handle2 Parking brake

�

D

�

�

�

�

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

49

Getting started

Driving

For more information on driving, see “Driv-ing instructions” (� page 281).

iYouinsare

Youloc(�

!Simaccbracauwea

!If yingthe

Rel

!Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine speeds may shorten the service life of the engine.

Warning! G

Vehicles with automatic transmission:It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

After a cold start, the automatic transmis-sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier.

can open a locked door from the ide. Open door only when conditions safe to do so.

can deactivate the automatic king using the control system page 147).

ultaneously depressing the elerator pedal and applying the ke reduces engine performance and ses premature brake and drivetrain r.

ou hear a warning signal when driv- off, you have forgotten to release parking brake.

ease the parking brake.

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-vent this type of loss of control.

!Vehicles with automatic transmission:Place the gear selector lever in position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission.

50

Getting started

Drivin

Switchi

For mor“Lighting

Low bea

The extedashboa

Exterior

1 Off2 Low

Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 24).

urn signals

he combination switch is located on the ft of the steering column.

ombination switch

Turn signals, rightTurn signals, left

g

ng on headlamps

e information on headlamps, see ” (� page 110).

m headlamps

rior lamp switch is located on the rd to the left of the steering wheel.

lamp switch

beam headlamps on

� Turn exterior lamp switch to position B.

The low beam headlamp indicator lamp B in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 24).

High beam

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Combination switch

1 High beam2 High beam flasher

�

T

Tle

C

12

51

Getting started

Driving

� Preof a

Thelamclu

The cocally afments.

Switching on windshield wipers

� Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.

0 Windshield wipers off

I Intermittent wiping

II Normal wiper speed

III Fast wiper speediTo sucnattanturn

iVehicles without rain sensor:When the vehicle is standing still, the wiper speed returns to next lower setting.

Vehicles with rain sensor*:Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor. ��

ss combination switch in direction rrow 1 or 2.

corresponding turn signal indicator p L or K in the instrument

ster flashes (� page 24).

mbination switch resets automati-ter major steering wheel move-

Windshield wipers

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Combination switch

1 Single wipe2 Switching on windshield wipers

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

signal minor directional changes h as changing lanes, press combi-ion switch only to point of resis-ce and release. The corresponding signals will flash three times.

52

Getting started

Drivin

iping with windshield washer fluid

Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point.

The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid.

or information on filling up the washer servoir, see “Windshield washer system

nd headlamp cleaning system*” page 301).

!VehiDo nintertakedurinoperspramay

The sinterwipethe eaccuscratwipedry w

��

g

Intermittent wiping

� Set the wiper switch to position I.

Single wipe

� Press combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1.

The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.

W

�

Frea(�

cles with rain sensor*:ot leave windshield wipers in mittent setting when the vehicle is n to an automatic car wash or g windshield cleaning. Wipers will ate in the presence of water yed on the windshield, and wipers be damaged as a result.

witch should not be left in mittent setting as the wipers will the windshield once every time ngine is started. Dust that mulates on the windshield might ch the glass and/or damage the r blades when wiping occurs on a indshield.

iIntermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened.

53

Getting started

Driving

In case of accident

If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:

� Do not start the engine under any cir-cumstances.

� Notify local fire and/or police authori-ties.

If the extent of the damage cannot be de-termined:

� Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If no damage can be determined on the

� major assemblies

� fuel system

� engine mount:

� Start the engine in the usual manner.

!If awipthe

�

�

�

If wall

�

�

Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfires

� An ignition cable may be damaged.

� The engine electronics may not be op-erating properly.

� Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it.

� Give very little gas.

� Have the problem repaired by an au-thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

� Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.

� Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (� page 299).

nything blocks the windshield ers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch m off immediately.

For safety reasons, withdraw SmartKey from starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage.

Remove blockage.

Turn the windshield wipers on again.

indshield wipers fail to function at in switch position I,

set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed

have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

Getting started

n

vvh

arking brake

Release handleParking brake

Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.

When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.

i

lenin.

i

hr a

d ise

54

Parki

You haYou hayour ve

Warn

VehicWait uremovswitchthe Sm

Warn

With tpowesystemin mineffortvehicl

g and locking

e now completed your first drive. e properly stopped and parked icle. End your drive as follows.

P

12

�

ng! G

s with manual transmission:til the vehicle is stationary before g the SmartKey from the starter

The vehicle cannot be steered when artKey is removed.

ng! G

e engine not running, there is no ssistance for the brake and steering

. In this case, it is important to keep that a considerably higher degree of necessary to brake and steer the

.

Warning! G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-bustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-sult of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

� Keep right foot on brake pedal.

� Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

� Move the gear selector lever to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

� Slowly release brake pedal.

� When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� Take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving.

55

Getting started

Parking and locking

Switching off headlamps

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to M (� page 50).

For more information on headlamps, see “Lighting” (� page 110).

Warn

WhenSmartwith ychildraccescouldmovepositiaccide

ing! G

leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key from the starter switch, take it ou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle, or with s to an unlocked vehicle. Children release the parking brake and/or the gear selector lever from on P, either of which could result in an nt and/or serious injury.

Warning! G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-lector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position P alone may not prevent your vehi-cle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

When parked on an incline, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

56

Getting started

Parkin

Turning

� Placepositor re

� Turnto pofromThe i

After exiting the vehicle, press the lock button ‹ on the SmartKey (� page 32).

All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system* is armed.

or more information, see “Locking and nlocking” (� page 88).

iAlwation trans

On stowa

iVehiThe Sfromselec

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

g and locking

off engine

the gear selector lever in ion P (manual transmission: first verse gear).

the SmartKey in the starter switch sition 0 and remove the SmartKey the starter switch.mmobilizer is activated.

� Press the seat belt release button (� page 44).

Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.

�

Fu

ys set the parking brake in addi-to shifting to position P (manual mission: first or reverse gear).

lopes, turn the front wheels rds the road curb.

cles with automatic transmission: martKey can only be removed

the starter switch with the gear tor lever in position P.

iWith the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off.

Warning! G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be espe-cially careful when small children are around.

Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

57

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Panic alarm*

Driving safety systems

Anti-theft systems

Safety and Security

p

st ve

t

t

e

b

ld

ld

eT

p w

he 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly fter you start the engine. This shows that e restraint systems are operational.

malfunction in the system has been etected if the 1 indicator lamp:

fails to extinguish after approximately four seconds.

does not come on at all.

comes on after the engine was started or while driving.

or safety reasons, we strongly commend that you visit an authorized ercedes-Benz Center immediately to

ave the system checked.

or more information, see “Practical hints” page 347).

ie

trldpa

58

Occu

In this portanof the

The res

� Sea

� Em

� Air

� Chi

� Chi

� Low(LA

As indeeffectsother.

iFortravreschi(�

ant safety

ection you will learn the most im-facts about the restraint systems hicle.

raint systems are

belts

rgency tensioning device

ags

seats

seat recognition

r anchors and tethers for children CH)

endent systems, their protective ork in conjunction with each

The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (� page 24) comes on:

� for about four seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1. It then goes out briefly, comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine.

� for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey.

Tath

Ad

�

�

�

FreMh

F(�

nformation on infants and children ling with you in the vehicle and aint systems for infants and ren, see “Children in the vehicle” ge 67).

iThe 1 indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 2 and left there. The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine.

59

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warn

In thecomeon at malfurecomMercethe synot bedent, injuryunnecinjury

In addcreatetive oment.be petact a

Warning! G

To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-erly positioned on your body.

Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

� Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest. ��

Air bagsing! G

event that the 1 indicator lamp s on during driving or does not come all, the SRS self-check has detected a nction. For your safety, we strongly mend that you visit an authorized des-Benz Center immediately to have stem checked; otherwise the SRS may activated when needed in an acci-

which could result in serious or fatal , or it might deploy unexpectedly and essarily which could also result in .

ition, improper work on the SRS s a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-

r causing unintended air bag deploy- Work on the SRS must therefore only rformed by qualified technicians. Con-n authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning! G

Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), or side impacts (side impact air bags and head protection window curtain air bags). However, no sys-tem available today can totally eliminate in-juries and fatalities.

The activation of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju-rious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for peo-ple with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

60

Safety and Security

Occup

� Adjreationfrombonon tenbe ationstelemMe

� Do closboa

� Keewhesidepotwhe

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator’s Manual.

��

ant safety

ust the driver seat as far as possible rward, still permitting proper opera- of vehicle controls. The distance the center of the driver’s breast-

e to the center of the air bag cover the steering wheel must be at least inches (25 cm) or more. You should ble to accomplish this by a combina- of adjustments to the seat and

ering wheel. If you have any prob-s, please see an authorized rcedes-Benz Center.

not lean with your head or chest e to the steering wheel or dash-rd.

p hands on the outside of steering el rim. Placing hands and arms in- the rim can increase the risk and

ential severity of hand/arm injury n driver front air bag inflates.

� Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

� Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child restraint system.

� Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deacti-vate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fa-tal injury will result.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

61

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warn

Accidplace rear s12 yeseat oa Babturn oBabySside im

It shofront apossiboccuperly seair baside im

1 BabySAutom

Please contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.

iAir bags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags) and in side impacts (side impact and head protection window curtain air bags) which exceed preset thresholds.

Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deploy-ment tresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection.

The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for air bags to provide their supplemental protection.

ing! G

ent research shows that the safest for children in an automobile is in the eat. Should you choose to place a child ars old or under in the front passenger f your vehicle, you must properly use ySmartTM1 child restraint which will ff the passenger front air bag. martTM will not, however, turn off any pact air bag.

uld be noted that with respect to both nd rear side impact air bags there is a ility for a side air bag related injury if ants, especially children, are not prop-ated or restrained when next to a side

g which needs to deploy rapidly in a pact in order to do its job.

martTM is a trademark of Siemens otive Corp.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the side air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the side air bag be activated.

(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear door mounted side air bags deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.

62

Safety and Security

Occup

In caangleimpadented. Tbe pbelts

We cpresavoid

Yourwith vate prestial ato yogersand to mtinueprote

� No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or re-moving any component or part of the SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges, etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger front air bag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims, and installation of additional elec-trical/electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

� Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

� Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.

� Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide ade-quate protection.

ant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag

ses of other frontal impacts, d impacts, roll-overs, other side cts, rear collisions, or other acci-s, the air bags will not be activat-he driver and passengers will then rotected by the fastened seat .

aution you not to rely on the ence of the air bags in order to wearing your seat belt.

vehicle was originally equipped air bags that are designed to acti-in certain impacts exceeding a et threshold to reduce the poten-nd severity of injury. It is important ur safety and that of your passen-

that you replace deployed air bags repair any malfunctioning air bags ake sure that the vehicle will con- to provide supplemental crash ction for occupants.

Warning! G

� Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use belts in-stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time only basis. An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced.

63

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Driver and front passenger air bags are deployed:

� in the event of a frontal impact

� if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

� independently of the side impact air bags

The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.

The passenger front air bag will only be deployed if:

� the front passenger seat is occupied

� the 56 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (� page 70)

� the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

� Dfrdotilw

� Npakese

� Aiafto

� InSRinaimquriz

� FoofunoulofrC

When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual.

Front air bags

1 Driver’s air bag2 Passenger front air bag

o not hang items such as coat hangers om the coat hooks or handles over the or. These items may turn into projec-

es and cause head and other injuries hen curtain air bag is deployed.

ever place your feet on the instrument nel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always ep both feet on the floor in front of the at.

r bag system components will be hot ter an air bag has inflated. Do not uch.

addition, improper repair work on the S creates a risk of rendering the SRS

operative or causing unintended r bag deployment. Work on the SRS ust therefore only be performed by alified technicians. Contact an autho-ed Mercedes-Benz Center.

r your protection and the protection others, when scrapping the air bag it or emergency tensioning device, r safety instructions must be fol-

wed. These instructions are available om your authorized Mercedes-Benz enter.

� Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abra-sions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

64

Safety and Security

Occup

Side imair bags

The windarea betarrows).

1 Wind2 Side

he use of seat belts and infant and child straint systems is required by law in all

0 states, the District of Columbia, the .S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

ven where this is not the case, all vehicle ccupants should have their seat belts stened whenever the vehicle is in otion.

or more information on seat belts, see Fastening the seat belt” (� page 43).

!Do n20 lbseat.impaside the s

iFor information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (� page 67).

ant safety

pact air bags, window curtain

ow curtain air bags 1 fill up the ween the A and C pillars (see

ow curtain air bag impact air bags

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are deployed:

� on the impacted side of the vehicle

� in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold

� independently of the front air bags

The front passenger side impact air bag will only deploy if the system senses that the front passenger seat is occupied.

The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

Seat belts

When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.

Tre5U

Eofam

F“

ot place objects heavier than s (9 kg) on the front passenger This could cause the front or side ct air bag on the front passenger to deploy in a crash which exceeds ystem's deployment threshold.

65

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warn

Alwayoff. Alproperear a

Failursitionrisk oaccidealway

If youcan byour syour slikely ejecteor kill

In thedeathyour sthey aerly w

Warning! G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

ing! G

s fasten your seat belt before driving ways make sure your passengers are rly restrained, even those sitting in the nd pregnant women.

e to wear and properly fasten and po- your seat belt greatly increases your f injuries and their likely severity in an nt. You and your passengers should

s wear seat belts.

are ever in an accident, your injuries e considerably more severe without eat belt properly buckled. Without eat belt buckled, you are much more to hit the interior of the vehicle or be d from it. You can be seriously injured

ed.

same crash, the possibility of injury or is lessened if you are properly wearing eat belt. Air bags can only protect as re designed if the occupants are prop-earing their seat belts.

Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-domen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning! G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

66

Safety and Security

Occup

Warni

USE SE

� Seaproothtionries

� Eacbeltredseving syspasairtain(seaandtemtionoccairwinpacthre

� Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per-son or other objects.

� Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.

� Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres-sure on the abdomen.

� Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

ant safety

ng! G

AT BELTS PROPERLY

t belts can only work when used perly. Never wear seat belts in any er way than as described in this sec-, as that could result in serious inju- in case of an accident.

h occupant should wear their seat at all times, because seat belts help uce the likelihood of and potential erity of injuries in accidents, includ-rollovers. The integrated restraint tem includes SRS (driver air bag, senger front air bag, side impact bags, head protection window cur- air bags for side windows), ETD t belt emergency tensioning device), front seat knee bolsters. The sys- is designed to enhance the protec- offered to properly belted upants in certain frontal (front bags and ETD) and side (side impact, dow curtain air bags and ETD) im-ts which exceed preset deployment sholds.

� Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoul-der. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could se-verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

� Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries.

� Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo-men. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

67

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Emergseat b

The seseats atension

The ETfollowi

� in fexc

� if thandSee

Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

� Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child.

� Make sure that the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Infant and child restraint seats and infor-mation on choosing an appropriate re-straint system can be obtained from any Mercedes-Benz Center.

Infant and child restraint systems

Only use a BabySmartTM1 compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle.

iTheactis fins

Theactsea

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

ency tensioning device (ETD), elt force limiter

at belts for the front and rear outer re equipped with emergency ing devices and belt force limiters.

D is designed to activate in the ng cases:

rontal or rear-end impacts eeding a preset severity level.

e restraint systems are operational functioning correctly. 1 indicator lamp (� page 58).

In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

ETDs for the front seats will only ivate if the respective front seat belt astened (latch plate properly erted into buckle).

ETDs for the rear outer seats will ivate with or without the respective t belt fastened.

Warning! G

An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.

When scrapping the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!Do not place objects heavier than 20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger seat. This could cause the front or side impact air bag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system's deployment threshold.

68

Safety and Security

Occup

We recoproperlyvehicle i

All lap-sseat belfor secu

To fastestraint inthe shouretract. ratchetinthat thevated. Ton child

To deactlet seat belt canner.

!The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territo-ries and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

ant safety

mmend all infants and children be restrained at all times while the s in motion.

houlder belts except the driver‘s t have special seat belt retractors re fastening of child restraints.

n a child restraint, follow child re-structions for mounting. Then pull lder belt out completely and let it

During the seat belt retraction, a g sound can be heard to indicate

special seat belt retractor is acti-he belt is now locked. Push down restraint to take up any slack.

ivate, release seat belt buckle and belt retract completely. The seat again be used in the usual man-

iFor information on child seats with anchor fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation of infant and child re-straint systems” (� page 72).

For information on child seat anchors - LATCH-type (� page 73).

Warning! G

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.

69

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

A sufadarlabinsres

Whsysfollfor

Pleaffior c

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. ��

tatement by the child restraint man-cturer of compliance with this stan-d can be found on the instruction el on the restraint and in the truction manual provided with the traint.

en using any infant or child restraint tem, be sure to carefully read and ow all manufacturer’s instructions installation and use.

ase read and observe warning labels xed to inside of vehicle and to infant hild restraints.

Warning! G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmartTM system installed in the ve-hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Other-wise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat-ing positions. Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur-er’s instructions.

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

70

Safety and Security

Occup

BabySmsystem

The 5the cent

1 Fronindic

elf-test BabySmartTM without special hild seat installed

fter turning the SmartKey in the starter witch to position 1 or 2, e 56 indicator lamp comes on r approximately six seconds and then

oes out.

the 56 indicator lamp should not ome on or is continuously lit, the system not functioning. You must see an uthorized Mercedes-Benz Center before eating any child on the front passenger eat.

or more information, see “Practical hints” page 348).

Do not hicle; echild redren in hicle eqand/or

1 BabySmAutomo

��

ant safety

artTM1 air bag deactivation

6 indicator lamp is located on er console.

t passenger front air bag off ator lamp

Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front air bag will not deploy.

The indicator lamp will be illuminated, ex-cept with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0.

Sc

Asthfog

Ifcisass

F(�

leave children unattended in the ve-ven if the children are secured in a straint system. Unsupervised chil-a child restraint system may use ve-uipment and may cause an accident serious personal injury.

artTM is a trademark of Siemens tive Corp.

iThe system does not deactivate the side impact air bag and the emergency tensioning device.

71

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Warn

The Btem wdesignwith ccomp

Neverand cthe eftem. Tmakecushiocouldaccide

Followinstal

1 BabySAutom

Warning! G

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM system. Such signal interference may cause the 56 indicator lamp (� page 70) not to come on during self-test or be contin-uously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.

ing! G

abySmartTM1 air bag deactivation sys-ill ONLY work with a special child seat ed to operate with it. It will not work

hild seats which are not BabySmartTM atible.

place anything between seat cushion hild seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces fectiveness of the deactivation sys-he bottom of the child seat must

full contact with the passenger seat n. An incorrectly mounted child seat

cause injuries to the child in case of an nt, instead of protecting the child.

the manufacturer’s instructions for lation of special child seats.

martTM is a trademark of Siemens otive Corp.

Warning! G

When using a BabySmartTM compatible child seat on the front passenger seat, the passenger front air bag will not deploy only if the 56 indicator lamp (� page 70) remains illuminated.

Please be sure to check the 56 indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat. Should the 56 indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the 56 indicator lamp remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

72

Safety and Security

Occup

Installasystem

This vehanchoraof the re

1 Cove

� Makin its

HookAnchorage ring

Securely fasten hook 2, which is part of the tether strap, to anchorage ring 3.

nce the top tether anchorage hook is ttached, the child restraint itself can be ecured. Tighten the top tether strap ccording to the child restraint anufacturer’s instructions.

ant safety

tion of infant and child restraint s

icle is equipped with tether ges for a top tether strap at each ar seating positions.

r of top anchorage ring

e sure the rear backrest is locked upright position (� page 255).

� Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring 3.

� Guide tether strap between head restraint and top of seat back.

Head restraint must be installed (if removable) and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back.

Make sure the tether strap is not twisted.

23

�

Oasam

Warning! G

Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest.

73

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

� Reiteth

Child s

This ve(Lowertype anseats) child sfittings

iForattacat

iIf a child seat is not installed, the LATCH-type anchors can be folded back between the seat cushion and the backrest (� page 74).

iThe child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 1.

With a child seat installed in the left rear seat, the seat belt for the center seat occupied by a passenger must op-erate freely. Guide seat belt between its seat cushion mount and backrest mount along outside of right side child seat anchor.

nstall cover 1 after removing the er strap.

eat anchors – LATCH-type

hicle is equipped with two LATCH- Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) chors (at each of the outer rear

for the installation of a LATCH-type eat with the matching mounting .

The foldable LATCH-type anchors are located between the seat cushion and the backrest.

1 Anchors2 Button

� Grip inner side of anchors 1 and fold forward until they audibly lock in place.

� Install child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

safety, make sure the hook has ched to the ring beyond the safety

ch, as illustrated.

74

Safety and Security

Occup

To fold

� Presand

iNon-be uvehicseat instr

The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors 1.

An incorrectly mounted child seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to the child.

Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or child seat anchors 1 must be replaced.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

ant safety

anchors back

s down button 2 on each anchor return anchor 1 to its catch.

LATCH-type child seats may also sed and can be installed using the le’s seat belt system. Install child according to the manufacturer’s uctions.

Warning! G

Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.

Before installing the child seat, make sure anchors 1 are folded out and locked in place.

Install child seat according to manufactur-er’s instructions.

75

Safety and Security

Occupant safety

Blocki

You caoperatchildrecompa

The ovcontro

1 Dea2 Act3 Ove

For more information, see “Power win-dows” (� page 239).

Warning! G

Activate the override switch when children are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The children may otherwise injure them-selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-dow opening.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

ng of rear door window operation

n block the rear door window ion (for instance when you have n riding in the rear passenger rtment).

erride switch is located on the door l panel of the driver’s door.

ctivating override switchivating override switchrride switch

Activating override switch

� Slide override switch 3 to the right.

The rear door windows can no longer be operated using the respective switch located in the rear doors.

Deactivating override switch

� Slide override switch 3 to the left.

The rear door windows can be operated again using the respective switch located in the rear doors.

iOperation of the rear door windows with the switches located on the door control panel of the driver’s door is still possible.

Safety and Security

ibwi

ti

s

alyi-ato

iCanada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

(2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

76

Panic

An audlamps 21/2 m

1 Â

Activa

� Preone

iCanOnantSmbut

alarm*

le alarm and flashing exterior ill operate for approximately nutes.

button

ng

s and hold button 1 for at least second.

Deactivating

� Press button 1 again.

or

� Insert SmartKey in starter switch.

da only: vehicles equipped with an theft alarm system* have rtKeys with integrated panic n 1.

iUSA only:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

77

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

�In the

�

�

�

�

ABS

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.

On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.

The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (� page 24) comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Warning! G

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

Drivinthis sec follow

ABS (A

BAS (B

ESP (E

4MATTractio

iIn wineffecti4MATIachievor sno

g safety systemstion you will find information on ing driving safety systems:

ntilock Brake System)

rake Assist System)

lectronic Stability Program)

IC (Four Wheel Electronic n System)

ter operation, the maximum veness of the ABS, ESP, and C (if so equipped) is only ed with winter tires (M+S tires), w chains as required.

Warning! G

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

� Excessive speed, especially in turns

� Wet and slippery road surfaces

� Following another vehicle too closely

The ABS, BAS, ESP, and 4MATIC (if so equipped) cannot reduce this risk.

Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

78

Safety and Security

Drivin

Braking

At the inlock up, brake pethe regu

� Keepbrakpulsa

Continuyields thnamely the vehi

The pulsindicatioand funccare wh

AS

he Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in mergency situations. If you apply the rakes very quickly, the BAS automatically rovides full brake boost, thereby poten-ally reducing the braking distance. Apply ontinuous full braking pressure until the mergency braking situation is over. The BS will prevent the wheels from locking.

hen you release the brake pedal, the rakes function again as normal. The BAS then deactivated.

Warning! G

If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-tem is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would normally provide in an emergen-cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

g safety systems

stant one of the wheels is about to a slight pulsation can be felt in the dal, indicating that the ABS is in lating mode.

firm and steady pressure on the e pedal while experiencing the tion.

ous steady brake pedal pressure e advantages provided by the ABS, braking power and ability to steer cle.

ating brake pedal can be an n of hazardous road conditions tions as a reminder to take extra

ile driving.

Emergency brake maneuver

� Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal.

For more information, see “Practical hints” (� page 342) and (� page 351).

B

TebpticeA

Wbis

Warning! G

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-less or dangerous manner which could jeop-ardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

79

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

For mo(� pag

Warn

The Bphysicit incraffordbrakeThe Bing thturns,or hydskillfucapabneverous muser’s

Warning! G

Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp v flashing in the speedometer. In this case, proceed as follows:

� While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

� While driving, ease up on the accelera-tor.

� Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

re information, see “Practical hints” e 352).

ESP

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is operational as soon as the engine is run-ning and monitors the vehicle's traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output, the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers.

The ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes when the ESP is engaged.

The ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

ing! G

AS cannot prevent the natural laws of s from acting on the vehicle, nor can

ease braking efficiency beyond that ed by the condition of the vehicle s and tires or the traction afforded. AS cannot prevent accidents, includ-ose resulting from excessive speed in following another vehicle too closely, roplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and l driver can prevent accidents. The ilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must be exploited in a reckless or danger-anner which could jeopardize the safety or the safety of others.

80

Safety and Security

Drivin

witching off the ESP

o improve the vehicle's traction, turn off e ESP in driving situations where it would

e advantageous to have the drive wheels pin and thus cut into surfaces for better rip such as:

starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains

in sand or gravel

Warni

The ESPphysicsit increacannot resultinhydroplskillful capabilnever bous mauser’s s

iThe Eyou utire s

Warning! G

The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum-stances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-dard driving maneuvers.

!Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore.

g safety systems

For more information, see “Practical hints” (� page 346) and (� page 353).

S

Tthbsg

�

�

ng! G

cannot prevent the natural laws of from acting on the vehicle, nor can se the traction afforded. The ESP prevent accidents, including those g from excessive speed in turns or aning. Only a safe, attentive, and driver can prevent accidents. The ities of an ESP equipped vehicle must e exploited in a reckless or danger-nner which could jeopardize the afety or the safety of others.

SP will only function properly if se wheels of the recommended ize (� page 420).

!Vehicles without 4MATIC:Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when

� the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer

� the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised

Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system.

For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with the ESP” (� page 82).

81

Safety and Security

Driving safety systems

When y

� the

� theallothu

� thespi

� theare

Switching on the ESP

� Press switch 1 again.

The ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer goes out.

You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on.

iWhor mESPomthe

Warning! G

When the ESP warning lamp v is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-ing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP.

!Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

ou switch off the ESP

ESP does not stabilize the vehicle

engine output is not limited, which ws the drive wheels to spin and s cut into surfaces for better grip

traction control will still brake a nning wheel

ESP continues to operate when you braking

The switch is located on the center console.

1 ESP switch (off/on)

� Press switch 1.

The ESP warning lamp v in the speedometer comes on.

The ESP is deactivated.

en the ESP is switched off and one ore drive wheels are spinning, the

warning lamp v in the speed-eter flashes. However, the ESP will n not stabilize the vehicle.

82

Safety and Security

Drivin

Four wh(4MATIC

Models

The 4MAuse avaioperatioconditiowheels.

Warni

If you sing in th

� Whas p

� Whtor

� Adathe

Failure cause t

The ESPfrom ex

!Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer

Active braking action through ESP may otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle brake system.

Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.

iAt highly demanding operating condi-tions, the electronic traction system may temporarily switch off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes. The message unavailable See Operator’s Manual will then appear in the multifunction display while the ESP warning lamp v is flashing. The ESP is still functioning normally.

g safety systems

eel electronic traction system ) with the ESP

with all-wheel-drive only.

TIC improves vehicle’s ability to lable traction, e.g. during winter n in mountains under snowy ns, by applying power to all four

ng! G

ee the ESP warning lamp v flash-e speedometer, proceed as follows:

ile driving off, apply as little throttle ossible

ile driving, ease up on the accelera-

pt your speed and driving style to prevailing road conditions

to observe these guidelines could he vehicle to skid.

cannot prevent accidents resulting cessive speed.

!Do not tow with one axle raised.

Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

!Performance testing must only be con-ducted on a two-axle dynamometer.

Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

83

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

�Im

Thpe

Ac

�

De

�

iThe alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.

iIf the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system* (� page 265) provid-ed Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that neces-sary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.

Anti-tmobili

e immorsons fr

tivatin

Removswitch

activa

Switch

iStartinthe im

In cas(yet ththe syan autor callUSA),

heft systemszer

bilizer prevents unauthorized om starting your vehicle.

g

e the SmartKey from the starter .

ting

on the ignition (� page 33).

Anti-theft alarm system*

Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens

� a door

� the trunk lid

� the hood

The alarm system will also be triggered when

� someone attempts to raise the vehicle (� page 85)

� opening the vehicle with the mechanical key

g the engine will also deactivate mobilizer.

e the engine cannot be started e vehicle’s battery is charged), stem is not operational. Contact horized Mercedes-Benz Center 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

84

Safety and Security

Anti-th

Arming

The inditow-awa

1 Indic

� Lock

The tto inactivflashafter

isarming the alarm system

Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey.

The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated.

anceling the alarm

o cancel the alarm:

Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

r

Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

iThe alarm system will rearm automati-cally after approximately 40 seconds if no door or the trunk lid was opened.

eft systems

the alarm system

cator lamp is in the switch for the y alarm* in the center console.

ator lamp

the vehicle with the SmartKey.

urn signal lamps flash three times dicate that the alarm system is ated. Indicator lamp 1 begins to after approximately 30 seconds arming the alarm system.

D

�

C

T

�

o

�

iIf the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

� a door

� the trunk lid

� the hood

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

85

Safety and Security

Anti-theft systems

Tow-a

Once tand ausomeo

The switch is located on the center console.

1 Tow-away alarm off switch2 Indicator lamp

� Switch off the ignition.

iThetriglifte

If th30CenTeled andsarare

iYou cannot disarm the tow-away alarm while the ignition is switched on. ��

way alarm*

he tow-away alarm is armed, a visual dible alarm will be triggered when ne attempts to raise the vehicle.

Arming tow-away alarm

� Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.

The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds.

Disarming tow-away alarm

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, switch off the tow-away alarm feature before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.

tow-away protection alarm is gered, for example, if the vehicle is d on one side.

e alarm stays on for more than seconds, a call to the Response ter is initiated automatically by the

e Aid system* (� page 265) provid-Tele Aid service was subscribed to properly activated, and that neces-

y cellular service and GPS coverage available.

iWhen you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again.

86

Safety and Security

Anti-th

� Pres

Indicbrief

� Exit Sma

The towuntil you

��

eft systems

s switch 1.

ator lamp 2 in switch comes on ly.

and lock your vehicle with the rtKey.

-away alarm remains disarmed lock your vehicle again.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

� Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey.

or

� Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

87

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Seats

Memory function*

Lighting

Instrument cluster

Control system

Manual transmission

Automatic transmission*

Good visibility

Climate control

Automatic climate control*

Audio system

Power windows

Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Driving systems

Loading

Useful features

Controls in detail

“Cta eo

un o

kctgrrhe

in

martKey with remote control

‹ Lock buttonŠ Opening button for the trunk lidMechanical key locking tabŒ Unlock buttonBattery check lamp Panic button* (� page 76).

iCanada only:Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic button 6.

88

In the find deate thecle. If ybasic fwill be

To quicsic fun“GettinThe coen at t

Lock

ontrols in detail” section you will iled information on how to oper-quipment installed on your vehi-u are already familiar with the ctions of your vehicle, this section f particular interest to you.

ly familiarize yourself with the ba-ions of the vehicle, refer to the started” section of this manual. esponding page numbers are giv- beginning of each segment.

g and unlocking

For more information on locking and unlocking, see “Getting started” (� page 32) and (� page 54).

SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each SmartKey unit.

The SmartKey provides an extended oper-ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:

� the doors

� the trunk

� the fuel filler flap

S

123456

89

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Warn

WhenSmartwith ychildraccesfor chinsideand/o

!To expele

iCanada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

(2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

iYou can also open and close the power windows (� page 241) and power tilt/sliding sunroof* (� page 245) from outside using the SmartKey.

ing! G

leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key from the starter switch, take it ou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle, or with s to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible ildren to open a locked door from the , which could result in an accident r serious injury.

prevent possible malfunction, avoid osing the SmartKey to high levels of ctromagnetic radiation.

iUSA only:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

90

Controls in detail

Lockin

Factory

Global u

� Pres

All tulockiThe aarme

The vehiand reacsystem*of unloc

� neith

� the Sstart

� the cactiv

The SmartKey will then function as follows:

nlocking driver’s door and fuel filler ap

Press button Πonce.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door moves up. The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-armed.

lobal unlocking

Press button Πtwice.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-armed.

g and unlocking

setting

nlocking

s button Œ.

rn signal lamps flash once. The ng knobs in the doors move up. nti-theft alarm system* is dis-d.

cle will lock again automatically tivate the anti-theft alarm within approximately 40 seconds king if:

er door nor trunk is opened

martKey is not inserted in the er switch

entral locking switch is not ated

Global locking

� Press button ‹.

All turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs in the doors move down. The anti-theft alarm system* is armed.

Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.

� Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ simultaneously for about five seconds until battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.

Ufl

�

G

�

91

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Global

� Pre

All Thedowarm

Restor

� Presimunttwi

Checking the batteries

� Press button ‹ or Œ.

Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.

iIf battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly during check, then the SmartKey batteries are discharged.

Replace the batteries (� page 384).

You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

iIf the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ button will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

locking

ss button ‹.

turn signal lamps flash three times. locking knobs in the doors move n. The anti-theft alarm system* is ed.

ing to factory setting

ss and hold buttons Œ and ‹ ultaneously for about six seconds il battery check lamp 5 flashes ce.

!If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the SmartKey are dis-charged, the SmartKey is malfunction-ing or the vehicle battery is drained.

� Check the batteries in the SmartKey (� page 91) and replace them if necessary (� page 384).

� Use the mechanical key to unlock the driver’s door (� page 378) and the trunk lid (� page 379).

� Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s door (� page 379).

� Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked (� page 401).

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

92

Controls in detail

Lockin

Unlocki

You canseparate

A minim(1.74 m

� Presunlo

pening the doors from the inside

ou can open a locked door from the side. Open door only when conditions

re safe to do so.

Locking knobInside door handle

!The tautois su

iIf the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.

g and unlocking

ng and opening the trunk lid

unlock and open the trunk ly.

um height clearance of 5.71 ft ) is required to open the trunk lid.

s button Š until trunk lid cks and begins to open.

Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key

If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following:

� Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company.

� If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace-ment.

O

Yina

12

runk lid swings open upwards matically. Always make sure there fficient overhead clearance.

93

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Front

� Pulres

If dmo

Rear d

� Pulres

� Pulres

The vehicle must be unlocked.

� Pull on handle 1.

The trunk lid unlocks and begins to open.

The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (� page 96).

To foll

�

�!The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

doors

l on door handle 2 on the pective front door to open door.

oor was locked, locking knob 1 will ve up.

oors

l up locking knob 1 on the pective rear door to unlock door.

l on door handle 2 on the pective rear door to open door.

Opening the trunk

Opening the trunk from the outside

A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.

1 Handle

cancel the alarm, do one of the owing:

Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.

Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

94

Controls in detail

Lockin

Opening

You canthe vehi

A minim(1.74 m

The remthe drive

1 Remlamp

losing the trunk

epending on production date, your ehicle is equipped with either trunk esign A or B.

runk design A

Handle

Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on handle 1.

Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on trunk lid.

g and unlocking

the trunk from the inside

open the trunk from the inside if cle is stationary.

um height clearance of 5.71 ft ) is required to open the trunk lid.

ote trunk lid switch is located on r’s door.

ote trunk lid switch with indicator

� Press remote trunk lid switch 1 until the trunk begins to open.

The indicator lamp in the switch remains lit as long as the trunk is open.

The trunk can also be opened using button Š on the SmartKey or from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (� page 96).

C

Dvd

T

1

�

�

!The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

95

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Trunk d

1 Han2 Han

� Lowhan

� Cloon

iDo not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out.

iIf the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automati-cally after closing it. The turn signals will flash three times to confirm lock-ing.

esign B

dledles

er trunk lid by pulling firmly on dle 1 or handles 2.

se trunk lid with hands placed flat trunk lid.

Warning! G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-cially careful when small children are around.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Warning! G

Only drive with the trunk closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

96

Controls in detail

Lockin

Trunk li

The emeon the in

1 Eme

� Briefbutto

The topen

!The tauto

iIf the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey, opening the trunk from the inside using the emergency release button will trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

� Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey.

� Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

g and unlocking

d emergency release

rgency release button is located side of the trunk lid.

rgency release button

ly press emergency release n 1.

runk lid unlocks and the trunk lid s.

Illumination of the emergency release button:

� The button will flash for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.

� The button will flash for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.

runk lid swings open upwards matically.

iThe emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion.

iThe emergency release button does not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.

97

Controls in detail

Locking and unlocking

Autom

The dowhen twheelsapprox

You cainside.are saf

You camode uting au

Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either switch design A or B.

The switches are located in the center console.

Switch design A

1 Central locking switch2 Central unlocking switch

iTheaccexc

To loccen

�

�

atic central locking

ors and the trunk automatically lock he ignition is switched on and the are turning at vehicle speeds of imately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

n open a locked door from the Open door only when conditions e to do so.

n deactivate the automatic locking sing the control system, see “Set-

tomatic locking” (� page 147).

Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.

You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap with the central locking or unlocking switch.

doors unlock automatically after an ident if the force of the impact eeds a preset threshold.

prevent the vehicle door locks from king, deactivate the automatic tral locking when the vehicle

is pushed or towed

is on a test stand

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

98

Controls in detail

Lockin

Switch d

1 Cent2 Cent

ocking

Press central locking switch 1.

If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

nlocking

Press central unlocking switch 2.

The vehicle unlocks.

g and unlocking

esign B

ral locking switchral unlocking switch

L

�

U

�

iYou can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2.

If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1

� while in the selective remote con-trol mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.

� while in the global remote control mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from the inside.

99

Controls in detail

Seats

�Fo“A

Ea

Thex

ThacCosy

When exiting the vehicle, with the easy-entry/exit feature activated and depending on your selection, the steering wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s seat moves a few inches to the rear when you:

� remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,

or

� open the driver’s door with the SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1.

iIf the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

Seatsr informdjusting

sy-entr

is featuit from

e easy-tivated nvenienstem (�

ation on seat adjustment, see ” (� page 35).

y/exit feature*

re allows for easier entry into and the vehicle.

entry/exit feature can be or deactivated in the ce submenu of the control page 148).

Warning! G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Press seat adjustment switch* (� page 30).

� Move steering column stalk* (� page 40).

� Press memory position switch* (� page 108).

Do not leave children unattended in the ve-hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door and unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

100

Controls in detail

Seats

When eneasy-entsteeringselectioseat willa factorywhen yo

� closeswitc

� inserswitc

emoving and installing front seat ead restraints

or information on head restraint djustment, see “Seats” (� page 35).

If thefactosystepositeasywill neasy

iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible.

Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

tering the vehicle, with the ry/exit feature activated, the wheel or, depending on your n, the steering wheel and driver’s return to their last set position or -set maximum forward position u:

the driver’s door with the ignition hed on

t the SmartKey into the starter h with the driver’s door closed.

Rh

Fa

current seat position falls into a ry-set position range and the m recognizes the current seat ion to be rearward enough for entry and exit, the driver’s seat ot move to the rear when the -entry/exit feature is activated.

iFor safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not return to its last set position with the easy-entry/exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set posi-tion as an extreme forward position. Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at or move to a factory-set maximum forward position. To again fully return the driver’s seat to your last set posi-tion or to memory position, adjust the seat to the desired position or press and hold the respective memory position switch* (� page 108).

101

Controls in detail

Seats

Front seat head restraints, power seat*

1 Head restraint switch

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Removing front seat head restraints

� Press switch 1 upwards and hold until head restraint is fully extended.

� Pull out head restraint.

Do nohead ed to dent.

Do nofront

iTiltremres

Front seat head restraints, manual seat

1 Release button

Removing front seat head restraints

� Pull head restraint to its highest position.

� Push release button 1 and pull out head restraint.

Installing front seat head restraints

� Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages.

� Push release button 1 and adjust head restraint to desired position.

t drive the vehicle without the seat restraints. Head restraints are intend-help reduce injuries during an acci-

t interchange head restraints from and rear seat.

the backrest to the rear for easier oval and installation of the head

traints.

102

Controls in detail

Seats

Installin

� Presabou

� Pushenga

� Adjuposit

Rear se

Warni

For saferear hewhen th

Keep thof articfolding

iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible.

Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

g front seat head restraints

s switch 1 upwards and hold for t five seconds.

head restraint down until it ges.

st head restraint to desired ion (� page 38).

at head restraints

Head restraint height (rear outer seats)

1 Release button

Raising:

� Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward.

If the head restraint is fully retracted, push release button 1 and pull the head restraint out.

Lowering:

� To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and push down on the head restraint.

ng! G

ty reasons, always drive with the ad restraints in the upright position e rear seats are occupied.

e area around head restraints clear les (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the operation of the head restraints.

103

Controls in detail

Seats

Foldinreleas

The reabackw

1 Rel

� Pus

The

Placing head restraints upright

� Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into position.

iYouheain t

Warning! G

Make sure the head restraints engage when placing them upright. Otherwise their protective function cannot be assured.

g head restraints back with e button

r seat head restraints can be folded ard for increased visibility.

ease button

h release button 1.

head restraint will fold backward.

Folding head restraints back with switch in the center console (rear outer seats)

1 Switch for rear seat head restraints

� Start the engine (� page 46).

� Press switch 1.

The rear seat head restraints will fold backward.

can also fold the rear outer seat d restraints back using the switch he center console (� page 103).

104

Controls in detail

Seats

Head re

Two diffposition

� Presand desir

Removirestrain

Release button

emoving rear seat head restraints

Fold back head restraint (� page 103).

Pull head restraint to its highest position.

Push release button 1 and pull out head restraint.

stalling rear seat head restraints

Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages.

Push button 1 and adjust head restraint to desired position.

iAdjuthat poss

iThe rcann

straint tilt (rear outer seats)

erent head restraint angle s are available:

s the release button (� page 103) tilt the head restraint to the ed position.

ng and installing rear seat head ts (rear outer seats)

1

R

�

�

�

In

�

�

st the head restraint in such a way it is as close to the head as ible.

ear center seat head restraint ot be removed.

Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the poten-tial for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intend-ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-dent.

Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat.

105

Controls in detail

Seats

Multic

This mcushiointo thlumbar

The secushiocontinuside of

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Seat cushion depth

� Adjust the seat cushion depth to the length of your upper leg using switch 1.

Backrest contour

� Adjust the contour of the backrest to the desired position using switches 2 and 3.

Backrest side bolsters

� Adjust the backrest side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch 4.

ontour seats*

ulticontour seat has a movable seat n and inflatable air cushions built e backrest to provide additional and side support.

at cushion movement, backrest n height and curvature can be ously varied with switches on the

the seat after switching on ignition.1 Seat cushion depth2 Backrest bottom3 Backrest center4 Backrest side bolster adjustment

106

Controls in detail

Seats

Seat he

The switlocated

1 Seat2 Indic

witching on seat heating

Press switch 1 twice.

Three red indicator lamps 2 in the switch come on.

Continue pressing switch 1 until desired seat heating level is reached.

witching off seat heating

Press switch 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 go out.

iIf one or all of the indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off auto-matically.

The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

ating*

ches for the front seats are in the center console.

heating switchator lamps

The red indicator lamps 2 in the switch show the heating level selected.

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

S

�

�

S

�

Level

3 Three indicator lamps on.

After approximately five minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2.

2 Two indicator lamps on.

After approximately ten minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1.

1 One indicator lamp on.

After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched off.

off No indicator lamp on.

107

Controls in detail

Memory function*

�The following settings are not key-dependent. They are stored when using the buttons on the front passenger door:

� Front passenger seat, backrest and head restraint position

Warning! G

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Mem

!Prior tdriver heightseat bensurecomfobe adjthe seproper

In addensuretion anexterioadjust

Fastenchildresecurewith UStandaMotorand 21

ory function*You can store up to three different settings for each SmartKey.

The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the driver’s door:

� Driver’s seat, backrest and head restraint position

� Steering wheel position

� Exterior rear view mirror positions

These key-dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired. For informa-tion on key-dependent memory settings, see “Setting key-dependency” (� page 149).

o operating the vehicle, the should check and adjust the seat , seat position fore and aft, and ackrest angle if necessary, to adequate control, reach and rt. The head restraint should also usted for proper height. See also ction on air bags (� page 59) for seat positioning.

ition, adjust the steering wheel to adequate control, reach, opera-d comfort. Both the interior and r rear view mirrors should be

ed for adequate rear vision.

seat belts. Infants and small n should be seated in a properly d restraint system that complies .S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety rds 213 and 225 and Canadian

Vehicle Safety Standards 213 0.2.

108

Controls in detail

Memo

The memswitch a

1 Mem2 Mem

� Swit

or

� Openthe S

ecalling positions from memory

Turn memory position switch 2 to the selected memory position.

Press and hold memory position switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors have completely moved to the stored positions.

!Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats.

iReleasing the memory position switch stops movement to the stored positions immediately.

ry function*

ory button and memory position re located on the door.

ory buttonory position switch

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

the respective door and insert martKey in the starter switch.

Storing positions into memory

� Adjust the seat, steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position (� page 35).

� Turn memory position switch 2 to the selected memory position.

� Press memory button 1.

� Release memory button 1 and press memory position switch 2 within three seconds.

All settings are stored to the selected position.

R

�

�

109

Controls in detail

Memory function*

Storinparkin

For easpassenthat yosoon a

For infpositiorear vie(� pag

� Press button 3.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror is selected.

� Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb.

� Press memory button 1.

� Within three seconds, press bottom of adjustment button 2.

The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move.i

Youpasmir

iIf the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again.

g exterior rear view mirror g position

ier parking, you can adjust the ger-side exterior rear view mirror so u can see the right rear wheel as s you engage reverse gear R.

ormation on activating the parking n feature, see “Activating exterior w mirror parking position*”

e 172). 1 Memory button2 Adjustment button3 Passenger-side exterior rear view

mirror button

� Stop the vehicle.

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

can store a parking position for the senger-side exterior rear view ror for each SmartKey.

Controls in detail

in

ormhiur

OffDaytime running lamp mode (� page 112)

Automatic headlamp modeDaytime running lamp mode (� page 112)

Parking lamps (also tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, instrument panel lamps)

Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps

Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)

Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

Indicator lamp for front fog lamps

Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp

oue ceddeot

110

Light

For infheadla“Switcand “T

iIf ydrivthetermoRelat yCen

g

mation on how to switch on the ps and use the turn signals, see ng on headlamps” (� page 50) n signals” (� page 50).

Exterior lamp switch

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Exterior lamp switch

M

U

C

B

ˆ

‚

‡

†

drive in countries where vehicles on the other side of the road than ountry where the vehicle is regis-, you must have the headlamps

ified for symmetrical low beams. vant information can be obtained ur authorized Mercedes-Benz er.

111

Controls in detail

Lighting

Manua

The lowlamps exterio

Autom

The folautomof the

� Low

� Tai

� Lic

� Sid

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U.

With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1, only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically.

iWitstaopelamswi

Theapp

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times.

l headlamp mode

beam headlamps and the parking can be switched on and off with the r lamp switch.

atic headlamp mode

lowing lamps switch on and off atically depending on the brightness ambient light:

beam headlamps

l and parking lamps

ense plate lamps

e marker lamps

h the SmartKey removed from the rter switch and the driver’s door n, a warning sounds if the parking ps or low beam headlamps are tched on.

message Switch off lights. ears in the multifunction display

Warning! G

If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,

� the headlamps may switch off unexpect-edly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic.

� the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to B when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position U to B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

112

Controls in detail

Lightin

Daytime

� Turnposit

When thheadlam

In low amfollowing

� Tail a

� Licen

� Side

For nighexterior permit alamps.

SA only:

y default, the daytime running lamp mode deactivated. Activate the daytime nning lamp mode using the control

ystem, see “Setting daytime running lamp ode (USA only)” (� page 144).

hen the engine is running, and you turn e exterior lamp switch to position C

r B, the manual headlamp mode has riority over the daytime running lamp ode.

he corresponding exterior lamps switch n (� page 110).

iWithactivin polamp

The htime

g

running lamp mode

the exterior lamp switch to ion M or U.

e engine is running, the low beam ps are switched on.

bient light conditions, the lamps will switch on additionally:

nd parking lamps

se plate lamps

marker lamps

ttime driving you should turn the lamp switch to position B to ctivation of the high beam head-

Canada only:

The daytime running lamp mode is manda-tory and therefore in a constant mode.

Vehicles with automatic transmission*:When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay.

When the engine is running, and you

� turn the exterior lamp switch to position C, the parking lamps switch on additionally.

� turn the exterior lamp switch to position B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (� page 110).

U

Bisrusm

Wthopm

To

the daytime running lamp mode ated and the exterior lamp switch sition M, the high beam head-s cannot be switched on.

igh beam flasher is available at all s.

113

Controls in detail

Lighting

Locatoillumin

The locilluminsysteming” (�rity illu

Fog la

Front fog lamps

� Switch on the low beam headlamps (� page 110).

� Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The front fog lamps switch on.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch comes on (� page 110).

� Push in the exterior lamp switch.

The front fog lamps switch off.

The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

Warn

In lowonly sthe vefrom U

headlambieaccide

r lighting and night security ation

ator lighting and the night security ation are described in the “Control ” section, see “Setting locator light-page 145) and “Setting night secu-

mination” (� page 145).

mps

ing! G

ambient lighting or foggy conditions, witch from position U to B with hicle at a standstill. Switching

to B will briefly switch off the amps. Doing so while driving in low nt lighting conditions may result in an nt.

iFog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permis-sible lamp operation.

iFog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position U. For switching on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position B first.

114

Controls in detail

Lightin

Rear fog

� Swit(� pa

� Pull seco

The r

The yexte(� pa

� Pushstop

The r

The yexte

The f

igh beam

Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B or U (� page 110).

Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster comes on (� page 24).

Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam.

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp A in the instrument cluster goes out.

igh beam flasher

Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2.

g

lamp (driver’s side only)

ch on the front fog lamps ge 113).

out the exterior lamp switch to nd stop.

ear fog lamp switches on.

ellow indicator lamp † in the rior lamp switch comes on ge 110).

in the exterior lamp switch to first .

ear fog lamp switches off.

ellow indicator lamp † in the rior lamp switch goes out.

ront fog lamps remain lit.

Combination switch

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Combination switch

1 High beam2 High beam flasher

H

�

�

�

H

�

115

Controls in detail

Lighting

CorneBi-XenC 230and C

The cotion of

Cornerengine

� thepos

or

� thepos

or

� theact

Switching off cornering fog lamps

The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the cornering fog lamps if they were activated by switching on the left or right turn signal.

If the turn signal should stay on after mak-ing the turn, the turn signal and cornering fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original posi-tion.

iThe cornering fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steer-ing angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If the cornering fog lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle.

ring fog lamps* (All models with on* headlamps, except Kompressor Sport, C 320 Sport, 55 AMG)

rnering fog lamps improve illumina- the road into which you are turning.

ing fog lamps will operate with the running and with

exterior lamp switch in ition B (� page 110)

exterior lamp switch in ition U (� page 110)

daytime running lamp mode ivated (� page 112)

Driving forward

Switching on cornering fog lamps

� Depending on whether you are turning left or right, switch on the left or right turn signal (� page 50).

The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road into which you are turning.

iCornering fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.

The cornering fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

116

Controls in detail

Lightin

Driving

Switchin

� Placetransposit

The iautostee

Switchin

� Placetransposit

The r

witching on hazard warning flasher

Press hazard warning flasher switch 1.

All turn signals are flashing.

witching off hazard warning flasher

Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 again.

iWith the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on.

iIf the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.

g

rearward

g on cornering fog lamps

the gear selector lever (manual mission: gearshift lever) in ion R.

nverse front fog lamp comes on matically depending on the ring direction and steering angle.

g off cornering fog lamps

the gear selector lever (manual mission: gearshift lever) out of ion R.

espective front fog lamp goes out.

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch.

The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys.

The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

S

�

S

�

117

Controls in detail

Lighting

Interio

The cocontro

1 Rea2 Rig3 Roc

sys4 Lef

Deactivating automatic control

� Press the = symbol on rocker switch 3.

The interior lighting remains switched off, even when you:

� unlock the vehicle

� open a door

� remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

Manual control

Switching all front interior lights on and off

� Press the W symbol on rocker switch 3.

The front interior lights come on.

� Press rocker switch 3 to center position to activate the automatic control.

r lighting

ntrols are located in the overhead l panel.

r interior lightsht front reading lampker switch for automatic control temt front reading lamp

Activating automatic control

� Press rocker switch 3 to center position.

Interior lamps are switched on in darkness when you:

� unlock the vehicle

� open a door

� remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

The interior lamps are switched off after a preset time, see “Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off” (� page 147).

iIf the door remains open, the interior lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes, when the SmartKey is removed or in starter switch position 0.

An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically.

118

Controls in detail

Lightin

Switchin

� Pres

The lcom

� Pres

The lcom

Switchinand off

� Pres

The r

� Pres

The r

Switchinoff

� Pres

The l

� Pres

The l

runk lamp

he trunk lamp switches on if the trunk lid opened.

you leave the trunk open for an extended eriod of time, the trunk lamp will switch ff automatically after approximately ten inutes.

g

g rear interior lights on and off

s button V.

ights in the rear passenger partment come on.

s button V again.

ights in the rear passenger partment go out.

g right front reading lamp on

s right button X.

ight reading lamp comes on.

s right button X again.

ight reading lamp goes out.

g left front reading lamp on and

s left button X.

eft reading lamp comes on.

s left button X again.

eft reading lamp goes out.

Door entry lamps

The appropriate door entry lamp switches on if a door is opened in darkness and if the interior lighting is switched to auto-matic function.

The entry lamp switches off automatically when the door is closed.

T

Tis

Ifpom

iIf you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes.

119

Controls in detail

Instrument cluster

�Foclu

1

Thyo

�

�

�

�

Yoseof

To brighten illumination

� Turn reset button 1 clockwise.

The instrument cluster illumination will brighten.

To dim illumination

� Turn reset button 1 counterclock-wise.

The instrument cluster illumination will dim.

Instrur a full vster, se

Reset

e instruu

open a

switch

press

switch

u can cttings inthe con

ment clusteriew illustration of the instrument e “At a glance” (� page 24).

button

ment cluster is activated when

door

on the ignition

reset button 1

on the exterior lamps

hange the instrument cluster the Instrument cluster submenu trol system (� page 137).

Instrument cluster illumination

Use reset button 1 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.

iThe instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions.

The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.

120

Controls in detail

Instrum

Coolant

The cooleft side(� page

uring severe operating conditions, e.g. top-and-go traffic, the coolant tempera-re may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

he engine should not be operated with e coolant temperature above 248°F 20°C). Doing so may cause serious en-

ine damage which is not covered by the ercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

ent cluster

temperature gauge

lant temperature gauge is on the in the instrument cluster 24).

Dstu

Tth(1gM

Warning! G

� Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com-ing from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

121

Controls in detail

Instrument cluster

Trip od

� Maodomu

� If itor ÿwhododis

� Preinsthe

Outside temperature indicator

Warning! G

The outside temperature indicator is not de-signed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

ometer

ke sure you are viewing the trip meter and main odometer in the

ltifunction display (� page 123).

is not displayed, press button è on the multifunction steering

eel (� page 124) until the trip meter appears in the multifunction

play.

ss and hold the reset button in the trument cluster (� page 119) until trip odometer is reset.

Tachometer

The red marking on the tachometer (� page 24) denotes excessive engine speed.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.

!Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

122

Controls in detail

Instrum

The outsmultifuninformatindicateCelsiussee “Sel(� page

hen moving the vehicle into colder ambi-nt temperatures (e.g. when leaving your arage), you will notice a delay before the wer temperature is displayed.

delay also occurs when ambient temper-tures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-erature indications caused by heat diated from the engine during idling or

low driving.

ent cluster

ide temperature is indicated in the ction display (� page 123). For ion on how to select the unit of the d temperature, i.e. degrees (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), ecting temperature display mode” 137).

The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com-parison to a thermometer placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).

Weglo

Aapras

123

Controls in detail

Control system

�Ththeturen

�

�

Fosynefordis

Multifunction display

1 Trip odometer2 Main odometer3 Current program mode4 Current gear selector lever

position/gear range5 Digital clock6 Status indicator (outside tempera-

ture/digital speedometer)

Contre contr Smartned to ables y

call up

chang

r exampstem toxt due f messaplay, a

iThe di(radio,regard

ol systemol system is activated as soon as Key in the starter switch is position 1. The control system ou to

information about your vehicle

e vehicle settings

le, you can use the control find out when your vehicle is or service, to set the language ges in the instrument cluster nd much more.

The control system relays information to the multifunction display.

splays for the audio systems CD player) will appear in English, less of the language selected.

Warning! G

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

124

Controls in detail

Contro

Multifu

The dispand the controlletion stee

ressing any of the buttons on the multi-nction steering wheel will alter what is

hown in the multifunction display.

he information available in the multifunc-on display is arranged in menus, each ontaining a number of functions or sub-enus.

he individual functions are then found ithin the relevant menu (radio or CD op-rations under AUDIO, for example). These nctions serve to call up relevant informa-

on or to customize the settings for your ehicle.

iC 230 Kompressor Sport, and C 320 Sport:Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to Sport models as well.

l system

nction steering wheel

lays in the multifunction display settings in the control system are d by the buttons on the multifunc-ring wheel.

Pfus

Tticm

Twefutiv

1 Multifunction display

Operating the control system

2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

3 Telephone*:Press button

s to take a call

t to end a call

4 Menu systems:Press button

è for next menu

ÿ for previous menu

5 Moving within a menu:Press button

j for next display

k for previous display

125

Controls in detail

Control system

It is hefunctioarrang

� If yrepme

� If yrepfunthe

The number of menus available in the sys-tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle.

The menus are described on the following pages.

lpful to think of the menus, and the ns within each menu, as being ed in a circular pattern.

ou press button è or ÿ eatedly, you will pass through each nu one after the other.

ou press button k or j eatedly, you will pass through each ction display, one after the other, in current menu.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see “Submenus in the Settings menu” (� page 135).

126

Controls in detail

Contro

Menus he table on the next page provides an verview of the individual menus.

l system

This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus.

To

127

Controls in detail

Control system

Menus

Me Menu 6 Menu 7

Sta Trip computer Telephone*

(� 134) (� page 150) (� page 152)

Com

man

ds/s

ubm

enus

Digor tur

factory Fuel consumption statistics after start

Load phone book

Caser

nt clus-enu

Fuel consumption statistics since the last reset

Search for name in phone book

Chlev

te Call up range

nce

, submenus and functions

nu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5

ndard display AUDIO NAV* Vehicle status message memory

Settings

page 128) (� page 129) (� page 132) (� page 132) (� page

ital speedometer outside tempera-e

Select radio station

Activate route guidance

Call up vehicle mal-function, warning and system status messages stored in memory

Reset tosettings

ll up maintenance vice display

Select satellite radio station* (USA only)

Instrumeter subm

eck engine oil el

Operate the CD player*

Time/Dasubmenu

Lighting submenu

Vehicle submenu

Conveniesubmenu

128

Controls in detail

Contro

you see another display, press utton è or ÿ repeatedly until the tandard display appears.

ou can select the functions in the tandard display menu with button k r j .

he following functions are available:

iThe hare dwithisarilycont

The fmenwhic unction Page

isplay digital speedometer or utside temperature

129

alling up maintenance service isplay

332

hecking engine oil level 296

l system

Standard display menu

In the standard display, the main odometer and the trip odometer are shown in the multifunction display.

1 Trip odometer2 Main odometer

Ifbs

Yso

T

eadings used in the menus table esigned to facilitate navigation n the system and are not neces- identical to those shown in the

rol system displays.

irst function displayed in each u will automatically show you h part of the system you are in. F

Do

Cd

C

129

Controls in detail

Control system

Displatempe

� Preuntin t

Thethe

1 Dig

AUDIO menu

The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on.

If no audio equipment is currently turned on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the multifunction display.

The following functions are available:

Function Page

Select radio station 130

Select satellite radio station* (USA only)

130

Operate the CD player* 131

y digital speedometer or outside rature

ss button j or k repeatedly il the digital speedometer appears he multifunction display.

current vehicle speed is shown in multifunction display.

ital speedometer

iYou can have the outside temperature displayed instead of the digital speedometer. You can select the setting in the submenu Instr.Cl. via the function Status line display (� page 138).

130

Controls in detail

Contro

Select r

� TurnVehiRefeinstr

� Presuntilappe

1 Wave2 Stati

elect satellite radio station* SA only)

he satellite radio is treated as a radio pplication.

Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key (SAT) in the radio menu.

SAT mode and preset numberChannel name or number

l system

adio station

on the radio (� page 202). cles with COMAND*: r to separate operating uctions.

s button è or ÿ repeatedly the currently tuned station ars in the multifunction display.

band settingon frequency

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired station is found.

S(U

Ta

�

12

iYou can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio (� page 210).

Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions.

You can also operate the radio in the usual manner.

131

Controls in detail

Control system

� Preunt

1 Current CD (for CD changer*)2 Current track

� Press button k or j repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

iForoperad

VehRefins

iTo select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the audio system or the COMAND* system key pad located in the center dashboard.

ss button k or j repeatedly il the desired channel is found.

Operate the CD player*

� Turn on the radio and select the CD player (� page 217). Vehicles with COMAND*:Refer to separate operating instructions.

� Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display.

more information on satellite radio ration, see “Introduction to satellite io* (USA only)” (� page 212).

icles with COMAND*: er to separate operating tructions.

132

Controls in detail

Contro

NAV* m

The NAV needed

� Presuntilmult

� If thethe mmult

� If themessstatein th

Please rinstructiguidanc Press button è or ÿ repeatedly

until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.

Warning! G

Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten-tionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind-er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (� page 349).

l system

enu

menu contains the functions to operate your navigation system.

s button è or ÿ repeatedly the message NAV appears in the ifunction display.

navigation system is switched off, essage NAV OFF appears in the

ifunction display.

navigation system is on, different ages, depending on the current of the navigation system, appear e multifunction display.

efer to the COMAND* manual for ons on how to activate the route e system*.

Vehicle status message memory menu

Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the mul-tifunction display and are based on condi-tions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded.

�

133

Controls in detail

Control system

No veh

If no cothe meis: No

Vehiclrecord

If condmessamessadisplay

1 Nu

iThe vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only see high-priority messages in the multi-function display (� page 349).

icle status messages

nditions are recorded in memory, ssage in the multifunction display message

e status messages have been ed

itions have occured causing status ges to be recorded, the number of ges appears in the multifunction :

mber of messages

� Press button k or j .

The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occured. For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display” (� page 349).

Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunc-tion display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

134

Controls in detail

Contro

Setting

In the Sefunction

� The fsettthe ssetti

� A coyou cyour

� Presuntilmult

iThe settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time. After approximately five seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display.

For safety reasons, the following functions are not reset while driving:

� the Hdlamp mode function in the Lighting submenu

� the Key dependency function in the Convenience submenu

l system

s menu

ttings menu there are two s:

unction Reset to factory ings, with which you can reset all ettings to the original factory ngs.

llection of submenus with which an make individual settings for

vehicle.

s button è or ÿ repeatedly the Settings menu appears in the ifunction display.

Resetting all settings

You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.

� Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (� page 119) for approximately three seconds.

The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button once more.

The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings.

135

Controls in detail

Control system

Subme

� Pre

Theapp

� Pre

Thesub

Resetting the functions of a submenu

For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings.

� Move to a function in the submenu.

� Press the reset button (� page 119) in the instrument cluster for approxi-mately three seconds.

The request to press the reset button once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

� Press the reset button once more.

All functions of the submenu will reset to factory settings.

iThe settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time. After approximately five seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the multifunction display.

nus in the Settings menu

ss button k or j.

collection of the submenus ears in the multifunction display.

ss button ç .

selection marker moves to the next menu.

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Scroll down with button ç, scroll up with button æ.

Move within the submenus with button k or j to the individual functions.

The settings themselves are made with button æ or ç.

136

Controls in detail

Contro

The tablbe chan

Instrum le Convenience

Selectindisplay

g automatic g

Activating easy-entry/exit feature

Selectindisplay

Setting key-dependency

Selectin Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror

Selectindisplay temperaindicato

l system

e below shows what settings can ged within the various menus.

Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.

ent cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehic

g temperature mode

Time synchronization with head unit*

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

Settinlockin

g speedometer mode

Setting the time (hours) Setting locator lighting

g language Setting the time (minutes) Setting night security illumination

g display (speed or outside ture) for status r

Selecting time display mode Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

Selecting automatic time change (Daylight Saving Time (DST) summer/Standard time winter)

Setting the date (month)

Setting the date (day)

Setting the date (year)

137

Controls in detail

Control system

Instru

AccessSettinsubmedisplay

The fol

Selecting speedometer display mode

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Disp.Unit Speed/odo appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unit to km or Miles.

Funct

Selectmode

Selectmode

Select

Selector outstatus

ment cluster submenu

the Instr.Cl. submenu via the gs menu. Use the Instr.Cl. nu to change the instrument cluster settings.

lowing functions are available:

Selecting temperature display mode

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Temperature indicator appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set tem-perature unit to °C (degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahrenheit).

ion Page

ing temperature display 137

ing speedometer display 137

ing language 138

ing display (speed display side temperature) for indicator

138

138

Controls in detail

Contro

Selectin

� Movebuttosubm

� Presuntilthe m

The ssetti

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Press button æ or ç to select the desired setting.

The selected display is then shown continuously in the lower display.

The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display:

� Digital speedometer

or

� Outside temperature

l system

g language

the selection marker with n æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. enu.

s button j or k repeatedly the message Language appears in

ultifunction display.

election marker is on the current ng.

� Press button æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction display messages.

Available languages:

� German

� English

� French

� Italian

� Spanish

Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status indicator

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Instr.Cl. submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Status line display appears in the multifunction display.

�

139

Controls in detail

Control system

Time/

AccessSettinsubmedisplay

The fol

Setting the time (hours)

This function can be seen with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* if the time synchronization was set to Off.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Time Hours appears in the multifunction display.

Funct

Time shead u

Settin

Settin

Select

Select(Dayligsumm

Settin

Settin

Settin

iVehicles with COMAND*:For information on setting the time, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.

��

Date submenu

the Time/Date submenu via the gs menu. Use the Time/Date nu to change the instrument cluster settings.

lowing functions are available:

Time synchronization with head unit*

This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Time synchro. w/Head Unit appears in the multifunc-tion display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to select the desired setting.

ion Page

ynchronization with nit*

139

g the time (hours) 139

g the time (minutes) 140

ing time display mode 141

ing automatic time change ht Saving Time (DST)

er/Standard time winter)

141

g the date (month) 141

g the date (day) 142

g the date (year) 143

140

Controls in detail

Contro

The ssetti

� Preshour

The selection marker is on the minute setting.

Press button æ or ç to set the minutes.

��

l system

election marker is on the hour ng.

s button æ or ç to set the .

Setting the time (minutes)

This function can be seen with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* if the time synchronization was set to Off.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Time Minutes appears in the multifunction display.

�

iVehicles with COMAND*:For information on setting the time, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.

141

Controls in detail

Control system

Select

� Mobutsub

� Preuntapp

Theset

� Prethe

� Press button æ or ç to select if the changeover between summer and winter time should be automatic or manual.

Setting the date (month)

This function can be seen with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* if the time synchronization was set to Off.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Date Set MM appears in the multifunction display.

iVehicles with COMAND*:For information on setting the date, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.

��

ing time display mode

ve the selection marker with ton æ or ç to the Time/Date menu.

ss button j or k repeatedly il the message Clock display ears in the multifunction display.

selection marker is on the current ting.

ss button æ or ç to set 12h or 24h time display mode.

Selecting automatic time change (Daylight Saving Time (DST) summer/Standard time winter)

This function can be seen with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* if the time synchronization was set to Off.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Change-over Summer / Winter time appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

142

Controls in detail

Contro

The ssetti

� Presmon

The selection marker is on the day setting.

Press button æ or ç to set the day.

��

l system

election marker is on the month ng.

s button æ or ç to set the th.

Setting the date (day)

This function can be seen with audio system, or in vehicles with COMAND* if the time synchronization was set to Off.

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Time/Date submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Date Set day appears in the multifunction display.

�

iVehicles with COMAND*:For information on setting the date, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions.

143

Controls in detail

Control system

Setting

This fusystemthe tim

� Mobutsub

� Preuntin t

Lighting submenu

Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle.

The following functions are available:iVehForrefeope

Function Page

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

144

Setting locator lighting 145

Setting night security illumination

145

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

147

the date (year)

nction can be seen with audio , or in vehicles with COMAND* if e synchronization was set to Off.

ve the selection marker with ton æ or ç to the Time/Date menu.

ss button j or k repeatedly il the message Date Set YY appears he multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the year setting.

� Press button æ or ç to set the year.

icles with COMAND*: information on setting the date, r to the separate COMAND rating instructions.

144

Controls in detail

Contro

Setting (USA on

� Movebuttosubm

� Presuntilin th

low ambient light conditions the llowing lamps will switch on additionally:

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

or more information on the daytime nning lamp mode, see “Lighting” page 110).

iThis counlampin a c

iFor safety reasons, resetting the Lighting submenu to factory settings (� page 135) while driving will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.

The following message appears in the multifunction display:Lighting - Cannot be completely reset to factory sets. while driving.

l system

daytime running lamp mode ly)

the selection marker with n æ or ç to the Lighting enu.

s button j or k repeatedly the message Hdlamp mode appears e multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to select manual operation (Manual) or daytime running lamp mode (Constant) activated.

With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M or U, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.

Info

�

�

�

�

Fru(�

function is not available in tries where the daytime running mode is mandatory and therefore onstant mode.

145

Controls in detail

Control system

Setting

With thand thpositioswitchwith th

� Par

� Tai

� Lic

� Sid

� Fro

The locdriver’s

If you dwith thautoma40 sec

� Mobutsub

Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off)

Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed.

With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch:

� Parking lamps

� Tail lamps

� License plate lamps

� Side marker lamps

� Front fog lamps

If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey from the starter switch, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 60 seconds.

locator lighting

e locator lighting feature activated e exterior lamp switch in n U, the following lamps will on when the vehicle is unlocked e SmartKey during darkness:

king lamps

l lamps

ense plate lamps

e marker lamps

nt fog lamps

ator lighting switches off when the door is opened.

o not open a door after unlocking e SmartKey the lamps will switch off tically after approximately

onds.

ve the selection marker with ton æ or ç to the Lighting menu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Surround lighting appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to switch the locator lighting function On.

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U when exiting the vehicle (� page 110).

The locator lighting feature is activated.

146

Controls in detail

Contro

� Movebuttosubm

� Presuntilappe

The ssetti

ou can temporarily deactivate the elayed shut-off feature:

Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.

Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0.

The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

iYou ten m

l system

the selection marker with n æ or ç to the Lighting enu.

s button j or k repeatedly the message Hdlamp delay off ars in the multifunction display.

election marker is on the current ng.

� Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.

You can select:

� 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.

� 15 sec., 30 sec., 45 sec. or 60 sec., select the desired lamp-on period.

� Turn the exterior lamp switch to position U before turning off the engine (� page 110).

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated.

Yd

�

�

can reactivate this function within inutes by opening a door.

147

Controls in detail

Control system

Setting

Use thlong yoremainremoveswitch

� Mobutsub

� Preuntoffdis

Theset

Setting automatic locking

Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Automatic door lk. appears in the multifunction display. ��

interior lighting delayed shut-off

is function to set whether and how u would like the interior lighting to lit during darkness after you have d the SmartKey from the starter

.

ve the selection marker with ton æ or ç to the Lighting menu.

ss button j or k repeatedly il the message Int. light delay appears in the multifunction play.

selection marker is on the current ting.

� Press button æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.

You can select:

� 0 sec., the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.

� 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec. or 20 sec., the interior lighting de-layed shut-off feature is activated with the desired lamp-on period.

Vehicle submenu

Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to make general vehicle settings.

The following function is available:

Function Page

Setting automatic locking 147

148

Controls in detail

Contro

The ssetti

� Presthe a

ctivating easy-entry/exit feature*

se this function to activate and eactivate the easy-entry/exit feature

page 99).

Warning! G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

� Press seat adjustment switch* (� page 30).

� Move steering column stalk* (� page 40).

� Press memory position switch* (� page 108).

��

l system

election marker is on the current ng.

s button æ or ç to switch utomatic central locking On or Off.

Convenience submenu

Access the Convenience submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features.

The following functions are available:

A

Ud(�

Function Page

Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

148

Setting key-dependency 149

Setting parking position* for exterior rear view mirror

150

149

Controls in detail

Control system

� MobutCon

� Preuntapp

Theset

Setting key-dependency

Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering wheel and the mirrors should be stored separately for each SmartKey (� page 107).

� Move the selection marker with button æ or ç to the Convenience submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Key dependency appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Do nohicle, Childrunintefeaturand/o

��

ve the selection marker with ton æ or ç to the venience submenu.

ss button j or k repeatedly il the message Easy-entry feature ears in the multifunction display.

selection marker is on the current ting.

� Press button æ or ç to change the easy-entry/exit setting.

The following settings are available for the easy-entry/exit feature:

t leave children unattended in the ve-or with access to an unlocked vehicle. en could open the driver’s door and ntionally activate the easy-entry/exit e, which could result in an accident r serious personal injury.

Off The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated

Steer. Column Only the steering column is moved

St.col.+seat Both the steering column and the seat are moved

150

Controls in detail

Contro

� Preskey-d

Setting rear vie

Use the to selecexterior downwareverse informatview mir(� page

� MovebuttoConv

rip computer menu

se the trip computer menu to call up tatistical data on your vehicle.

he following information is available:

unction Page

uel consumption statistics after tart

151

uel consumption statistics ince last reset

151

alling up range distance to empty)

152

��

l system

s button æ or ç to set ependency On or Off.

parking position* for exterior w mirror

Mirror set. parking aid function t whether the passenger-side rear view mirror should be turned rd during parking maneuvers when gear R is engaged. For additional ion, see “Activating exterior rear ror parking position*” 172).

the selection marker with n æ or ç to the enience submenu.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Mirror set. parking aid appears in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

� Press button æ or ç to switch function On or Off.

T

Us

T

F

Fs

Fs

C(

151

Controls in detail

Control system

Fuel c

� Preuntcommu

� Preuntin t

1 Dis2 Tim3 Ave4 Ave

Fuel consumption since last reset

� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message After reset appears in the multifunction display.

1 Distance driven since last reset2 Time elapsed since last reset3 Average speed since last reset4 Average fuel consumption since last

reset

onsumption statistics after start

ss button ÿ or è repeatedly il the first function of the Trip puter menu appears in the

ltifunction display.

ss button j or k repeatedly il the message After start appears he multifunction display.

tance driven since starte elapsed since startrage speed since startrage fuel consumption since start

iAll statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 0 or removed from the starter switch.

Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.

152

Controls in detail

Contro

Resettin

� Presuntilcommult

� Presuntilappe

� Presinstrthe v

EL menu*

Warning! G

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

l system

g fuel consumption statistics

s button ÿ or è repeatedly the first function of the Trip puter menu appears in the ifunction display.

s button j or k repeatedly the reading that you want to reset ars in the multifunction display.

s and hold the reset button in the ument cluster (� page 119) until alue is reset to 0.

Calling up range (distance to empty)

� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the first function of the Trip computer menu appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the message Distance appears in the multifunction display.

The calculated range based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display.

T

153

Controls in detail

Control system

You cato opeconnecswitch

� SwCO

� Prestememu

Which multifuyour te

Answering a call

When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will then see the message:

� Press button s .

You have answered the call. The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display.

Neverwith aout befrom irunnintion opossibperso

n use the functions in the TEL menu rate your telephone, provided it is ted to a hands-free system and

ed on.

itch on the telephone and Audio or MAND*.

ss button ÿ or è on the ering wheel repeatedly until the ssage TEL appears in the ltifunction display.

messages will appear in the nction display depends on whether lephone is switched on or off:

� If the telephone is off, the message PHONE OFF appears in the multifunction display.

� If the telephone is on:

The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multi-function display is empty.

As soon as the telephone has found a network, the message READY appears in the multifunction display.

This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

operate radio transmitters equipped built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-ing connected to an external antenna) nside the vehicle while the engine is g. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-

f the vehicle’s electronic system, ly resulting in an accident and

nal injury.

154

Controls in detail

Contro

Ending

� Pres

You messdispl

Dialing

If your teyou mayphone b

� Presuntilmult

Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

Name from the phone book

l system

a call

s button t.

have ended the call. The standby age appears in the multifunction ay.

a number from the phone book

lephone is ready to receive calls, select and dial a number from the ook at any time.

s button ÿ or è repeatedly the message TEL appears in the ifunction display.

� Press button j or k .

The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone. This may take up to 30 seconds. The message Please wait appears in the multifunction display.

When the message Please wait disappears, the phone book has been loaded.

�

1

155

Controls in detail

Control system

� Pre

Thenum

�

Redialing

The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book.

� Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until the message TEL appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button s .

The first number in the redial memory appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button j or k repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

� Press button s .

The control system dials the selected phone number.

iIf yor kthelistbut

Canpre

ss button s .

system dials the selected phone ber.

If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display.

� If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

ou press and hold button j for longer than one second,

system scrolls rapidly through the of names until you release the ton again.

cel the quick search mode by ssing button t.

Controls in detail

a

l ele

orise

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

156

Manu

Manuaequipmavailab

For inftransm(� pag

l transmission

transmission is standard nt on select models and not on all models.

mation on driving with a manual sion, see “Manual transmission” 46).

Warning! G

For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-mission, getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in first or reverse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous.

Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging first or reverse gear (� page 54).

When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

157

Controls in detail

Manual transmission

Gearsh

Shifting into reverse

� Stop the vehicle completely.

� Fully depress clutch pedal.

� Move the gearshift lever to neutral position (no gear selected).

� Move the gearshift lever to the left until you feel a certain resistance.

� Push the gearshift lever past this resistance.

� Then move the gearshift lever forward into position R.

!Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary, as the transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

ift pattern for manual transmission

!When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th gear, make sure that you press the gearshift lever to the right. Other-wise, you could accidentally shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission.

Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Do not exceed the engine speed limits. Refer to tachometer (� page 121) for engine speeds.

Controls in detail

ate

o.

ratis

h

y uain

patn

he automatic transmission selects indi-idual gears automatically, depending on:

the gear selector lever position D (� page 162) with gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (� page 161)

the selected program mode:

(C/S) (� page 164)

or

(M/C/S) (C 55 AMG only) (� page 168)

the position of the accelerator pedal (� page 165)

the vehicle speed

158

Autom

Automequipmas optimodels

For moautomtransm

Your veshiftingstyle bpoints ments operat

If the oautomadjusti

atic transmission*

ic transmission is standard nt on select models and available

nal equipment on select other

e information on driving with an ic transmission see “Automatic sion*” (� page 47).

icle’s transmission adapts its gear process to your individual driving continually adjusting the shift p or down. These shift point adjust-re performed based on current g and driving conditions.

erating conditions change, the ic transmission reacts by g its shift program. Gearshift pattern for automatic

transmission

Tv

�

�

�

�

iDuring the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

159

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

1 Curpos

2 Cur

The cupositioor (M/Cdisplay When the gear selector lever is in

position D, you can influence transmission shifting by:

� limiting the gear range

� changing gears manually

!Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

rent gear range/gear selector lever itionrent program mode

rrent gear range/gear selector lever n and program mode (C/S) /S) appear in the multifunction .

An additional indication of the current gear selector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting-gate.

The indicators come on when you activate a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or opening a door) and go out after approxi-mately 15 minutes.

Warning! G

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

160

Controls in detail

Autom

One-tou

Even witcan chagear sel

Downsh

� Briefthe l

The trangear to tthe shiftneously transmis

anceling gear range limit

Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D+ direction until D reappears in the multifunction display.

he transmission will shift from the current ear range directly to gear range D.

hifting into optimal gear range

Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D- direction.

he transmission will automatically select e gear range suited for optimal

cceleration and deceleration. This will volve shifting down one or more gears.

Warni

On slippin orderresult invehicleprevent

atic transmission*

ch gearshifting

h an automatic transmission you nge the gears manually when the ector lever is in position D.

ifting

ly press the gear selector lever to eft in the D- direction.

smission will shift from the current he next lower gear as permitted by program. This action simulta-limits the gear range of the sion (� page 161).

Upshifting

� Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simul-taneously extends the gear range of the transmission.

C

�

Tg

S

�

Tthain

ng! G

ery road surfaces, never downshift to obtain braking action. This could drive wheel slip and reduced

control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not this type of loss of control.

iTo avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D- direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.

161

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

Gear r

With thyou caby presleft (D-by presright (D

The semultifupress ohas reawill upselecte

Effect

ç The transmission shifts through second gear only.

Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving:

� on steep downgrades

� in mountainous regions

� under extreme operating conditions

æ The transmission operates in first gear only.

For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades.

anges

e gear selector lever in position D, n limit the transmission’s gear range sing the gear selector lever to the ), and reverse the gear range limit sing the gear selector lever to the +).

lected gear range appears in the nction display (� page 159). If you n the accelerator when the engine ched its rpm limit, the transmission

shift beyond any gear range limit d.

Effect

é The transmission shifts through fourth gear only.

è The transmission shifts through third gear only.

With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.

162

Controls in detail

Autom

Gear se

ì

Effect

Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed).

To avoid damage to the trans-mission, never engage N while driving.

If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

Drive

The transmission shifts automatically. All five forward gears are available.

atic transmission*

lector lever position

Effect

Park position

Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position P to secure the vehicle.

Effect

The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position P.

If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P (� page 381).

í Reverse gear

Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped.

ë

ê

163

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

!Coaothin NthaMe

Warning! G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position P, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

sting the vehicle, or driving for any er reason with gear selector lever can result in transmission damage

t is not covered by the rcedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Warning! G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P (� page 54).

When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

164

Controls in detail

Autom

Automa

The proglocated console.

1 Prog

C Comfo

S Sport

The currand the indicate(� page

Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display.

Select C for comfort driving:

� The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected.

� Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.

� Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin.

atic transmission*

tic shift program

ram mode selector switch is on the lower part of the center

ram mode selector switch

rt For comfort driving

For standard driving

ent gear selector lever position selected program mode (C/S) are d in the multifunction display 159).

�!Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.

iThe last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted.

165

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

Drivin

Accele

Your dtransm

Less th

More t

Kickdo

Use kicaccele

� Preres

Thegea

� Easrea

The

Maneuvering

When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space:

� Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes.

� Accelerate gently.

� Never abruptly step on the accelerator.

Working on the vehicle

Warning! G

When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

g tips

rator position

riving style influences the ission’s shifting behavior:

rottle Earlier upshifting

hrottle Later upshifting

wn

kdown when you want maximum ration.

ss the accelerator past the point of istance.

transmission shifts into a lower r.

e on the accelerator when you have ched the desired speed.

transmission shifts up again.

Stopping

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:

� Leave the transmission in gear.

� Hold the vehicle with the brake.

When you stop longer with the engine idling or on an uphill gradient:

� Move the gear selector lever to position P.

� Set the parking brake.

166

Controls in detail

Autom

Steerin(Speeds

When drmodes Cmode Mmanuallthe gear

he steering wheel gearshift buttons are cated to the left and right of the steering heel.

Left button: downshiftRight button: upshift

iTo avdowngearnot smax.

atic transmission*

g wheel gearshift control hift) C 55 AMG

iving in the automatic program or S, or in the manual program , you can change the gears y on the steering wheel or by using selector lever (� page 160).

Tlow

12

oid overrevving the engine when shifting with steering wheel

shift buttons, the transmission will hift to a lower gear if the engine’s speed would be exceeded.

!Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear R or parking position P only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

167

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

Upshifting

� Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode (C or S).

iYouwhsele

Thebe off selethewh

Themoengpro

Downshifting

� Press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (� page 161) when you are driving in the automatic program mode (C or S).

cannot shift with the steering eel gearshift buttons when the gear ctor lever is in position P, N or R.

manual program mode M will not stored. When the engine is turned with the manual program mode M cted, the transmission will go to

automatic program mode (C or S) en the engine is restarted.

last selected program de (C or S) is switched on when the ine is restarted in the automatic gram mode.

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

168

Controls in detail

Autom

Manual

In the mchange twheel (�selector

ctivating manual shift program

Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the M for the manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display.

The transmission switches to the manual program mode M. Automatic shifting is switched off. The gear range is not limited.

ou can change the gears manually when e gear selector lever is in position D. You

an upshift or downshift through the gears succession.

!Allowload enginhas b

Shiftpositstop

Avoidextenslippseriois noLimit

atic transmission*

shift program C 55 AMG

anual program mode M you can he gears manually on the steering page 166) or by using the gear

lever (� page 160).

The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

1 Program mode selector switch

M Manual For manual gear shifting

C Comfort For comfort driving

S Sport For standard driving

The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (M/C/S) are indicated in the multifunction display (� page 159).

A

�

Ythcin

engine to warm up under low use. Do not place full load on the e until the operating temperature een reached.

into reverse gear R or parking ion P only when the vehicle is ped.

spinning of a drive wheel for an ded period when driving off on

ery road surfaces. This may cause us damage to the drivetrain which t covered by the Mercedes-Benz ed Warranty.

169

Controls in detail

Automatic transmission*

Downs

� Briethe(�

or

� Preste

Thelow

� Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction (� page 160).

or

� Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel (� page 166).

The transmission shifts to the next higher gear.

If, instead of the manual program mode symbol M, the p symbol appears in the multifunction display (� page 159), shift to the next higher gear. The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.

Warn

On sliin ordresultvehiclpreve

iWhsioyou

hifting

fly press the gear selector lever to left in the D- direction page 160).

ss button 1 on the left side of the ering wheel (� page 166).

transmission shifts to the next er gear.

Upshifting

ing! G

ppery road surfaces, never downshift er to obtain braking action. This could in drive wheel slip and reduced e control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not nt this type of loss of control.

en you brake or stop, the transmis-n shifts down to a gear from which can easily accelerate or take off.

!In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer (� page 24). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

170

Controls in detail

Autom

Kickdow

Using thmanual

Deactiv

� Presswitcuntildispl

or

� Rest

The tauto

The mstore

atic transmission*

n

e kickdown when driving in the program mode M is not possible.

ating manual shift program

s the program mode selector h (� page 168) repeatedly C or S appears in the multifunction ay.

art the engine.

ransmission will go to the matic program mode (C or S).

anual program mode M is not d.

Emergency operation (Limp Home Mode)

If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the trans-mission is most likely operating in limp home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.

� Stop the vehicle.

� Move gear selector lever to P.

� Turn off the engine.

� Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.

� Restart the engine.

� Move gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or R.

� Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

171

Controls in detail

Good visibility

�Fose

He

Thda

1

�

�

� Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving lever 1 towards the windshield.

The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*

The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when

� the ignition is switched on

and

� incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror.

The rear view mirror will not react if

� reverse gear R is engaged

� the interior lighting is turned on

Goodr informe “Wind

adlam

e switchshboard

Headla

Switch

Press

The hehigh-p

visibilityation on the windshield wipers, shield wipers” (� page 51).

p cleaning system*

is located on the left side of the .

mp washer switch

on the ignition (� page 33).

switch 1.

adlamps are cleaned with a ressure water jet.

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 301).

Rear view mirrors

For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (� page 41).

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

1 Lever

172

Controls in detail

Good v

ctivating exterior rear view mirror arking position*

ollow these steps to activate the mirror arking position so that the assenger-side exterior rear view mirror ill be turned downward to the stored osition.

he buttons are located above the exterior mp switch.

Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror buttonPassenger-side exterior rear view mirror button

Warni

The autincominsensors

The interear viereact, fsunsha

Glare c

Warni

In the cmay esmirror g

Electroallow theyes, skIn casearea winecess

isibility

Ap

Fppwp

Tla

1

2

ng! G

o-dimming function does not react if g light is not aimed directly at in the interior rear view mirror.

rior rear view mirror and the exterior w mirror on the driver’s side do not or example, if the rear window de* is in raised position.

an endanger you and others.

ng! G

ase of an accident liquid electrolyte cape from the mirror housing if the lass breaks.

lyte has an irritating effect. Do not e liquid to come into contact with in, clothing, or respiratory system.

it does, immediately flush affected th water, and seek medical help if ary.

!Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

Warning! G

Exercise care when using the passen-ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

173

Controls in detail

Good visibility

� Maposrea

� Maaidsubswi

� Sw

� Preext

� Plagea

Themirsto

Sun visors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving.

� Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.

Warning! G

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

ke sure you have stored a parking ition for the passenger-side exterior r view mirror (� page 109).

ke sure the Mirror set. parking function in the Convenience menu of the control system is tched to On (� page 150).

itch on the ignition (� page 33).

ss button 2 for the passenger-side erior rear view mirror.

ce the gear selector lever in reverse r R.

passenger-side exterior rear view ror will be turned downward to the red position.

The exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position:

� ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R

� immediately once your vehicle exceeds a speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)

� immediately when you press button 1 for the driver’s side mirror

174

Controls in detail

Good v

1 Mou2 Mirro3 Mirro4 Sun

� To ucove

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

lways raise the sunshade fully for its upport against the window frame.

aising the sunshade

Press switch 1 briefly.

The sunshade is raised completely.

topping the raising procedure

Press switch 1 again.

The sunshade stops.

owering the sunshade

Press switch 1 briefly.

The sunshade is lowered completely.

topping the lowering procedure

Press switch 1 again.

The sunshade stops.

iIf sunwindmou

The m

isibility

ntingr coverr lamp

visor

se illuminated mirror, lift up r 2.

Rear window sunshade*

The switch is located in the center console.

1 Rear window sunshade switch

�

As

R

�

S

�

L

�

S

�

light enters through a side ow, disengage sun visor from nting 1 and pivot to the side.

irror lamp 3 will switch off.

!Make sure the movement of the rear window sunshade is not restricted by objects on the rear window shelf. Oth-erwise, the sunshade or the objects could be damaged.

175

Controls in detail

Good visibility

Warn

Whenmakeing hadure.

The raimmeswitch

Brieflythe re

Warn

WhenSmartwith ychildraccesvised accide

Warning! G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.

!If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.

Activating

� Press button F or 1 in the climate control panel (� page 177) or automatic climate control panel (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Deactivating

� Press button F or 1 again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

ing! G

operating the rear window sunshade, sure there is no danger of anyone be-rmed by the raising or lowering proce-

ising or lowering procedure can be diately halted by briefly pressing the .

press switch again to raise or lower ar window sunshade completely.

ing! G

leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key from the starter switch, take it ou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave en unattended in the vehicle, or with s to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-use of vehicle equipment can cause an nt and/or serious personal injury.

Controls in detail

t

176

Clima

e control

177

Controls in detail

Climate control

I

1 L

2 L

3 Tf

4 Tf

5 L

6 R

7 Tf

8 Tf

9 R

a R

b C

iForslidand

Item

1 Air volume control

2 Left side temperature control

3 Right side temperature control

4 Air distribution control

5 Rear window defroster

6 AC cooling on/off (ACOFFor A/C)

7 Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)

8 Air recirculation

9 Defrosting

Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either climate control panel design A or B.

Climate control panel design A

Climate control panel design B

tem

eft side defroster vent, fixed

eft side air vent, adjustable

humbwheel for air volume control or left side air vent

humbwheel for air volume control or left center air vent

eft center air vent, adjustable

ight center air vent, adjustable

humbwheel for air volume control or right center air vent

humbwheel for air volume control or right side air vent

ight side air vent, adjustable

ight side defroster vent, fixed

limate control panel

draft-free ventilation, move the ers for the air vents 2, 5, 6 9 to the middle position.

178

Controls in detail

Climat

The climever theate the cautomatcools orthe selecurrent

Warni

When othat enthroughvery hotemperbite on area of distancbody anchangecontrolwell air

iSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Opening (Summer opening feature)” (� page 245).

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

e control

ate control is operational when- engine is running. You can oper-limate control system in either the ic or manual mode. The system heats the interior depending on cted interior temperature and the outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en-ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the mode ACOFF is activated or mode A/C is deactivated (� page 183).

ng! G

perating the climate control, the air ters the passenger compartment the air vents in the footwell can be t or very cold (depending on the set ature). This may cause burns or frost-unprotected skin in the immediate the air vents. Always keep sufficient e between unprotected parts of the d the footwell air vents. If necessary, the air flow using the air distribution s to direct the air away from the foot- vents (� page 180).

Warning! G

Follow the recommended settings for heat-ing and cooling given on the following pag-es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

179

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deactisystem

Deacti

� Setto p

Reacti

� Setto a

Increasing

� Turn temperature control 2 or 3 (� page 177) slightly to the right.

The climate control system will corre-spondingly adjust the interior air tem-perature.

Decreasing

� Turn temperature control 2 or 3 (� page 177) slightly to the left.

The climate control system will corre-spondingly adjust the interior air tem-perature.

iWhoff,tionthisthe

vating the climate control

vating

air volume control 1 (� page 177) osition 0.

vating

air volume control 1 (� page 177) ny speed.

Setting the temperature

Use temperature controls 2 and 3 (� page 177) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre-ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

en the air conditioning is switched the outside air supply and circula- are also switched off. Only choose setting for a short time. Otherwise windows could fog up.

iWhen operating the climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the tempera-ture, air volume and air distribution.

180

Controls in detail

Climat

Adjustin

Use air d(� pageThe follocontrols

Use the (� pagecan sele

efrosting

ctivating

Press button P or 0 (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

he air conditioning switches utomatically to the following functions:

� maximum blowing and heating power

� air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows

� the air recirculation mode is switched off

Symbo

Z

b

Y

a

iThese settings should only be selected for a short time.

e control

g air distribution and volume

istribution control 4 177) to adjust the air distribution. wing symbols are found on the :

air volume control 1 177) to adjust the air volume. You ct between six air volume speeds.

Adjusting manually

� Press button U (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

� Select any of the six air volume speeds and the air distribution.

Adjusting automatically

� Press button U (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on. The temperature, air distri-bution and volume are adjusted auto-matically.

Windshield fogged on the outside

� Switch the windshield wipers on (� page 51).

� Switch to manual mode.

� Turn the air distribution control 4 to a or Y (� page 177).

D

A

�

Ta

l Function

Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents

Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Directs air to the footwells

Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents

181

Controls in detail

Climate control

Deacti

� Pre(�

Theout

iIf you keep button , pressed, the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close.

Warning! G

Never operate the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-cedure.

In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.

The closing of the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by again pressing and holding the , button.

vating

ss button P or 0 page 177).

indicator lamp on the button goes . Defrosting is turned off.

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.

Activating

� Press button , (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

Warning! G

When the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging.

Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

182

Controls in detail

Climat

he air recirculation mode is deactivated utomatically:

after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off

after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)

t outside temperatures above 79°F 6°C) the system will not automatically

witch back to outside air. A quantity of utside air is added after approximately 0 minutes.

iThe aautotures

The iis nomod

Afterside hicle

If youtionitempair reon au

e control

Deactivating

� Press button , (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

Ta

�

�

�

A(2so3

ir recirculation mode is activated matically at high outside tempera-.

ndicator lamp on the , button t lit when the air recirculation e is automatically switched on.

approximately 30 minutes, out-air is added to the air inside the ve-.

have turned off the air condi-ng (� page 183) or the outside erature is below 41°F (5°C), the circulation mode will not switch tomatically.

iIf you keep button , pressed, the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will return to their previous position.

183

Controls in detail

Climate control

Air con

The airthe engair to t

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air condition-ing.

Climate control panel design A

� Press button ± (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

Climate control panel design B

� Press button 2 (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

iConneanot

Warn

If youvehiclcondiup moimpaiothers

ditioning

conditioning is operational while ine is running and cools the interior

he temperature set by the operator.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi-tioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

Climate control panel design A

� Press button ± (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

Climate control panel design B

� Press button 2 (� page 177).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

densation may drip out from under-th the vehicle. This is normal and an indication of a malfunction.

ing! G

turn off the cooling function, the e will not be cooled when weather tions are warm. The windows can fog re quickly. Window fogging may

r visibility and endanger you and .

184

Controls in detail

Climat

The air crefrigeraof CFCslayer.

he air vents for the rear passenger ompartment are located in the rear enter console.

Left center air ventThumbwheel for air volume control for center air ventsRight center air vent

!If theon agcondcom

Havethe nCent

e control

onditioning uses the nt R134a. This refrigerant is free

which are harmful to the ozone

Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents

The air conditioning for the rear passenger compartment is controlled via the climate control panel (� page 177).

Tcc

12

3

air conditioning cannot be turned ain, this indicates that the air itioning is losing refrigerant. The pressor has turned itself off.

the air conditioning checked at earest authorized Mercedes-Benz er.

iThe temperature at the center air vents for the rear passenger compartment 1 and 3 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents.

185

Controls in detail

Climate control

Adjust

� Pusvenleft

Thespo

iForslid

ing air distribution

h the slide for the left center t 1 or right center vent 3 to the , right, up or down.

air flow is directed in the corre-nding direction.

Adjusting air volume

� Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.

The air volume is increased or decreased.

draft-free ventilation, push es 1 and 3 upward.

Controls in detail

186

Autom

atic climate control*

187

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

I

1 L

2 L

3 Tf

4 Tf

5 L

6 R

7 Tf

8 Tf

9 R

a R

b A

iForslidand

Item

1 Left side air distribution control

2 Defrosting

3 Temperature control, left, raising

4 Display

5 Air volume control, raising

6 Temperature control, right, raising

7 Rear window defroster

8 Right side air distribution control

9 Charcoal filter

a AC cooling on/off (ACOFF or A/C)

Residual heat/ventilation

b Temperature control, right, lowering

c Air volume control, lowering

d Temperature control, left, lowering

e Air recirculation

f Automatic climate control on/off (complete system)

g Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)

Depending on production date, your vehicle is equipped with either automatic climate control panel design A or B.

Automatic climate control panel design A

Automatic climate control panel design B

tem

eft side defroster vent, fixed

eft side air vent, adjustable

humbwheel for air volume control or left side air vent

humbwheel for air volume control or left center air vent

eft center air vent, adjustable

ight center air vent, adjustable

humbwheel for air volume control or right center air vent

humbwheel for air volume control or right side air vent

ight side air vent, adjustable

ight side defroster vent, fixed

utomatic climate control panel

draft-free ventilation, move the ers for the air vents 2, 5, 6, 9 to the middle position.

188

Controls in detail

Autom

The autoal wheneoperate ther thesystem cing on thand the

iFeatnaryThe abe avall m

Warning! G

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

iSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off, see “Opening (Summer opening feature)” (� page 245).

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

atic climate control*

matic climate control is operation-ver the engine is running. You can the climate control system in ei- automatic or manual mode. The ools or heats the interior depend-e selected interior temperature current outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the mode ACOFF is activated or mode A/C is deactivated (� page 196).

ure availability is based on prelimi- information at time of printing. utomatic climate control may not ailable as optional equipment on odels.

Warning G

When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the foot-well air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents (� page 190).

189

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

Deacticontro

Deacti

It is poclimate

� Pre

Thecom

Theis d

Setting the temperature

Use temperature controls 3 and d for the left side or 6 and b for the right side (� page 187) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small incre-ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

iWhoff,tionthisthe

iWhen operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

vating the automatic climate l system

vating

ssible to deactivate the automatic control system.

ss button ´ (� page 187).

indicator lamp on the button ´ es on.

automatic climate control system eactivated.

Reactivating

� Press button ´ (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button ´ goes out.

The automatic climate control system is reactivated.

en the air conditioning is switched the outside air supply and circula- are also switched off. Only choose setting for a short time. Otherwise windows could fog up.

190

Controls in detail

Autom

Display

1 Tem2 Blow3 Tem

Increas

� Pushand/

The awill cair te

Decreas

� Pushand/

The awill cair te

djusting manually

Turn air distribution control 1 or 8 (� page 187) to the desired symbol.

The indicator lamp on the button U goes out.

The automatic air distribution is switched off. The air distribution is controlled according to the selected control setting.

djusting automatically

Press button U (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air volume is controlled automati-cally for the entire vehicle, and the air distribution is controlled automatically for each separate half of the vehicle.

atic climate control*

perature, lefter speedperature, right

ing

temperature control 3 or 6 (� page 187).

utomatic climate control system orrespondingly adjust the interior mperature.

ing

temperature control b or d (� page 187).

utomatic climate control system orrespondingly adjust the interior mperature.

Adjusting air distribution

Use the button U for automatic mode or air distribution controls 1 and 8 (� page 187) to separately adjust the air distribution on each side of the passenger compartment. The following symbols are found on the controls:

A

�

A

�

Symbol Function

Z Directs air to the windshield and the side defroster vents

b Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Y Directs air to the footwells

a Directs air through the center, side and rear passenger compartment air vents

191

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

Winds

� Sw(�

� Sw

� Turto a

Adjusting automatically

� Press button U (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The air volume is controlled automati-cally for the entire vehicle, and the air distribution is controlled automatically for each separate half of the vehicle.

hield fogged on the outside

itch the windshield wipers on page 51).

itch to manual mode.

n air distribution control 1 or 8 or Y (� page 187).

Adjusting air volume

Use button U for automatic mode or air volume controls � or Q (� page 187) to adjust air volume manually.

Adjusting manually

Seven blower speeds are available.

� Press air volume control � or Q (� page 187) until the desired blower speed is attained.

The indicator lamp on the button U goes out.

The automatic air distribution remains switched on.

192

Controls in detail

Autom

Defrost

Activati

� Pres(� pa

The icom

The air cautomat

� mp

� at

� ts

aximum cooling MAXCOOL

the left and right air distribution controls s well as the airflow volume control are et to U (� page 187) and there is a igh need for cooling, the display MAXCOOL” appears.

his provides the fastest possible cooling f the vehicle interior (when side windows nd tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).

iThesfor a

atic climate control*

ing

ng

s button P or 0 ge 187).

ndicator lamp on the button es on.

onditioning switches ically to the following functions:

aximum blowing and heating ower

ir flows onto the windshield and he front side windows

he air recirculation mode is witched off

Deactivating

� Press button P or 0 (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out. Defrosting is turned off.

The previous settings are once again in effect.

M

Ifash“

Toa

e settings should only be selected short time.

193

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

Air rec

Switchunpleafrom thintake air in t

Activa

� Pre

Thecom

Warn

Whenbelowrecircpreve

Windoendan

iThe air recirculation mode is activated automatically:

� at high outside temperatures

� if the concentration of carbon mon-oxide and nitrogen oxide in the outside air increases, for example in a tunnel (charcoal filter must be activated for the air recirculation mode to be activated automatically)

The indicator lamp on the button , is not lit when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on.

After approx. 30 minutes, outside air is added to the air inside the vehicle.

If you have turned off the air conditioning (� page 196) or the out-side temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically.

irculation mode

to air recirculation mode to prevent sant odors from entering the vehicle e outside. This setting cuts off the of outside air and recirculates the he passenger compartment.

ting

ss button , (� page 187).

indicator lamp on the button es on.

ing! G

the outside temperature is 41°F (5°C), only switch to air

ulation mode for short periods to nt window fogging.

w fogging may impair visibility and ger you and others.

iIf you keep button , pressed, the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close.

Warning! G

Never operate the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.

The closing of the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button ,.

194

Controls in detail

Autom

Deactiv

� Pres

The iout.

harcoal filter

n activated charcoal filter markedly duces bad odors and removes pollutants om air entering the passenger compart-ent. The charcoal filter can be activated

r deactivated.

he system switches automatically to the ir recirculation mode, if the

carbon monoxide (CO)

or

nitrogen oxide (NOX)

oncentration of the outside air increases eyond a predetermined level.

iIf youside will r

iThe automatic air recirculation mode does not function if the ACOFF mode is activated (indicator lamp on button ° illuminated) or A/C mode is deactivated (indicator lamp on button 2 not lit), or if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F (5°C).

atic climate control*

ating

s button , (� page 187).

ndicator lamp on the button goes

The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically:

� after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

� after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off

� after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)

At outside temperatures above 79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

C

Arefrmo

Ta

�

�

cb

keep button , pressed, the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* eturn to their previous position.

195

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

Activa

� Pre

Thecom

Deactivating

� Press button e (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

iIf ysidwill

iTheswithemecoo

iIf you keep button e pressed, the side windows an tilt/sliding sunroof* will return to their previous position.

ting

ss button e (� page 187).

indicator lamp on the button es on.

ou keep button e pressed, the e windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* close.

activated charcoal filter should be tched off when windows fog up on inside, or if the passenger compart-nt needs to be quickly heated or led down.

Warning! G

Never operate the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-cedure.

In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately halted by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in the overhead control panel in any direction.

The closing of the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by again pressing and holding the button e.

196

Controls in detail

Autom

Air cond

The air cthe engiair to th

ctivating

oist air can fog up the windows. You can ehumidify the air with the air condi-oning.

utomatic climate control panel esign A

Press button ° (� page 187) again.

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The cooling function is switched on.

utomatic climate control panel esign B

Press button 2 (� page 187) again.

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The cooling function is switched on.

iCondneatnot a

Warni

If you tuvehicleconditioup morimpair vothers.

atic climate control*

itioning

onditioning is operational while ne is running and cools the interior e temperature set by the operator.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air condi-tioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

Automatic climate control panel design A

� Press button ° (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

Automatic climate control panel design B

� Press button 2 (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The cooling function switches off after a short delay.

A

Mdti

Ad

�

Ad

�

ensation may drip out from under-h the vehicle. This is normal and n indication of a malfunction.

ng! G

rn off the cooling function, the will not be cooled when weather ns are warm. The windows can fog

e quickly. Window fogging may isibility and endanger you and

197

Controls in detail

Automatic climate control*

The airR134awhich

Deactivating

� Press button ° (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button goes out.

The residual heat is automatically turned off:

� when the ignition is switched on

� after about 30 minutes

� if the battery voltage drops

!If thon concom

HavtheCen

iHow long the system will provide heating depends on

� the coolant temperature

� the temperature set by the operator

The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless of the air distribution control setting.

conditioning uses the refrigerant . This refrigerant is free of CFCs are harmful to the ozone layer.

Residual heat and ventilation (available on automatic climate control panel design A only)

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

Activating

� Switch off the ignition (� page 56).

� Press button ° (� page 187).

The indicator lamp on the button comes on.

e air conditioning cannot be turned again, this indicates that the air ditioning is losing refrigerant. The pressor has turned itself off.

e the air conditioning checked at nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz ter.

198

Controls in detail

Autom

Rear paadjusta

The air ccompartmatic cl

djusting air distribution

Push the slide for the left center vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the left, right, up, or down.

The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.

djusting air volume

Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.

The air volume is increased or decreased.

iThe tfor thcomat th

iFor draft-free ventilation, push slides 1 and 3 upward.

atic climate control*

ssenger compartment ble air vents

onditioning for the rear passenger ment is controlled via the auto-imate control panel (� page 187).

The air vents for the rear passenger compartment are located in the rear center console.

1 Left center air vent2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for

center air vents3 Right center air vent

A

�

A

�

emperature at the center air vents e rear passenger

partment 1 and 3 is the same as e dashboard center air vents.

199

Controls in detail

Audio system

�Au

ThyoMetaiof

W

Inlessrpbd

B(c(a

Audiodio an

ese insu becomrcedesn usefuthe use

arning

order tad to an

ystem standstilload anday full aefore opriving.

ear in mapproximovering pproxim

systemd telephone, operation

tructions are intended to help e familiar with your

-Benz audio system. They con-l tips and a detailed description r functions.

Operating safety

! G

o avoid distraction which could accident, the driver should enter

ettings with the vehicle at a and operate the system only when traffic conditions permit. Always ttention to traffic conditions first erating system controls while

ind that at a speed of just 30 mph ately 50 km/h), your car is

a distance of 44 feet ately 14 m) every second.

Warning! G

Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.

The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite radio* and telephone* are interconnected. When one of the components is not opera-tional or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components may be impaired.

This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

200

Controls in detail

Audio

Operati

system

ng and display elements

201

Controls in detail

Audio system

I

1 C

A

2 S

3 R

4 M

P

5 V

6 S

7 D

8 A

Item Page

g Soft keys 202

h Volume 203

j Switching on/off 202

k Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio)

209

Track search, reverse (CD) 222

l Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio)

209

Track search,fast forward (CD)

222

tem Page

D changer mode selector

UX mode selector

217

207

ingle CD mode selector 219

adio mode selector

ute function (radio) 211

ause (CD) 223

olume distribution 205

ound settings 203

isplay

lphanumeric keypad

Item Page

9 Speed dialing memory (telephone) in descending order

a Accepting a call(telephone)

229

b Telephone mode selector 224

c Speed dialing memory (telephone) in ascending order

225

d Terminating a call(telephone)

229

e CD slot

f CD ejection 219

202

Controls in detail

Audio

Button

In thesekeypad functionare referbelow th“soft ke

!Do nface.dam

iIf the radio is switched on without the key in the starter switch, it will automatically switch off again after approx. 30 minutes.

If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network).

system

and soft key operation

instructions, the alphanumeric (right side of radio panel) and the buttons (left side of radio panel) red to as “buttons”. The four keys e display panel are referred to as

ys”.

Operation

Switching the unit on/off

Switching on

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2.

� If the audio system was on as you removed the SmartKey from the starter switch, the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.

or

� Press M button.

ot press directly in the display Otherwise, the display will be aged.

203

Controls in detail

Audio system

Switch

� Rem

or

� Pre

Adjust

� Tur

Thedep

� Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.

or

� Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

iShooccopeperwillthefor

ing off

ove SmartKey from starter switch.

ss M button.

ing the volume

n rotary control of N button.

volume will increase or decrease ending on the direction turned.

Adjusting sound functions

The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the O button.

Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands, weather band, CD mode and telephone mode.

Bass

� Press O button repeatedly until BASS appears in the display.

uld excessively high temperatures ur while the audio system is being rated, the display will dim. If tem-atures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP appear in the display, after which audio system will be switched off a cooling-down period.

iIf your vehicle equipment includes a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used.

204

Controls in detail

Audio

Adjustin

� PresTREB

� Presdecr

or

� Prestone

The rstanafter

Press X or Y soft key repeatedly until the desired sound setting has been reached.

The sound is set accordingly.

r

Press RES soft key briefly.

The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated.

� Radio mode: STANDARD

� CD/AUX mode: SURROUND

� Telephone: SPEECH

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

system

g treble

s O button repeatedly until LE appears in the display.

s + or – soft key to increase or ease tone level accordingly.

s RES soft key briefly to reset treble s to their center level.

adio switches back to the dard radio menu eight seconds the last soft key is pressed.

Sound system*

You can either program the sound settings manually (� page 203) or choose settings via preset sound characteristics.

You can select from among the following settings:

� STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.

� SURROUND: the sound is set for better three-dimensional acoustic character-istics.

� SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the spoken word.

� Press O button repeatedly until STANDARD, SURROUND, or SPEECH appears in the display.

�

o

�

205

Controls in detail

Audio system

Returnsetting

� Preme

� Pretivelev

or

� Preapp

Thearethe

� Press V or W soft key.

The volume is distributed accordingly between the front and rear of the vehicle.

or

� Press RES soft key briefly.

The fader is reset to its center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

ing sound functions to factory s

ss O button to call up settings nu in the display.

ss RES soft key briefly; the respec- sound function is reset to its center

el.

ss and hold RES soft key until RESET ears in the display.

sound settings for bass and treble returned to their center level and volume is set to a predefined level.

Vehicles with sound system*:

The sound setting is reset depending on the sound source activated.

� Radio mode: STANDARD

� CD/AUX mode: SURROUND

� Telephone: SPEECH

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

Adjusting volume distribution

Call up fader and balance functions by pressing the P button.

Fader

� Press P button repeatedly until FADER appears in the display.

206

Controls in detail

Audio

Adjustin

� PresBALA

� Pres

The vleft a

or

� Pres

The b

The rstanafter

Press RES soft key briefly; the respective volume distribution is reset to its center (flat) level.

r

Press and hold RES soft key until RESET appears in the display.

The volume distribution settings for fader and balance are set to their center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

elephone* muting

your vehicle equipment includes a ercedes-Benz specified mobile lephone*, you can adjust its volume

eparately from the volume of the audio ystem while the telephone is being used.

system

g balance

s P button repeatedly until NCE appears in the display.

s X or Y soft key.

olume is distributed between the nd right sides of the vehicle.

s RES soft key briefly.

alance is reset to its center level.

adio switches back to the dard radio menu eight seconds the last button is pressed.

Returning volume distribution to factory settings

� Press P button to call up settings menu in the display.

�

o

�

T

IfMtess

207

Controls in detail

Audio system

Conne(AUX)

An opttor* fosourcevehiclebased of prinMerced

You cathe souvolumeAUX in

Calling

� Preapp

Cance

� Pre

Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT

� Press FM or AM soft key to switch between FM and AM.

The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another.

or

� Press WB soft key.

The weather band menu is called up.

The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

cting an external audio source to the radio*

ional dealer-installed cinch-connec-r connecting an external audio may become available for your model. Feature description is on preliminary information at time ting. Contact an authorized es-Benz Center for availability.

n adjust the volume (� page 203), nd settings (� page 203) and the distribution (� page 205) for the put.

up AUX mode

ss and hold Q button until AUX ears in the display.

ling AUX mode

ss any audio source button.

Radio operation

Selecting radio mode

� Press b button.

Calling up wavebands

You can choose from among the FM, AM and WB wavebands.

Weather band (� page 211).

iFM waveband: 87.7......107.9 MHz

AM waveband: 530......1710 KHz

208

Controls in detail

Audio

Calling with SA

� Presuntilselec

The Fcalle

The wappeof th

irect frequency input

Select desired waveband.

Press * button.

Enter desired frequency with buttons 1 to R.

system

up wavebands for radios T

s FM, AM, or WB soft key repeatedly desired waveband has been ted.

M, AM, and WB wavebands are d up one after another.

aveband currently selected ars in the upper left-hand corner e display.

Selecting a station

The following options are available for selecting a station:

� Direct frequency input (� page 208)

� Manual tuning (� page 209)

� Automatic seek tuning (� page 209)

� Scan search (� page 209)

� Station memory (� page 210)

� Automatic station memory (Autostore) (� page 210)

The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments:

� 200 KHz in FM range

� 10 KHz in AM range

D

�

�

�

209

Controls in detail

Audio system

Manua

� Sel

� Prethr

� Prefreq

Stein atimtunma

Scan search

� Starting scan search

� Select desired waveband.

� Press SC soft key.

SC will appear in the display. The radio briefly tunes in all receivable stations on the waveband selected.

iYouthe

If afouthe

l tuning

ect desired waveband.

ss S or T button for approx. ee seconds.

ss button repeatedly until desired uency has been reached.

p-by-step station tuning takes place scending or descending order. Each e the button is pressed, the radio es further by 0.2 MHz. During nual tuning, the radio is muted.

Automatic seek tuning

� Select desired waveband.

� Press S or T button briefly.

The radio will tune to the next highest or next lowest receivable frequency.

can only enter frequencies within respective waveband.

button is not pressed within r seconds, the radio will return to last station tuned.

iIf no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began.

210

Controls in detail

Audio

� Endi

� P

Tst

Station

You canin the m

� Stori

� T

Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations

� Press AS soft key briefly.

The radio switches to the Autostore memory level. AS and SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals. These stations are stored on the station buttons 1 to R in order of signal strength.

system

ng scan search

ress SC soft key or S or T.

he station last played will be elected and SC disappears from he display.

memory

store ten AM and ten FM stations emory.

ng stations

une in desired station.

� Press and hold desired station button 1 to R until a brief signal tone is heard.

The frequency is stored on the selected station button.

� Calling up stations

� Press desired station button 1 to R briefly.

Autostore – automatic station memory

The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level. The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten.

�

211

Controls in detail

Audio system

� Cal

�

� Lea

�

Interru

The radincomi(� pag

Selecting a weather band station directly

� Select desired weather band station with buttons 1 to 7.

If a station cannot be tuned in, a search is automatically started.

Search

� Press S or T button to tune in the next receivable weather band station.

iIf no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND appears in the display.

If this happens, switch back to standard radio mode.

ling up stations

Press desired station button 1 to R.

ving the Autostore memory level

Press FM or AM soft key briefly.

pting radio mode

io mode is interrupted by an ng call on the telephone* e 229).

� Mute on

� Press U button.

The radio mode is interrupted and MUTED appears in the display.

� Mute off

� Press U button.

The radio mode is again active.

Weather band

� Press WB soft key.

The weather band station last received is tuned in.

212

Controls in detail

Audio

Scan se

� Start

� P

Srw

� Endi

� P

Tpd

iAdditional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle.

Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider. Programming content is subject to change. Therefore, channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider.

system

arch

ing scan search

ress SC soft key.

C will appear in the display. The adio briefly tunes in all receivable eather band stations.

ng scan search

ress SC soft key or S or T.

he weather band station last layed will be selected and SC isappears from the display.

Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only)

SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan-nels of digital-quality radio, among others music, sports, news, and entertainment, free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high-power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to coast, in the contiguous U.S.

This diverse, satellite-delivered program-ming is available for a monthly subscrip-tion fee.For more information and service availability, call the SIRIUS Service Center (� page 217), or contact www.siriusradio.com

213

Controls in detail

Audio system

Progra

The challow ya certa(� pag

� Press ESN soft key.

The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in your vehicle is displayed.

This information is required to call the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request.

After activation of the satellite radio service

The satellite radio main menu appears.The radio station selected last is audible, provided it can be received.

iSatablfor ronandproalso(e.gwitoth

iCredit card information may also be required for your application.

The activation process takes approxi-mately five to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center.

m categories

annels are categorized. Categories ou to tune to stations broadcasting in type of program (category mode) e 215).

Calling up the SAT main menu

� Press SAT soft key.

SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Prior to activation of the satellite radio service (� page 213).

After activation of satellite radio service (� page 213).

Prior to activation of the satellite radio service

The telephone number of the SIRIUS Service Center (888-539-7474) is displayed.

ellite radio service may be unavail-e or interrupted from time to time a variety of reasons, such as envi-mental or topographic conditions other things beyond the service vider’s or our control. Service might not be available in certain places ., in tunnels, parking garages, or

hin or next to buildings) or near er technologies.

214

Controls in detail

Audio

The firstPTY syst

If no staappears

If the Saactivateradio dismultifun

ccessing via number keys

Enter number of preset you wish to select, e.g. 1.

The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function changes to the category corresponding to the station.

uning via manual channel input

xample: tuning in channel 16

iThe sstatiprev

system

channel 001 is called up and the em changes to All categories.

tion can be received, ACQUIRING in the display.

tellite radio service is not d, ACQUIRING will also appear in the play and NO SAT will appear in the ction display.

Selecting a station

The following options are available:

� Selecting a station using the selected category (� page 215).

� Tuning via station presets (� page 214).

� Tuning via scan search (� page 216).

� Tuning via manual channel input (� page 214).

� Tuning via the program category list (� page 215).

Tuning via station presets

Ten satellite radio station presets are available.You can access the presets via number keys.

A

�

T

E

ystem will tune to a default on if no station had been selected iously.

215

Controls in detail

Audio system

� Pre

Inpme

� Usechae.g

The

Thepla

Tuning

The careceivaarrang

The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category. Otherwise, the currently selected station remains tuned.

� Tuning a station within the selected category

The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically. Only one entry is visible at a time.

� Press S or T button briefly.

The next station within the category is started.

or

� Press and hold S or T button for approx. three seconds until desired station has been reached.

iYounum

ss * button.

ut line appears in the main radio nu.

number keys to enter desired nnel within eight seconds, . 1 6.

system tunes to channel 16.

station you have selected begins to y.

via the program category list

tegory list contains all currently ble categories of programs. It is

ed alphabetically.

� Selecting a category

� Press PTY soft key.

The current PTY category of the station is displayed.

� Press <<< or >>> soft key.

This switches between the individual categories.

When changing the category, the channel selected last in the new category becomes audible.

can only enter available channel bers.

216

Controls in detail

Audio

Tuning v

Scan se

� Scanapprto thcate

� Scanman

� Pres

The sdispl

� Pres

The s

toring stations

Tune in desired station.

Press and hold desired station button 1 to R until a brief signal tone is heard.

The frequency is stored on the selected station button.

The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears in the status line, e.g. S3.

iThere are ten presets available.

An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry is given.

system

ia scan search

arch is characterized as follows:

search plays a channel for ox. eight seconds and then skips e next channel within the current gory.

search can be terminated ually.

s SC soft key.

earch starts. SC appears in the ay.

s SC soft key again.

earch stops.

Obtaining additional text information

Additional text information (artist, title) related to the current channel can be displayed.

� Press INF soft key.

The title being played is displayed.

� Press INF soft key again.

The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed.

S

�

�

iIf a button is not pressed within four seconds, the radio will return to the standard display.

217

Controls in detail

Audio system

Calling

� Pre

� Pre

Thenumins

� Pre

General notes

The system may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection.

Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback.

Warning! G

In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should insert CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by road, weather and traffic conditions.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

up the ESN information menu

ss INF soft key.

ss ESN soft key.

twelve-digit electronic serial ber (ESN) of the SAT tuner*

talled in your vehicle is displayed.

ss RET soft key to exit the menu.

CD mode

Safety precautions

Warning! G

The single CD player and the CD changer* are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged.Do not open the housing. The single CD player and the CD changer* do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel.

218

Controls in detail

Audio

ips on handling CDs

Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback.

Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on the CDs.

Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them.

Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth. Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; instead, wipe it in a straight line start-ing in the center and moving outward. Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for cleaning.

Replace the CD in its case after use.

Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.

!If youbecodeveCD cIn ceno lodamnot cLimit

!YourdesigcorreYou maxi

If youonesside audiowill d

system

Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter, not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play CDs with an eight cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Should excessively high or low tempera-tures occur while in CD changer mode*, CD TEMP will appear in the display, and the CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation.

The single CD player and the CD changer* play audio CDs.

T

�

�

�

�

�

�

affix stickers to the CDs, they can me warped due to the heat that lops in the CD drive or hanger.rtain situations, the CDs can then nger be ejected and cause age to the drive. Such damage is overed by the Mercedes-Benz ed Warranty.

CD drive or CD changer has been ned to play CDs which spond to the EN 60908 standard.

can therefore only use CDs with a mum thickness of 1.3 mm.

insert thicker data carriers, e.g. that have data on both sides (one with DVD data, the other side with data), they cannot be ejected and amage the drive.

219

Controls in detail

Audio system

Operaaudio

Loadin

The sinunit hafor loadthe sof

� Ma

� Insthe

Theintoto p

Operational readiness of CD changer*

If a CD changer* has been installed in the vehicle, it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system. A loaded magazine must be installed to play CDs.

The CD changer is located in the glove box.

Loading/unloading the CD magazine

� Slide changer door to the right and press g button.

� Magazine will be ejected.!If aejeInsanoageMe

iThe CD changer* may not be able to play audio CDs with copy protection.

ting the single CD player in the system unit

g a CD

gle CD player in the audio system s capacity for one CD. The CD slot ing the drive is located underneath

t keys.

ke sure the system is switched on.

ert CD into CD slot. The label side of CD must face upwards.

system automatically pulls the CD the CD slot. The audio CD begins lay.

Ejecting a CD

� Make sure the system is switched on.

� Press EJECT button.

The system ejects the CD. NO CD will appear in the display.

� Remove CD from slot.

CD is already loaded, it must be cted before inserting a new CD. erting a second CD in the slot with ther CD still loaded will cause dam- to the CD drive not covered by the rcedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

iIf a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear in the display.

iIf you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx. 15 seconds, the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it.

If a CD is pulled back in, press EJECT button for five seconds; the CD will then be ejected.

220

Controls in detail

Audio

1 CD2 CD c3 CD t4 CD m

� RemCD t

� Placeup.

D changer*

Press Q button.

CD and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

you have not removed a CD since the last me the CD audio source was activated, e last CD listened to will begin to play at e point where it was switched off.

fter the last track on a CD has finished, e next CD is automatically played.

system

hangerrayagazine

ove magazine 4 and pull ray 3 fully out.

CD 1 in recess of tray, label side

� Push tray into magazine in direction of arrow.

� Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in direction of arrow and close sliding door.

Playing CDs

Single CD player in the audio unit

� Press i button.

CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off.

C

�

Iftithth

Ath

iCDs which have been inserted improperly or are unreadable will not be played.

221

Controls in detail

Audio system

Playin

You ha

� Audsel

� Dir

� Tra

� Fas

� Sca

� Ran

� Rep

Direct track entry

You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD.

� Press * button.

� Enter track number using buttons 1 to R.

iIf there is no CD in the selected magazine slot, NO CD appears in the display with the corresponding slot number.

��

g tracks

ve the following options:

io system with CD changer*: ecting CDs

ect track entry

ck skip forward/reverse

t forward/reverse

n

dom tracks

eat track

Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer*

� You can select from among the inserted CDs with buttons R to 6.

R = CD player in the audio unit 1 to 6 = CDs in the CD changer*

The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display, and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK.

222

Controls in detail

Audio

The nappe

You num

Skippin

� Skip

� P

T

� Skip

� P

Ifmsttut

Pressingrepeatedbeing sk

can

Starting scan

� Press SC soft key.

SC will appear in the display.

Each track on the current CD will be played for approx. eight seconds in ascending order.

Ending scan

� Press SC soft key or T or S.

andom play

he random function (RDM) plays the acks of the current CD in random order.

iWhen you start the RDM function, the RPT function is automatically switched off.

��

system

umber of the track being played ars next to TRACK in the display.

can only enter available track bers.

g tracks forward/backward

ping tracks forward

ress S button briefly.

he next track will be played.

ping tracks backward

ress T button briefly.

the track has been playing for ore than ten seconds, the unit

kips back to the beginning of the rack currently playing. If less than en seconds have been played, the nit skips back to the beginning of he previous track.

the T or S button ly will result in multiple tracks ipped.

Fast forward/reverse

� Fast forward

� Press and hold S button until desired point has been reached.

� Reverse

� Press and hold T button until desired point has been reached.

S

�

�

R

Ttr

iThe track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display during the search.

223

Controls in detail

Audio system

� Sw

�

� Sw

�

Repea

The trarepeat

� Switching on pause function

� Press U button.

The CD changer mode is interrupted and PAUSE appears in the display.

� Switching off pause function

� Press U button.

The CD changer mode is active again.

iWhRDswi

itching on random

Press RDM soft key.

RDM appears in the display. A randomly selected track is played.

itching off random

Press RDM soft key again.

t

ck being played is repeated until the function is switched off.

� Switching on repeat

� Press RPT soft key.

RPT appears in the display.

� Switching off repeat

� Press RPT soft key again.

Pause function

The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone* (� page 229).

en you start the RPT function, the M function is automatically tched off.

224

Controls in detail

Audio

Track a

� Pres

The nand tthe d

� Pres

The tplayidispl

� Pres

The sappe

witching on the telephone

witching on the telephone

Press h button.

If the telephone was previously switched off, PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN.

witching off the telephone

Press h button for approx. three seconds.

PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears in the display.

system

nd time display

s T soft key.

umber of the track being played he elapsed playing time appear in isplay.

s T soft key again.

otal number of tracks and the total ng time of the CD appear in the ay.

s T soft key.

tandard CD playback menu ars in the display.

GSM network phones

Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display.

Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instruc-tions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone*.

If your audio system is set up for telephone operation, the t symbol will appear in the display.

When you insert your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds (� page 225). This display disappears when you press any button.

When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

S

S

�

S

�

225

Controls in detail

Audio system

PIN en

� Entto R

� If nwitbrieprecom

� PrePIN

� REAdis

Placing a call

Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process

� Enter desired telephone number using buttons 1 to R.

The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display. ��

try

er PIN number using buttons 1 .

ecessary, correct number entered h the CLR soft key. Press soft key fly to delete the last digit entered; ss soft key and hold to delete the plete number.

ss OK soft key after entering correct .

DY or ROAMING will appear in the play.

Adjusting the volume

� Turn rotary control of N button during a telephone call.

The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned.

Adjusting sound

� Adjust sound during a telephone call. Sound adjustment (� page 203).

iIf the PIN is entered incorrectly three times, NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK via your telephone. Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information.

iThe volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode.

226

Controls in detail

Audio

� If newith briefprescom

� Afterbeen

Phone b

The numthe telepname or

In additiphone b

� Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ.

� Press desired numerical key 2 to 9.

The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for S -Schneider, press button 7 four times).

r

� Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ.

The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order.

� Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ until desired initial letter has been reached.

r

iIf thesavetelepin th

��

system

cessary, correct number entered the CLR soft key. Press soft key ly to delete the last digit entered; s soft key and hold to delete the plete number.

correct telephone number has entered, press s button.

ook

bers stored in the phone book of hone can be called up either by

number.

on, incoming calls are stored in the ook.

� Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name

You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book using the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book.

o

o

telephone number has been d together with a name in the hone book, the name will appear e display.

iThis is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book.

227

Controls in detail

Audio system

� � Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ.

� Press RCV soft key (received calls).

The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display.

� Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ.

The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

iSeveacareabbleftfollare

CELHOWOFAXPAGTEL

Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached.

The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

� Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry

� Search for desired entry.

� Press NUM soft key.

The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display.

� Returning calls received

eral sub-entries can be stored for h main entry (name). These entries marked by a corresponding reviation that appears in the upper -hand corner of the display. The owing abbreviations for sub-entries possible:

= Mobile phoneM = HomeR = Work

= Fax= Pager= Main

228

Controls in detail

Audio

� Spee

If yoas sptelepwith head

� Pb

� P

T

� Turb

If yoas tutelepwith head

� Pu

� Press s button.

The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display.

� Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ.

The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

system

d dial

u have stored telephone numbers eed dial numbers in your hone, you can also enter these buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.

ress desired button 1 to R riefly.

ress s button.

he call will be made.

o dial

u have stored telephone numbers rbo dial numbers in your hone, you can also enter these buttons 1 to R on the radio unit.

ress desired button 1 to R ntil the call is made.

Redial

If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function.

� Manual redial

iIf you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal. Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone.

229

Controls in detail

Audio system

Accep

If the te(recepthe auding calheard or the numbeappearnumbeCALL w

� Pre

The

Talking with two callers at the same time

If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call, you can accept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that the features described here are depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider.

� Placing/accepting a second call

� Place new call by entering telephone number manually.

� Press s button.

You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold.

or ��

ting an incoming call

lephone is active in the background tion symbol is visible in the display), io source is muted when an incom-

l is received. A ringing tone can be and the caller’s telephone number, name under which the telephone r has been saved in the phone book, s in the display. If the caller’s r is not transmitted with the call, ill appear in the display.

ss s button.

call is accepted.

Muting a call

It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you.

� Mute on

� Press MUT soft key.

� MIC MUTE will appear in the display.

� Mute off

� Press MUT soft key again.

Terminating a call

� Press t button.

The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again.

230

Controls in detail

Audio

� Ps

You calle

� Swit

� P

TT

DMA or CDMA network phones

sing your Mercedes-Benz specified obile telephone*, a number of functions

nd operating steps can be performed and isplayed in the audio system display.

urther operating instructions not covered ere can be found in the operating instruc-ons for the multifunction steering wheel nd the mobile telephone*.

your audio system is set up for telephone peration, the t symbol will appear in e display.

hen you insert your Mercedes-Benz pecified mobile telephone* into the lephone cradle, you will be prompted to

nter your PIN for 30 seconds page 231). This display disappears

hen you press any button.

hen your mobile telephone is inserted to the telephone cradle, you will see the ception strength in the upper right-hand

orner of the display.

iYou acouthe d

��

system

ress s button to accept a econd call.

are connected with the second r; the first caller is kept on hold.

ching between calls

ress 2 and s buttons.

his switches between the calls. he non-active call is kept on hold.

� Terminating a call

� Press t button.

The current call is terminated. You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold.

� Combining two calls

� Press 3 and s buttons.

The calls are combined into one call.

� Terminating a combined call

� Press t button.

The connection to both callers is terminated.

T

Umad

Fhtia

Ifoth

Wstee(�w

Winrec

will be notified of the second call stically, but you will not see this in isplay.

231

Controls in detail

Audio system

Switch

Switch

� Pre

If ycodent

� Entto R

� If nwitbrieprecom

Adjusting sound

� Adjust sound during a telephone call. Sound adjustment (� page 203).

Placing a call

Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process

� Enter desired telephone number using buttons 1 to R.

The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display. ��

ing on the telephone

ing on the telephone

ss h button.

ou have programmed an unlock e for the telephone, you must now er the code.

er code using buttons 1 .

ecessary, correct number entered h the CLR soft key. Press soft key fly to delete the last digit entered; ss soft key and hold to delete the plete number.

� Press OK soft key after entering correct code.

The telephone is unlocked. If you have entered an incorrect code, you must enter the correct code.

Switching off the telephone

� Press h button for approx. three seconds.

PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward, PHONE OFF appears in the display.

Adjusting the volume

� Turn rotary control of N button during a telephone call.

The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned.

iThe volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode.

232

Controls in detail

Audio

� If newith briefprescom

� Afterbeen

Phone b

The numthe mobeither by

In additiphone b

� Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ.

� Press desired numerical key 2 to 9.

The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for S -Schneider, press button 7 four times).

r

� Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ.

The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order.

� Press and hold button ‚ or ƒ until desired initial letter has been reached.

r

iIf thesavephonthe d

��

system

cessary, correct number entered the CLR soft key. Press soft key ly to delete the last digit entered; s soft key and hold to delete the plete number.

correct telephone number has entered, press s button.

ook

bers stored in the phone book of ile telephone can be called up name or number.

on, incoming calls are stored in the ook.

� Searching and calling up phone book entries by name

You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book with the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book.

o

o

telephone number has been d together with a name in the e book, the name will appear in isplay.

iThis is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book.

233

Controls in detail

Audio system

� � Press MEM soft key or press button ‚ or ƒ.

� Press RCV soft key (received calls).

The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display.

� Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ.

The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

iSeveacareabbleftfollare

CELHOWOFAXPAGTEL

Press button ‚ or ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached.

The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

� Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry

� Search for desired entry.

� Press NUM soft key.

The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display.

� Returning calls received

eral sub-entries can be stored for h main entry (name). These entries marked by a corresponding reviation that appears in the upper -hand corner of the display. The owing abbreviations for sub-entries possible:

= Mobile phoneM = HomeR = Work

= Fax= Pager= Main

234

Controls in detail

Audio

� Spee

If yoas sptelepwith unit.

� Pb

� P

T

� Turb

If yoas tutelepwith unit.

� Pu

� Press s button.

The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display.

� Select desired telephone number with button ‚ or ƒ.

The letter L and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

� When you have selected a number, press s button.

The call will be made.

system

d dial

u have stored telephone numbers eed dial numbers in your hone, you can also enter these buttons 1 to R on the radio

ress desired button 1 to R riefly.

ress s button.

he call will be made.

o dial

u have stored telephone numbers rbo dial numbers in your hone, you can also enter these buttons 1 to R on the radio

ress desired button 1 to R ntil the call is made.

Redial

If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function.

� Manual redial

iIf you have activated the automatic re-dial function on your mobile telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal. Refer to the separate operating instruc-tions for the mobile telephone.

235

Controls in detail

Audio system

Accep

If the te(recepthe auding calheard or the numbebook, anumbethe dis

� Pre

The

Accepting a second incoming call

If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.

� Accepting a second call

� Place new call by entering telephone number manually.

You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold.

iYou will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display.

ting an incoming call

lephone is active in the background tion symbol is visible in the display), io source is muted when an incom-

l is received. A ringing tone can be and the caller’s telephone number, name under which the telephone r has been saved in the telephone ppears in the display. If the caller’s r is not relayed, CALL will appear in play.

ss s button.

call is accepted.

Muting a call

It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you.

� Mute on

� Press MUT soft key.

� MIC MUTE will appear in the display.

� Mute off

� Press MUT soft key again.

Terminating a call

� Press t button.

The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again.

236

Controls in detail

Audio

� Swit

� P

TT

� Term

� P

Tckhb

Terminating a call

� Press t button.

The current call is terminated. The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted; however, reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal.

Combining two calls

� Press s button.

The calls are combined into one call.

Terminating a combined call

� Press t button.

The connection to both callers is terminated.

system

ching between calls

ress s button.

his switches between the calls. he non-active call is kept on hold.

inating a call

ress t button.

he current call is terminated. The onnection to the caller previously ept on hold is also interrupted; owever, reconnection is indicated y an acoustic signal.

Placing a second call

If you wish to place another call during an already active call, you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that this feature is depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider.

� Placing a second call

� Place a new call by entering telephone number manually.

� Press s button.

You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold.

�

�

�

237

Controls in detail

Audio system

Emerg

The folemergehead umobilecradle*descriphead u

Consulinstrucphone*“911” phone*

GSM network phones

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked

� Press h button to switch to telephone operation.

PIN? appears in the audio display.

� Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit.

� Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

� Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency.

Warn

The “9servicinal o

ency calls “911”

lowing describes how to dial a “911” ncy call using the audio system

nit when a Mercedes-Benz specified phone* is inserted in the phone . Unless otherwise specified, the tions refer to the audio system nit.

t the separate telephone operating tions that came with your mobile for information on how to place a

emergency call on the mobile .

The following conditions must be met for a “911” emergency call:

� Telephone must be switched on.

� The corresponding mobile communica-tions network must be available.

If you cannot make an emergency call, you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself. ing! G

11” emergency call system is a public e. Using it without due cause is a crim-ffense.

iEmergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check with your local service providers.

238

Controls in detail

Audio

Placing audio hunlocke

� Prestelep

� Entethe a

� Pres

DIALwhileconn

� Waitansw

lacing a “911” emergency call using udio head unit with the phone nlocked

Press h button to switch to telephone operation.

Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit.

Press s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency.

iIf noNO Sdisplan emitself

system

a “911” emergency call using ead unit with the phone d

s h button to switch to hone operation.

r 911 using the number keypad on udio head unit.

s s button for dialing to begin.

ING appears in the audio display the telephone establishes the ection.

until the emergency call center ers, then describe the emergency.

TDMA/CDMA network phones

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked

� Press h button to switch to telephone operation.

CODE? appears in the audio display.

� Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit.

� Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

� Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency.

Pau

�

�

�

�

SIM card is in the mobile phone, ERVICE appears in the audio ay. In that case, you only can make

ergency call on the mobile phone , without the use of the head unit.

239

Controls in detail

Power windows

�Op

Thelewiswondo

12345

If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch, or by pressing and hold-ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, the auto-matic reversal function will not operate.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Poweening

e side wctricall

ndows aitches the froors.

Left frRight fRight rLeft reRear w(� pag

r windowsand closing the windows

indows are opened and closed y. The switches for all the side re on the driver’s door. The

for the respective windows are nt passenger door and the rear

ont windowront windowear windowar windowindow override switch e 75)

Warning! G

When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

The closing of the door windows can be im-mediately halted by releasing the switch or, if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released, by either pressing or pulling the respective switch.

If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly.

240

Controls in detail

Power

� Swit

ully opening the windows xpress-open)

Press switch 1 to 4 past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window opens completely.

ully closing the windows xpress-close)

Pull switch 1 to 4 past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window closes completely.

iYou windopen(� pa

You cusingin th(� patrol p

You cusingthe apane

windows

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

Opening the windows

� Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch.

Closing the windows

� Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch.

F(E

�

F(E

�

can also open or close the ows using the SmartKey (summer ing/convenience closing feature) ge 241).

an close and reopen the windows the air recirculation button ,

e climate control panel ge 177) or automatic climate con-anel (� page 187).

an close and reopen the windows the charcoal filter button e in utomatic climate control l*(� page 187).

Warning! G

If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruc-tion including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

241

Controls in detail

Power windows

Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey

The tilt/sliding sunroof* (� page 245) will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey .

!If this bproope

Remswiand

If ththeholwillsen

Warning! G

Never operate the windows or tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro-cedure.

In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse direction of movement, press button Œ

for opening or ‹ for closing.

Stopping windows

� Press or pull respective switch again.

e upward movement of the window locked during the closing cedure, the window will stop and n slightly.

ove the obstruction, pull the tch again past the resistance point release.

e window still does not close when re is no obstruction, then pull and d the switch again. The side window then close without the obstruction sor function.

Warning! G

Driver’s door only:If within five seconds you again pull the switch past the resistance point and release, the automatic reversal will not function.

242

Controls in detail

Power

� Aim hand

Opening

� Presunlo

The wbeginseco

� Releproc

ynchronizing power windows

he power windows must be synchronized each time

after the battery has been disconnected.

if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed (Express-close).

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed.

Hold the switches for approximately one second.

The power windows are synchronized.

windows

transmitter eye at the driver’s door le.

(Summer opening feature)

s and hold button Πafter cking the vehicle.

indows and tilt/sliding sunroof* to open after approximately one

nd.

ase the Πbutton to stop edure.

Closing (Convenience feature)

� Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.

The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* begin to close after approximately one second.

� Release the ‹ button to stop procedure.

Make sure all side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* are properly closed before leaving the vehicle.

S

Tre

�

�

�

�

243

Controls in detail

Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

�Optil

Thclotiltco

Su

1234

Warning! G

When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction.

The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the event of an accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof.

In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compartment. ��

Poweening

t/slidin

e tilt/slsed ele/slidinntrol pa

nroof s

Push uPull doPush fPush b

r tilt/sliding sunroof*and closing the power g sunroof

iding sunroof can be opened and ctrically. The switch for the

g sunroof is on the overhead nel.

witch

p to raise sunroof at rearwn to lower sunroof at rearorward to slide sunroof closedack to slide sunroof open

With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a screen can be slid into the roof opening to guard against sun rays. When sliding the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.

Screen

244

Controls in detail

Power

pening and closing the power ilt/sliding sunroof

To open, close, raise, or lower the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch to resistance point in the required direction of arrows 1 to 4.

Release the sunroof switch when the tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the desired position.

ully opening (Express-open) and losing (Express-close) the power ilt/sliding sunroof

To open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof switch past the resistance point in the required direction of arrow 4 or 3 and release.

The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes completely.

When leSmartKwith yochildrenaccess vised usacciden

!To avtranswhicsunr

Do ntherecould

The tor clomalf

��

tilt/sliding sunroof*

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Ot

�

Fct

�

aving the vehicle, always remove the ey from the starter switch, take it u, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave unattended in the vehicle, or with to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-e of vehicle equipment can cause an t and/or serious personal injury.

oid damaging the seals, do not port any objects with sharp edges h can stick out of the tilt/sliding oof.

ot open the tilt/sliding sunroof if is snow or ice on the roof, as this result in malfunctions.

ilt/sliding sunroof can be opened sed manually should an electrical

unction occur (� page 382).

iYou can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey (summer opening/convenience closing feature) (� page 245).

You can close and reopen the tilt/slid-ing sunroof using the air recirculation button , in the climate control pan-el (� page 177) or automatic climate control panel (� page 187).

You can close and reopen the tilt/slid-ing sunroof using the charcoal filter button e in the automatic climate control panel*(� page 187).

245

Controls in detail

Power tilt/sliding sunroof*

Stoppduring

� Modire

� Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door handle.

Opening (Summer opening feature)

� Press and hold button Œ after unlocking the vehicle.

The windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof begin to open after approximately one second.

� Release the Œ button to stop procedure.

iIf thsunprosto

ing the power tilt/sliding sunroof Express-operation

ve the sunroof switch in any ction.

Opening and closing the power tilt/sliding sunroof with the SmartKey

The power windows (� page 241) will also be opened or closed when you operate the tilt/sliding sunroof with the SmartKey .

e movement of the tilt/sliding roof is blocked during the closing cedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will p and reopen slightly.

Warning! G

Never operate the windows or tilt/sliding sunroof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing pro-cedure.

In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the transmit button on the SmartKey. To reverse direction of movement, press button Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.

246

Controls in detail

Power

Closing

� Preslocki

The wsunrappr

� Releproc

Make sutilt/slidibefore le

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

Move and hold the sunroof switch in the direction of arrow 1 (� page 243) until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the rear.

Hold the sunroof switch for approximately one second.

Check the Express-open feature (� page 244).

If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.

tilt/sliding sunroof*

(Convenience feature)

s and hold button ‹ after ng the vehicle.

indows and the tilt/sliding oof begin to close after oximately one second.

ase the ‹ button to stop edure.

re all side windows and the ng sunroof are properly closed aving the vehicle.

Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding sunroof

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized

� after the battery has been disconnected or discharged

� after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been closed manually (� page 382)

� after a malfunction

� if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open smoothly

�

�

�

247

Controls in detail

Driving systems

�Thde

�

Fodritem

Warning! G

Cruise control is a convenience system de-signed to assist the driver during vehicle op-eration. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use cruise control if the road, traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.

� The use of cruise control can be danger-ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed.

� The use of cruise control can be danger-ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

� Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be oper-ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

Drivine drivinscribed

Cruisecan m

r informving sy

s” (�

g systemsg system of your vehicle is on the following pages:

control, with which the vehicle aintain a preset speed

ation on the BAS, ABS and ESP stems, see “Driving safety sys-page 77).

Cruise control

Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.

Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h).

The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (� page 22).

248

Controls in detail

Drivin

1 Sets2 Sets3 Canc4 Resu

Setting

� Accespee

� Briefcont

The c

� Rempeda

Cruis

!Vehicles with automatic transmission:Moving the gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position N while driving, except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

iVehicles with manual transmission:The set cruise controlled speed is switched off when declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a gear.

iThe last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine.

g systems

current or higher speed current or lower speedels cruise controlmes at last set speed

current speed

lerate or decelerate to the desired d.

ly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise rol lever.

urrent speed is set.

ove your foot from the accelerator l.

e control is activated.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel cruise control:

� Step on the brake pedal.

Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

or

� Briefly push the cruise control lever to position 3.

Cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

iOn uphill or downhill grades, cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.

249

Controls in detail

Driving systems

Settin

� Liftandrea

� Rel

The

Settin

� Depposdes

� Rel

The

Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function)

� Briefly push cruise control lever to position 4.

The cruise control resumes the last set speed.

� Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

iDepnotbriecruspe

Warning! G

The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per-mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and/or seri-ous injury to you and others.

g a higher speed

cruise control lever to position 1 hold it up until the desired speed is ched.

ease cruise control lever.

new speed is set.

g a lower speed

ress cruise control lever to ition 2 and hold it down until the ired speed is reached.

ease cruise control lever.

new speed is set.

Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

Faster

� Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1.

Slower

� Briefly tip cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2.

ressing the accelerator pedal does deactivate cruise control. After f acceleration (e.g. for passing),

ise control will resume the last ed set.

iVehicles with automatic transmission: When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

Controls in detail

in

a ki sack* (Canada only)

HandleCoverArmrest

nfolding and loading

Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).

Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2 down.

i

sdde

250

Load

Roof r

Warn

Only uMerceavoid factur

g

ck* � Only mount the roof rack between the fastening points (see arrows).

� Secure the roof rack according to manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

S

123

U

�

�

ng! G

e roof racks approved by es-Benz for your vehicle model to amage to the vehicle. Follow manu-r’s installation instructions.

!Load the roof rack in such a way that the vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.

Make sure

� you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof*.

� you can fully open the trunk.

251

Controls in detail

Loading

4 Ho

� Unf

� Pulme

� From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.

Warning! G

The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other objects.

Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause injury to vehicle occupants. ��

ok and loop fastener

asten hook and loop fastener 4.

l ski sack into passenger compart-nt and unfold.

5 Button

� Open trunk lid.

� Press button 5.

The flap opens downward.

252

Controls in detail

Loadin

6 Strap

� Tightend (are t

nloading and folding

Loosen the straps.

Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.

Unload skis.

Close flap in trunk.

Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.

Place folded ski sack inside recess of backrest.

Fasten hook and loop fastener.

Close ski sack compartment cover.

��

g

en strap 6 by pulling at the loose arrow) until the skis in the ski sack ightly secured.

7 Hook8 Eye

� Connect hook 7 to eye 8.

Tighten strap by pulling at the loose end (arrow).

U

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

253

Controls in detail

Loading

Remov

You caor dryi

1 But2 Ski3 Fla

� Op

� Pre

The

� Prefram

� Pulout

Split rear bench seat*

To expand the cargo area, you can fold down the left and right rear seat backrests.

The two sections can be folded down separately.

Warning! G

When expanding the luggage area, always fold the seat cushions fully forward.

Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the upright position.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

Always use the cargo tie down rings* (� page 256).

ing the ski sack

n remove the ski sack for cleaning ng.

ton sack framep

en trunk lid.

ss button 1.

flap 3 opens downward.

ss button 1 firmly until ski sack e 2 is released.

l ski sack frame 2 with ski sack .

Installing the ski sack

Install the ski sack in the reverse order.

� Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack inward until the ski sack frame snaps into place.

� Close flap 3.

� Close trunk lid.

Warning! G

Never drive vehicle with trunk open while the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-terior, resulting in unconsciousness and death.

iTo prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the trunk, always close the flap.

254

Controls in detail

Loadin

Folding

The reletrunk.

� Pull

� Fullyrestr

eturning the backrest to original osition

Fold backrest 2 rearward until it engages.

Fold seat cushion 1 rearward until it locks into position.

g

the backrest forward

ase handle 1 is located in the

release handle 1.

retract and fold rearward head aints (� page 103).

� Pull release handle 2.

� Fold seat cushion 3 forward.

� Fold backrest 4 forward.

Rp

�

�!Always release the seat cushion and fold it forward before folding the seat backrests forward. Otherwise, the backrest covering may be damaged.

255

Controls in detail

Loading

If the ba red in

� Cheand

Loading instructions

The total load weight including vehicle occupants and luggage/cargo should not exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity weight indicated on the corresponding placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

The handling characteristics of a fully load-ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-tribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra-tions shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.

ackrest is not locked into position, dicator 3 will be visible.

ck for secure locking by pushing pulling on the backrest.

Warning! G

If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up, then the backrest is not properly locked into position.

Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is being carried in the trunk, or the extended cargo compartment is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo.

iTo prevent unauthorized persons from access to the trunk, always lock backrest in its upright position.

256

Controls in detail

Loadin

Always pfront or them as

The heavways befluencesthe vehi

argo tie-down rings*

he four cargo tie-down rings are located the trunk.

argo tie-down rings

Carefully secure cargo by applying even load on all rings with rope sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.

Always follow loading instructions (� page 255).

g

lace items being carried against rear seat backrests, and fasten securely as possible.

iest portion of the cargo should al- kept as low as possible since it in- the handling characteristics of cle.

C

Tin

C

�

Warning! G

Always fasten items being carried as secure-ly as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in-jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

To help avoid personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care when transporting cargo.

Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.

iThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

The enlarged cargo area should only be used for items which do not fit in the trunk alone.

257

Controls in detail

Useful features

�St

1 Unlocking2 Locking

Locking the glove box

� Insert mechanical key (� page 378) into the glove box lock and turn it to position 2.

Unlocking the glove box

� Turn mechanical key in the glove box lock to position 1.

W

Tswgpbb

Lo

Ktaa

Usefuorage c

arning

o help aion or suhen stoage or cile luggaacks. Delow the

uggage bjects.

eep como prevenbout andn accide

l featuresompartments Glove box

1 Glove box lid release2 Glove box

Opening the glove box

� Pull lid release 1.

The glove box lid opens downward.

Closing the glove box

� Push lid up to close.

! G

void personal injury during a colli-dden maneuver, exercise care

wing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-argo in the trunk if possible. Do not ge or cargo higher than the seat

o not place anything on the shelf rear window.

nets cannot secure hard or heavy

partment lids closed. This will help t stored objects from being thrown injuring vehicle occupants during nt.

258

Controls in detail

Useful

Armres

1 Hand2 Butto3 Butto

hanging inclination of armrest

Handle

Pull up on armrest.

owering armrest

Pull handle 1 to lower armrest.!Do ntelepblowbe daUse for s

features

t storage compartments

len, passenger siden, driver’s side

Opening storage compartment

� Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.

Closing storage compartment

� Press armrest down until it engages into place.

Opening telephone compartment

� Press button 3 on driver’s side or button 2 on passenger side and lift armrest.

Closing telephone compartment

� Press armrest down until it engages into place.

C

1

�

L

�ot store any items between the hone holder and the cover for the er. Otherwise these items could maged when the holder is closed.

the space in the front door pocket towing.

259

Controls in detail

Useful features

Armrecompa

� Pulit d

Underneath the swiveling cup holder is another stationary cup holder. You can only use this when the swiveling cup holder is pulled out and completely turned outward.

Sliding out the swiveling cup holder

� Push button 1.

The cup holder slides upward. ��

st in the rear passenger rtment

l the top of the armrest out and fold own.

Cup holders in front of seat armrest

Warning! G

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open con-tainers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneu-vers, or in an accident.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-dent.

Keep in mind that obejcts placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehi-cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior.Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-or may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

260

Controls in detail

Useful

Turningoutward

� Turnarrow

You

up holder in rear seat armrest!No ocup hholdswivcould

Warning! G

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open con-tainers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneu-vers, or in an accident.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-dent.

Keep in mind that obejcts placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehi-cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior.Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-or may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

��

features

the swiveling cup holder

the cup holder in the direction of 2 until it engages.

can now use both cup holders.

Turning the swiveling cup holder inward and sliding it in

� Turn the cup holder in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages.

� Turn the cup holder in the direction of arrow 4 until it engages.

C

bjects should be in the swiveling older when the swiveling cup

er is slided upward. Otherwise the eling cup holder or the objects be damaged.

!No objects should be in the stationary cup holder when the swiveling cup holder is turned inward and pushed in. Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or the objects could be damaged.

261

Controls in detail

Useful features

1 Cup

Ashtrays

Center console ashtray

1 Cover plate2 Sliding button3 Ashtray insert

� Briefly press the bottom of cover plate 1.

The cover plate opens automatically.

holder

Opening cup holder

� Briefly press the front of cup holder 1.

The cup holder slides out slightly.

� Pull out the cup holder until it stops.

Closing cup holder

� Slide cup holder 1 in until it engages.

Parcel net in front passenger footwell

A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

Warning! G

Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or ob-jects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.

In an accident, during hard braking or sud-den maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

262

Controls in detail

Useful

Removi

� Secusetti

� Movepositseco

Nowthe a

� Push

The asligh

� Rem

emoving ashtray insert

Push button 1 to disengage ashtray insert 2 and remove it.

einstalling ashtray insert

Push the ashtray insert 2 down into the retainer until it engages.

Push at top of cover 3 to close ashtray.

Warni

Removestandinsecure selectomissionlever insecond

features

ng ashtray insert

re vehicle from movement by ng the parking brake.

the gear selector lever to ion N (manual transmission: nd gear).

you have more room to take out shtray insert.

sliding button 2 to the right.

shtray insert 3 slides out tly.

ove the ashtray insert.

Reinstalling ashtray insert

� Push the ashtray insert 3 down into the retainer until it engages.

� Push down cover plate 1 to close ashtray.

The cover plate engages.

Rear seat ashtray

1 Button2 Ashtray insert3 Cover

� Pull at top of cover 3.

R

�

R

�

�

ng! G

front ashtray only with vehicle g still. Set the parking brake to vehicle from movement. Move gear r lever to position N (manual trans-: second gear). With gear selector position N (manual transmission: gear) turn off the engine.

263

Controls in detail

Useful features

Cigare

1 Cov2 Cig

� Sw

� Briepla

The

� Pus

Theaut

Electrical outlet in the rear passenger compartment

1 Electrical outlet2 Cover

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

� Pull at top of cover 2.

� Flip cover 1 to the left and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

iThe electrical outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.

tte lighter

er platearette lighter

itch on the ignition (� page 33).

fly press the bottom of cover te 1.

cover plate opens automatically.

h in cigarette lighter 2.

cigarette lighter will pop out omatically when hot.

� Push down cover plate 1 to close ashtray.

The cover plate engages.

Warning! G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only.

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

iThe lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.

264

Controls in detail

Useful

Telepho

Radio traphone obe usednected tthe outs

The exteMercederized Metion on texternalmitter opof an ex

ou can take and place telephone calls sing the s and t buttons on the teering wheel. To carry out other tele-hone functions, use the control system

page 152).

ee separate operating manual for instruc-ons on how to use the telephone.

Warni

Never owith a bout beinfrom inrunningtion of sibly reinjury.

features

ne*

nsmitters, such as a portable tele-r a citizens band unit, should only inside the vehicle if they are con-o an antenna that is installed on ide of the vehicle.

rnal antenna must be approved by s-Benz. Please contact an autho-rcedes-Benz Center for informa-he installation of an approved antenna. Refer to the radio trans-eration instructions regarding use

ternal antenna.

Yusp(�

Sti

ng! G

perate radio transmitters equipped uilt-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-g connected to an external antenna)

side the vehicle while the engine is . Doing so could lead to a malfunc-the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-sulting in an accident and personal

Warning! G

Please do not forget that your primary re-sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we rec-ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele-phone call.

If you choose to use the telephone1 while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

Only operate the COMAND* (Cockpit Man-agement and Data System)1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

1 Observe all legal requirements.

265

Controls in detail

Useful features

Tele A � To activate, press the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • or the Information button ¡, depend-ing on the type of response required.

Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock and more.

!Thesyscomandtheeithsys

If yactCenor 1

iThe SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror.

The Roadside Assistance button • and the Information button ¡ are located below the center armrest cover.

id* The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:

� automatic and manual emergency

� Roadside assistance and

� information

The Tele Aid system is operational provid-ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, press button æ and to lower, press button ç. The volume can also be adjusted using the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND* head unit.

initial activation of the Tele Aid tem may only be performed by pleting the subscriber agreement placing an acquaintance call using ¡ button. Failure to complete er of these steps will result in a tem that is not activated.

ou have any questions regarding ivation, please call the Response ter at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) -888-923-8367 (in Canada).

266

Controls in detail

Useful

System

Initially, functionindicatoRoadsidInformatthan tenmessageto workdisplay.

mergency calls

n emergency call is initiated utomatically following an accident in hich the emergency tensioning devices TDs) or air bags deploy.

n emergency call can also be initiated anually by opening the cover next to the terior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then riefly pressing the button located under e cover. See (� page 267) for structions on initiating an emergency call anually.

nce the emergency call is in progress, the dicator lamp in the SOS button will begin flash. The message Connecting call

ppears in the multifunction display and e audio system is muted. When the

onnection is established, the message all connected appears in the multifunc-on display. All information relevant to the mergency, such as the location of the ehicle (determined by the GPS satellite cation system), vehicle model, identifica-on number and color are generated.

iThe TnetwGPS lites thesTelethis omon

features

self-check

after switching on ignition, mal-s are detected and indicated (the r lamps in the SOS button, the e Assistance button • and the ion button ¡ stay on longer seconds or do not come on). The Tele Aid malfunction. Drive shop appears in the multifunction

E

Aaw(E

Aminbthinm

OintoathcCtievloti

ele Aid system utilizes the cellular ork for communication and the (Global Positioning System) satel-for vehicle location. If either of e signals are unavailable, the Aid system may not function and if ccurs, assistance must be sum-

ed by other means.

Warning! G

If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button and/or in the Information button remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message Tele Aid malfunction. Drive to workshop is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a mal-function in the system has been detected.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

267

Controls in detail

Useful features

A voiceCenterwill beter theThe Redetermemergeoccupa

The Te

� it hopesubcon

� theandtheCen

Initiating an emergency call manually

1 Cover2 SOS button

� Briefly press on cover 1.

The cover will open.

� Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will flash until the emergency call is concluded.

� Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.

� Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded.

iLocpossignandRes

connection between the Response and the occupants of the vehicle established automatically soon af- emergency call has been initiated. sponse Center will attempt to ine more precisely the nature of the ncy provided they can speak to an nt of the vehicle.

le Aid system is available if

as been activated and is rational. Activation requires a scription for monitoring services, nection and cellular air time

relevant cellular phone network GPS signals are available and pass information on to the Response ter

ation of the vehicle on a map is only sible if the vehicle is able to receive als from the GPS satellite network pass the information on to the ponse Center.

Warning! G

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-vant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed. appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds.

Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

268

Controls in detail

Useful

he Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance ispatcher will either dispatch a qualified ercedes-Benz technician or arrange to w your vehicle to the nearest authorized ercedes-Benz Center. For services such

s labor and/or towing, charges may pply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance anual for more information.

he following is only available in the USA:

Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

Warni

If you fevehiclevehicledo not wpressedleave thtion. Thcontactvehiclereceivemake vpants.

features

Roadside Assistance button •

Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button •.

� Press and hold button (for longer than two seconds).

A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.

� Describe the nature of the need for assistance.

TdMtoMaam

T

�

ng! G

el at any way in jeopardy when in the (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, in a dangerous road location), please

ait for voice contact after you have the emergency button. Carefully e vehicle and move to a safe loca-e Response Center will automatically local emergency officials with the ’s approximate location if they an automatic SOS signal and cannot oice contact with the vehicle occu-

269

Controls in detail

Useful features

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.

For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

iTheAssnatsecaftewittion

Seewhon app

If thAssconconestcoutanphomemu

Information button ¡

Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button ¡.

� Press and hold button (for longer than two seconds).

A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.

indicator lamp on the Roadside istance button • remains illumi-ed in red for approximately ten onds during the system self-check r switching on ignition (together

h the SOS button and the Informa- button ¡).

system self-check (� page 266) en the indicator lamp does not come in red or stays on longer than roximately ten seconds.

e indicator lamp on the Roadside istance button • is flashing tinuously and there was no voice nection to the Response Center ablished, then the Tele Aid system ld not initiate a Roadside Assis-ce call (e.g. the relevant cellular ne network is not available). The

ssage Call failed. appears in the ltifunction display.

Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit.

270

Controls in detail

Useful

pgrade scenario

n emergency call is possible even if other ervices are active.

iThe ibuttofor athe son igbuttobutto

See whenon inappr

If thebuttoand the Rthe Tan Incelluavailappe

!If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.

features

U

As

ndicator lamp on the Information n ¡ remains illuminated in red

pproximately ten seconds during ystem self-check after switching nition (together with the SOS n and the Roadside Assistance n •).

system self-check (� page 266) the indicator lamp does not come red or stays on longer than oximately ten seconds.

indicator lamp on the Information n ¡ is flashing continuously

there was no voice connection to esponse Center established, then ele Aid system could not initiate formation call (e.g. the relevant lar phone network is not able). The message Call failed. ars in the multifunction display.

Information calls can be terminated using the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the re-spective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit.

!If the indicator lamps do not start flash-ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

271

Controls in detail

Useful features

Remote door unlock

In case you have locked your vehicle unin-tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:

� Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

You will be asked to provide your pass-word which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.

� Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.

The message Connecting call appears in the multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.

iThebutclua RAssexcInfotermtheresteleCO

indicator lamp in the respective ton flashes until the call is con-ded. Calls can only be terminated by esponse Center or Customer istance Center representative ept Roadside Assistance and rmation calls, which can also be inated by pressing button t on

multifunction steering wheel or the pective button for ending a phone call on the audio system or

MAND* head unit.

iWhen a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio system or the COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND* navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by press-ing the RPT button on the COMAND* unit. A pop-up window will appear in the COMAND* display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.

272

Controls in detail

Useful

arage door opener*

he built-in remote control is capable of perating up to three separately controlled evices, for example garage door openers, ate openers, or other devices compatible ith HomeLink® or some other systems.

ou can program the signal transmitter uttons.

iThe ravailnetw

The Smessin threce

OnceRespattemthe v

If thefor munlocthe Rwaittrunk

features

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

� Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

� Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service.

The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.

G

Todgw

Yb

emote door unlock feature is able if the relevant cellular phone ork is available.

OS button will flash and the age Connecting call will appear

e multifunction display to indicate ipt of the door unlock command.

the vehicle is unlocked, a onse Center specialist will pt to establish voice contact with

ehicle occupants.

trunk recessed handle was pulled ore than 20 seconds before door k authorization was received by esponse Center, you must 15 minutes before pulling the recessed handle again. i

When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automat-ically to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm system* (� page 83) and tow-away alarm* (� page 85).

273

Controls in detail

Useful features

Remoterear vie

1

2 3

5

6

iCertain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

control integrated into the interior w mirror

Indicator lamp

4 Signal transmitter button

Hand-held transmitter button

Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle equipment)

Warning! G

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent po-tential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.

274

Controls in detail

Useful

rogramming or reprogramming the tegrated remote control

tep 1:

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

tep 2:

If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold the two outer signal transmit-ter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when the indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This proce-dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held trans-mitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

iUSAThis the Fthe f

(1) Tin

(2) tininu

Any devicto op

features

Pin

S

�

S

�

only:device complies with Part 15 of CC Rules. Operation is subject to ollowing two conditions:

his device may not cause harmful terference, and

his device must accept any terference received, including terference that may cause ndesired operation.

unauthorized modification to this e could void the user’s authority erate the equipment.

iCanada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-ence, and

(2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

275

Controls in detail

Useful features

Step 3

� Hoconyou5 inof tlockee

Step 4

� Usiprebutsigor 4com

Theintefirs

Step 7:

� To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

iIf the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.

:

ld the end of the hand-held remote trol transmitter 6 of the device wish to train approximately 2 to (5 to12 cm) away from the surface he integrated remote control ated on the interior rear view mirror, ping the indicator lamp 1 in view.

:

ng both hands, simultaneously ss the hand-held transmitter ton 5 and the desired integrated nal transmitter button (2, 3

). Do not release the buttons until pleting step 5.

indicator lamp 1 on the grated remote control will flash,

t slowly and then rapidly.

Step 5:

� When the indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

Step 6:

� Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp 1.

If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released.

iThe indicator lamp 1 flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after 20 seconds.

276

Controls in detail

Useful

Rolling

To train rolling cfeature, complet(steps 1person mprocedu

Step 8:

� Locadoor

Exacmay Depe“traito asis difbuttooper

tep 12:

Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).

tep 13:

To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

features

code programming

a garage door opener (or other ode devices) with the rolling code follow these instructions after ing the “Programming” portion through 6) of this text. (A second

ay make the following training res quicker and easier.)

te “training” button on the garage opener motor head unit.

t location and color of the button vary by garage door opener brand. nding on manufacturer, the

ning” button may also be referred “learn”or “smart” button. If there ficulty locating the transmitting n, refer to the garage door opener

ator’s manual.

Step 9:

� Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.

Step 10:

� Firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).

Step 11:

� Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to complete the training process.

Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training.

S

�

S

�

277

Controls in detail

Useful features

Gate o

Canadtransmafter swhich integrasignal Canadare desmanne

If you ldifficul(regardprograwith th

Operation of integrated remote control

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

� Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.

The integrated remote control trans-mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

perator/Canadian programming

ian radio-frequency laws require itter signals to “time-out” (or quit) everal seconds of transmission may not be long enough for the ted signal transmitter to pick up the during programming. Similar to this ian law, some U.S. gate operators igned to “time-out” in the same r.

ive in Canada or if you are having ties programming a gate operator less of where you live) by using the

mming procedures, replace step 4 e following:

Step 4:

� Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.

� Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

278

Controls in detail

Useful

Erasingmemory

� Swit

� Simutransapprindicnot h

The ceras

iIf youof al

features

the integrated remote control

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

ltaneously hold down the signal mitter buttons 2 and 4, for oximately 20 seconds, until the ator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do old for longer than 30 seconds.

odes of all three channels are ed.

Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button

To program a device using a signal trans-mitter button previously trained, follow these steps:

� Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button.

� The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3. sell your vehicle, erase the codes

l three channels.

279

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Driving instructions

At the gas station

Engine compartment

Tires and wheels

Winter driving

Maintenance

Vehicle care

Operation

“Od a

ir

fter 1000 miles (1500 km) you may radually increase vehicle and engine peeds to the permissible maximum.

ll of the above instructions, as may apply your vehicle type, also apply when

riving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) fter the engine or the rear differential has een replaced.

!Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:

� During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).

� During this period, avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear.

iAlways obey applicable speed limits.

280

In the detailetaining

The f

peration” section you will find information on operating, main-nd caring for your vehicle.

st 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satis-fied you will be with its performance later on.

� Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

� During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).

� Shift gears in a timely manner.

� Avoid accelerating by kick-down.

� Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever.

� Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

� Select C as the preferred shift program (� page 164) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).

Ags

Atodab

281

Operation

Driving instructions

�Dr

Fudeco

To

�

�

�

�

�

�

Fudritra

Pedals

Power assistance

Warning! G

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement.

Warning! G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Drivinive sen

el conspends onditions

save fu

Keep tinflatio

Remov

Remov

Allow load u

Avoid eration

Have aat theMainteby theContaCente

el consving in ffic, on

g instructionssibly – save fuel

umption, to a great extent, n driving habits and operating .

el you should:

ires at the recommended tire n pressures.

e unnecessary loads.

e roof rack when not in use.

engine to warm up under low se.

frequent acceleration and decel-.

ll maintenance work performed intervals specified in the nance Booklet and as required

maintenance service display. ct an authorized Mercedes-Benz r.

umption is also increased by cold weather, in stop-and-go short trips and in hilly area.

Drinking and driving

Warning! G

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina-tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

282

Operation

Drivin

Brakes rake pad wear or a leak in the system may e the reason for low brake fluid in the servoir.

ave the brake system inspected mediately. Contact an authorized ercedes-Benz Center.

ll checks and service work on the brake ystem should be carried out by qualified chnicians only. Contact an authorized ercedes-Benz Center.

nly install brake pads and brake fluid commended by Mercedes-Benz.

Warni

After drwithoutter deethe firsreducedbe necefect. Main front

Restingcause ebrake p

It can atherebytivenesvehicledent.

Warning! G

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

g instructions

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.

If your brake system is normally only subject to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads.

If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.

Bbre

HimM

AsteM

Ore

ng! G

iving in heavy rain for some time applying the brakes or through wa-p enough to wet brake components, t braking action may be somewhat and increased pedal pressure may ssary to obtain expected braking ef-intain a safe distance from vehicles

.

your foot on the brake pedal will xcessive and premature wear of the ads.

lso result in the brakes overheating, significantly reducing their effec-s. It may not be possible to stop the in sufficient time to avoid an acci-

!Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes.

Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System (BAS) (� page 78).

283

Operation

Driving instructions

After hon for parkingdown t

Drivin

Apply tdrivingwhen t

Warm place foperat

!Whgraby engprered

Warning! G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re-sult of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

� Keep right foot on brake pedal.

� Firmly depress parking brake pedal.

� Move the gear selector lever to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

� Slowly release brake pedal.

� When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� Take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle when leaving.

ard braking, it is advisable to drive some time, rather than immediately , so that the air stream will cool

he brakes faster.

g off

he brakes to test them briefly after off. Perform this procedure only he road is clear of other traffic.

up the engine smoothly. Do not ull load on the engine until the ing temperature has been reached.

When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Parking

en driving down long and steep des, relieve the load on the brakes shifting into a lower gear to use the ine’s braking power. This helps vent overheating of the brakes and uces brake pad wear. !

Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

!Set the parking brake whenever park-ing or leaving the vehicle. In addition, move gear selector lever to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

When parking on hills, always turn front wheels towards the road curb.

284

Operation

Drivin

Tires

Treadwelaw. Theplaces obecomeapproximpoint theshould b

ydroplaning

epending on the depth of the water layer n the road, hydroplaning may occur, even t low speeds and with new tires. Reduce ehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the ad and apply brakes cautiously in the in.

Warni

If you feride disble damyou shoers, cartion to athe roa

Inspectfor possappear Mercedrepairs.

Warning! G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

g instructions

ar indicators (TWI) are required by se indicators are located in six n the tread circumference and visible at a tread depth of

ately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which tire is considered worn and e replaced.

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-atures).

H

Doavrora

ng! G

el a sudden significant vibration or turbance, or you suspect that possi-age to your vehicle has occurred, uld turn on the hazard warning flash-efully slow down, and drive with cau-n area which is a safe distance from

d.

the tires and the vehicle underbody ible damage. If the vehicle or tires unsafe, have it towed to the nearest es-Benz Center or tire dealer for

Warning! G

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

285

Operation

Driving instructions

Tire tr

The saicy roa

You shcondititempepoint.

Tire speed rating

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.

Warn

If ice will beweathwith e

Warning! G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-mum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

action

fe speed on a wet, snow covered or d is always lower than on a dry road.

ould pay particular attention to the on of the road whenever the outside ratures are close to the freezing

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-propriate caution.ing! G

has formed on the road, tire traction substantially reduced. Under such er conditions, drive, steer and brake xtreme caution.

!Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

286

Operation

Drivin

C 230 KC 240, CC 320 (U

Your veh“H”-rateof 130 m

An electvehicle f130 mph

C 230 K

Your veh“W”-rateof 168 m

An electvehicle f130 mph

inter driving instructions

he most important rule for slippery or icy ads is to drive sensibly and to avoid

brupt acceleration, braking and steering aneuvers. Do not use the cruise control

ystem under such conditions.

hen the vehicle is in danger of skidding, ove gear selector lever to position N or in

ase of manual transmission declutch. ry to keep the vehicle under control by orrective steering action.

iFor information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains” (� page 331).

Warning! G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.

g instructions

ompressor (Canada only), 240 4MATIC, SA only), C 320 4MATIC

icle is factory equipped with d tires, which have a speed rating ph (210 km/h).

ronic speed limiter prevents your rom exceeding a speed of (210 km/h).

ompressor Sport, C 320 Sport

icle is factory equipped with d tires, which have a speed rating ph (270 km/h).

ronic speed limiter prevents your rom exceeding a speed of (210 km/h).

C 55 AMG

Your vehicle is factory equipped with “Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 155 mph (250 km/h).

W

Troams

WmcTc

iFor information on tire speed rating for winter tires, see “Winter tires” (� page 330).

For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, (� page 318).

287

Operation

Driving instructions

Road saffect force mthe no

Depreswhen troads cefficien

If the von saltefficienpossib

Standing water

Warn

Makeusersmane

!Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth. Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip-ment, thus damaging them.

If you must drive through standing wa-ter, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

alts and chemicals can adversely braking efficiency. Increased pedal

ay become necessary to produce rmal braking effect.

sing the brake pedal periodically raveling at length on salt-strewn an bring road-salt-impaired braking cy back to normal.

ehicle is parked after being driven -treated roads, the braking cy should be tested as soon as

le after driving is resumed.

For more information, see “Winter driving” (� page 330).

ing! G

sure not to endanger any other road when carrying out these braking uvers.

Warning! G

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-sulting in unconsciousness and death.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind

Warning! G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

288

Operation

Drivin

Passeng

Driving

Abroad,Mercededisposalwhich arMercedeshould ran autho

elephones* and two-way radios

adio transmitters, such as a portable lephone or a citizens band unit should

nly be used inside the vehicle if they are onnected to an antenna that is installed n the outside of the vehicle.

efer to the radio transmitter operation structions regarding use of an external

ntenna.

Warni

Always securel

In an acden maaroundto vehicsecurel

The truobjects

Warning! G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-out being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and personal injury.

g instructions

er compartment

abroad

there is an extensive s-Benz service network at your . If you plan to drive into areas e not listed in the index of your s-Benz Center directory, you

equest pertinent information from rized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Control and operation of radio transmitters

COMAND*, radio and telephone*

T

Rteoco

Rina

ng! G

fasten items being carried as y as possible.

cident, during hard braking or sud-neuvers, loose items will be thrown inside the vehicle, and cause injury le occupants unless the items are

y fastened in the vehicle.

nk is the preferred place to carry .

Warning! G

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System), radio or telephone1 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

1 Observe all legal requirements

289

Operation

Driving instructions

Cataly

Your Mmonoliimportoxygencontroemissioperatrecommas outl

Emission control

Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.

These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-cians. Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance Booklet.

!To congas

AnyopeOthmacausta

tic converter

ercedes-Benz is equipped with thic-type catalytic converters, an ant element in conjunction with the sensors to achieve substantial l of the pollutants in the exhaust ons. Keep your vehicle in proper ing condition by following our

ended maintenance instructions ined in your Maintenance Booklet.

prevent damage to the catalytic verters, only use premium unleaded oline in this vehicle.

noticeable irregularities in engine ration should be repaired promptly. erwise, excessive unburned fuel y reach the catalytic converter, sing it to overheat and potentially rt a fire.

Warning! G

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combus-tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

290

Operation

Drivin

Warni

Inhalatiyour hemonoxiuncons

Do not (such aventilatfumes ahave thimmediconditiowindow

Warning! G

� Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

� Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com-ing from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

g instructions

Coolant temperature

During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to approximately 248°F (120°C).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

ng! G

on of exhaust gas is hazardous to alth. All exhaust gas contains carbon de, and inhaling it can cause ciousness and lead to death.

run the engine in confined areas s a garage) which are not properly ed. If you think that exhaust gas re entering the vehicle while driving, e cause determined and corrected ately. If you must drive under these ns, drive only with at least one fully open at all times.

291

Operation

At the gas station

�Re The fuel filler flap is located on the

right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

1 To open the fuel filler flap2 To insert the fuel filler cap3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure

table

� Turn the engine off by turning the SmartKey to position 0.

� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

W

GItinaean

��

At thefueling

arning

asoline burns vjury. W

void inhxtinguisllow spaear gaso

gas station

! G

is highly flammable and poisonous. iolently and can cause serious henever you are around gasoline, aling fumes and skin contact, h all smoking materials. Never rks, flame or smoking materials line!

Warning! G

Flexible Fuel Vehicles only (identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on fuel filler flap):Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extin-guish all open flames before fueling. Never smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.

292

Operation

At the

� Openthe p

The f

� Turnholdrelea

� Takearrowflap.

To pinto unit.

� Onlyunit over

iOnly use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.

More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.

Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on fuel filler flap.

For more information, see “Flexible Fuel Vehicles” (� page 432).

iLeaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the ú malfunc-tion indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.

For more information, see “Practical hints” (� page 344) and (� page 345).

��

gas station

the fuel filler flap by pushing at oint indicated by arrow 1.

uel filler flap springs open.

fuel cap counterclockwise and on to it until possible pressure is sed.

off cap and set it in direction of 2 in the recess on the fuel filler

revent fuel vapors from escaping open air, fully insert filler nozzle

fill your tank until the filler nozzle cuts out – do not top up or fill.

� Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise.

You will hear when fuel cap is tightened.

� Close fuel filler flap.

Warning! G

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.

293

Operation

At the gas station

Check

1 Coo2 Bra3 Win

cle

Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system*

For more information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 301).

Engine oil level

For more information on engine oil level, see “Engine oil” (� page 295).

Vehicle lighting

Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (� page 385).

Exterior lamp switch (� page 110).

Tire inflation pressure

For more information on tire inflation pres-sure, see “Checking tire inflation pressure” (� page 313).

iOpe

regularly and before a long trip

lantke fluid (fuse box cover removed)dshield washer and headlamp

aning system*

Coolant

For normal replenishing, use water (pota-ble water quality). For more information, see “Coolant level” (� page 299) and see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (� page 427).

Brake fluid

Removing fuse box cover (� page 411).

ning the hood, see (� page 294).

!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” (� page 343).

Operation

e

ng

ot oa

od

Pull handle 2 to its stop out of radiator grille.

Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on the handle) and then release it.

The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts.

i

t e b

Warning! G

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.

294

Engin

Hood

Openi

The hothe lefdashbo

1 Ho

Warn

Do novehiclcould

compartment

d lock release lever is located to f the steering wheel under the rd.

lock release lever

� Pull lever 1 downwards.

The hood is unlocked and handle 2 will extend out of the radiator grille.

2 Handle for opening the hood

�

�ng! G

pull the release lever while the is in motion. Otherwise the hood e forced open by passing air flow.

!To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.

295

Operation

Engine compartment

Engine oil

The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when

� the vehicle is new

� the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period.

Warn

If youenginperatuoverhaway until tcall th

Warn

The enignitioit is d(ignititic so

� w

� w

� if tu

iDo not use any special lubricant addi-tives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Center.

Closing

� Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

The hood will lock audibly.

� Check to make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force.

ing! G

see flames or smoke coming from the e compartment, or if the coolant tem-re gauge indicates that the engine is

eated, do not open the hood. Move from vehicle and do not open the hood he engine has cooled. If necessary, e fire department.

ing! G

gine is equipped with a transistorized n system. Because of the high voltage

angerous to touch any components on coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-cket) of the ignition system

ith the engine running

hile starting the engine

ignition is “on” and the engine is rned manually

Warning! G

Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

296

Operation

Engine

Checkincontrol

When ch

� the vgrou

� with ture,statithe e

� with perabeenwith

To checmultifun

� Swit

The stanappear i

� Pressteemessdispl

If necessary, add engine oil.

or adding engine oil, see (� page 297).

ore information on engine oil can be und in the “Technical data” section page 427) and (� page 430).

ther display messages

the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 the starter switch, the following essage will appear:

witch ignition on toheck engine oil level

Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

iIf you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press the k or j button on the multifunction steering wheel.

compartment

g engine oil level with the system

ecking the oil level

ehicle must be parked on level nd

the engine at operating tempera- the vehicle must have been onary for at least five minutes with ngine turned off

the engine not at operating tem-ture yet, the vehicle must have stationary for at least 30 minutes the engine turned off

k the engine oil level via the ction display, do the following:

ch on the ignition (� page 33).

dard display (� page 123) should n the multifunction display.

s button k or j on the ring wheel until the following age is seen in the multifunction ay:

One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the indicator:

� Engine oil levelOK

� Add 1.0 qt engine oilfor max. oil level

(Canada: 1.0 l)

� Add 1.5 qts engine oilfor max. oil level

(Canada: 1.5 l)

� Add 2.0 qts engine oilfor max. oil level

(Canada: 2.0 l)

�

F

Mfo(�

O

Ifinm

Sc

�

297

Operation

Engine compartment

If you s

Observ

� If ewache

� If eturrep

If you s

EngineNot wh

� Tur

� If thturoil.

� If thatubef

Adding engine oil

!Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

ee the message:

e waiting time

ngine is at operating temperature, it five minutes before repeating ck procedure.

ngine is not at operating tempera-e yet, wait 30 minutes before eating check procedure.

ee the message:

oil levelen engine on

n off the engine.

e engine is at operating tempera-e, wait five minutes before checking

e engine is not at operating temper-re yet, you must wait 30 minutes ore checking oil.

If there is excess engine oil with the engine at operating temperature, the following message will appear:

Engine oil levelReduce oil level

� Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

More information on messages in the display concerning engine oil can be found in the “Practical hints” section (� page 361) and (� page 362).

!Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

298

Operation

Engine

C 230 Ko

1 Filler

� Unsc

� Add not t

Be carefAvoid enentering

e careful not to spill any oil when adding. void environmental damage caused by oil ntering the ground or water.

Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

ore information on engine oil can be und in the “Technical data” section page 427) and (� page 430).

ransmission fluid level

he transmission fluid level does not need be checked. If you notice transmission

uid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, ave an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center heck the transmission.

!Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

compartment

mpressor (all models)

cap

rew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

engine oil as required. Be careful o overfill with oil.

ul not to spill any oil when adding. vironmental damage caused by oil the ground or water.

� Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

C 240 (all models), C 320 (all models), C 55 AMG

1 Filler cap

� Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

� Add engine oil as required. Be careful not to overfill with oil.

BAe

�

Mfo(�

T

Ttoflhc

!Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

299

Operation

Engine compartment

Coolan

The enand anthe cooparkedmust b

The cothe pasment.

� Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-imately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.

� Continue turning the cap to the left and remove it.

The coolant level is correct if the level

� for cold coolant: reaches the black top part of the reservoir

� for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher

� Add coolant as required.

� Replace and tighten cap.

For more information on coolant, see “Coolants” (� page 434).

Warn

In ord

� Uhocoorca

� Dreabcocois

t level

gine coolant is a mixture of water ticorrosion/antifreeze. To check lant level, the vehicle must be on level ground and the engine e cool.

olant expansion tank is located on senger side of the engine compart-

1 Coolant expansion tank2 Cap

ing! G

er to avoid any possibly serious burns:

se extreme caution when opening the od if there are any signs of steam or olant leaking from the cooling system, if the coolant temperature gauge indi-tes that the coolant is overheated.

o not remove pressure cap on coolant servoir if coolant temperature is ove 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to ol down before removing cap. The olant reservoir contains hot fluid and

under pressure.

� Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scald-ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.

� Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

300

Operation

Engine

Battery

Your vehengine cside (� p

The battchargedservice lfor batte

If you usshort-disthe battfrequent

When rebatterie

If you dofor an exauthorizsteps yo

atteries contain materials that can harm e environment if disposed of improperly.

ecycling of batteries is the preferred ethod of disposal. Many states require

ellers of batteries to accept old batteries r recycling.

E Wear eye protection.

C Keep children away.

F Follow the instructions in this Operator's Manual.

compartment

icle’s battery is located in the ompartment on the right hand age 401).

ery should always be sufficiently in order to achieve its rated ife. Refer to Maintenance Booklet ry maintenance intervals.

e your vehicle mostly for tance trips, you will need to have

ery charge checked more ly.

placing the battery, always use s approved by Mercedes-Benz.

not intend to operate your vehicle tended period of time, consult an

ed Mercedes-Benz Center about u need to observe.

BthRmsfo

GObserve all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.

A Risk of explosion

D Keep flames or sparks awayfrom battery. Do not smoke.

B Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary.

301

Operation

Engine compartment

Windsheadla

The winin the e

1 Wa

Fluid fothe heafrom thhas a c

� 3.2hea

� 6.4hea

For more information, see “Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system*” (� page 436).

Warning! G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

hield washer system and mp cleaning system*

dshield washer reservoir is located ngine compartment.

sher fluid reservoir cap

r the windshield washer system and dlamp cleaning system* is supplied e windshield washer reservoir. It apacity of:

US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without dlamp cleaning system*

US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with dlamp cleaning system*

During all seasons, add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.

� Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below the freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

!Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

Operation

a

ar

mnt cs

portant guidelines

Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.

Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.

Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.

Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss and damage to the tire beads.

If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).

When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around).

i

cea

aldf te

em

ed

302

Tires

See anfor inforecomand wiadvicepurcha

Warn

Replation, moriginMercetion. Imoun

� Thco

� Than

nd wheels

uthorized Mercedes-Benz Center mation on tested and ended rims and tires for summer er operation. They can also offer oncerning tire service and e.

Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are used.

Im

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

ng! G

rims or tires with the same designa-nufacturer and type as shown on the part. See an authorized es-Benz Center for further informa-incorrectly sized rims and tires are d:

wheel brakes or suspension ponents can be damaged.

operating clearance of the wheels the tires may no longer be correct.

Warning! G

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident.

303

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire ca

Regulaat leastion on“Recom(� pag

Life of tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

� Driving style

� Tire inflation pressure

� Distance driven

Warn

Regulaged loss. Ayour v

Worn,tire trsustai

Warning! G

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread.

re and maintenance

rly check your tire inflation pressure t once a month. For more informa- checking tire inflation pressure see mended tire inflation pressure”

e 311).

Tire inspection

Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following:

� excessive treadwear (� page 304)

� cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber

� bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire

Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions.

Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.

ing! G

arly check the tires for damage. Dam-tires can cause tire inflation pressure s a result, you could lose control of ehicle.

old tires can cause accidents. If the ead is badly worn, or if the tires have ned damage, replace them.

304

Operation

Tires a

Tread d

Do not afar. Adhsharply 1/8 in (3

Treadwelaw. Theplaces obecomeimately the tire replaced

Recomm

� Sum

� Wint

toring tires

leaning tires

Warni

Althouglaws cotreadweapproxirecomm

!Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

!Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

nd wheels

epth

llow your tires to wear down too esion properties on wet roads are reduced at tread depths under

mm).

ar indicators (TWI) are required by se indicators are located in six n the tread circumference and visible at a tread depth of approx-1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point is considered worn and should be .

ended minimum tire tread depth:

mer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)

er tires 1/6 in (4 mm)

1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator)

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

S

C

ng! G

h the applicable federal motor safety nsider a tire to be worn when the ar indicators (TWI) become visible at

mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we end that you do not allow your tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

305

Operation

Tires and wheels

Direct

Unidiretages, mancemake sspecifi

An arrointendethe tire

� The Certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehi-cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle.

iSpathewitusehasobsrarytion

ion of rotation

ctional tires offer added advan-such as better hydroplaning perfor-. To benefit, however, you must ure the tires rotate in the direction

ed.

w on the sidewall indicates the d direction of rotation (spinning) of .

Loading the vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.

� The Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle.

re wheels may be mounted against direction of rotation (spinning) even h a unidirectional tire for temporary only until the regular drive wheel been repaired or replaced. Always erve and follow applicable tempo- use restrictions and speed limita-s indicated on the spare wheel.

306

Operation

Tires a

1 Drive

Followinwith theplacardsvehicle.

lacard (Example A)

Load limit information on the Tire and Loading Information placard

he placard showing the load limit informa-on is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and oading Information placard (Example A), cate the statement “The combined eight of occupants and cargo should ever exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” n this placard. The combined weight of all ccupants, cargo/luggage and trailer ngue load (if applicable) should never

xceed the weight referenced in that tatement.

nd wheels

r’s door B-pillar

g is a discussion on how to work information contained on the two with regards to loading your

Tire and Loading Information

Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B).

P

1

TtiIfLlownootoes

Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

iData shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Load limit data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustra-tions below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

307

Operation

Tires and wheels

Placar

1 LoaTire

The plation is If your Tire Inflocate Weightweightand tranever evehicle

Placard (Example A)

1 Seating capacity

Placard (Example B)

1 Seating capacity

d (Example B)

d limit information on the Vehicle Information placard

card showing the load limit informa-located on the driver’s door B-pillar. vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle ormation placard (Example B), the heading “Vehicle Capacity ” on this placard. The combined of all occupants, cargo/luggage iler tongue (if applicable) should xceed the weight listed next to capacity weight.

Seating capacity

The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 306).

iData shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Seating data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

308

Operation

Tires a

Steps fo

The folloas requir49, Cod575 purMotor V

Step 1 (Example

� Locaweigneveyour

Step 1 (Example

� LocaWeig

Step 2

� Detedriveridin

tep 6 (if applicable)

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (� page 310).

he following table shows examples on ow to calculate total and cargo load apacities with varying seating configura-ons and number and size of occupants. he following examples use a load limit f 1500 lbs. This is for illustration urposes only. Make sure you are using e actual load limit for your vehicle stated

n the vehicle’s placard (� page 306).

nd wheels

r determining correct load limit

wing steps have been developed ed of all manufacturers under Title

e of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part suant to the “National Traffic and ehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Vehicles equipped with placard A)

te the statement “The combined ht of occupants and cargo should r exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on vehicle’s placard.

Vehicles equipped with placard B)

te the heading “Vehicle Capacity ht” on your vehicle’s placard.

rmine the combined weight of the r and passengers that will be g in your vehicle.

Step 3

� Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

Step 4

� The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

Step 5

� Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

S

�

ThctiToptho

309

Operation

Tires and wheels

The higless caavailab

For moload” (

Examll

Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit or vehicle capacity weight from plac-ard minus combined weight of all occupants)

1 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs

2 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs

3 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

her the weight of all occupants, the rgo and luggage load capacity is le.

re information, see “Trailer tongue � page 310).

ple Combined weight limit of occu-pants and cargo from placard

Number of occupants (driver and passengers)

Seating configura-tion

Occupants weight Combined weight of aoccupants

1500 lbs 5 front: 2

rear: 3

Occupant 1: 150 lbsOccupant 2: 180 lbsOccupant 3: 160 lbsOccupant 4: 140 lbsOccupant 5: 120 lbs

750 lbs

1500 lbs 3 front: 1rear: 2

Occupant 1: 200 lbsOccupant 2: 190 lbsOccupant 3: 150 lbs

540 lbs

1500 lbs 1 front: 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs

310

Operation

Tires a

Certific

Even aftcombineand the (� pagesible loayour vehcle WeigAxle Wefront or GVWR abel. Theon the ddata” (�

railer tongue load

he tongue load of any trailer is an impor-nt weight to measure because it affects e load you can carry in your vehicle. If a ailer is towed, the tongue load must be dded to the weight of all occupants riding nd any cargo you are carrying in the ehicle. The tongue load typically is ten ercent of the trailer weight and every-ing loaded in it.

our Mercedes-Benz has been designed rimarily to carry passengers and their argo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-end trailer towing with your vehicle.

nd wheels

ation label

er careful determination of the d weight of all occupants, cargo trailer tongue load (if applicable) 310) as to not exceed the permis-d limit, you must make sure that icle never exceeds the Gross Vehi-ht Rating (GVWR) and the Gross ight Rating (GAWR) for either the rear axle. You can obtain the nd GAWR from the Certification la- Certification Label can be found river’s door B-pillar, see “Technical page 416).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load (� page 310) must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-tal allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

To assure that your vehicle does not ex-ceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale.

T

Ttathtraavpth

Ypcm

311

Operation

Tires and wheels

Recom In addition to the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (� page 312).

Warn

Followpress

Do nowear adverand aheate

Do nocan acomfodistan(blowobecomdebris

iData shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Tire data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

mended tire inflation pressure Your vehicle is equipped with either the Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 306).

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be ad-justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort.

ing! G

recommended tire inflation ures.

t underinflate tires. Underinflated tires excessively and/or unevenly, sely affect handling and fuel economy, re more likely to fail from being over-d.

t overinflate tires. Overinflated tires dversely affect handling and ride rt, wear unevenly, increase stopping ce, and result in sudden deflation ut) because they are more likely to e punctured or damaged by road , potholes etc.

312

Operation

Tires a

Placard

1 Tire with pres

Placard ed cold mum loainflationinstalled

portant notes on tire inflation ressure

ire temperature and tire inflation pressure re also increased while driving, depending n the driving speed and the tire load.

you will be driving your vehicle at high peeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, here it is legal and conditions allow, onsult the placard on the inside of the fuel ller flap on how to adjust the cold tire flation pressure. If you do not adjust the re inflation pressure, excessive heat can uild up and result in sudden tire failure.

Warning! G

If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops:

� Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.

� Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.

nd wheels

(Example A)

and Loading Information placard recommended cold tire inflation sures

(Example A) lists the recommend-tire inflation pressures for maxi-ded vehicle weight. The tire pressures listed apply to the tires as original equipment.

Placard (Example B)

1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures

Placard (Example B) lists the recommend-ed cold tire inflation pressures for maxi-mum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment.

Imp

Tao

Ifswcfiintib

iPlacard (Example B) may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads.

313

Operation

Tires and wheels

Be surepressushouldadjusti

Some vinflatioloads lvehicleprovidelocated

Tire infmatelyair temwhen cwhere the ou

Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure:

� Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.

� Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.

� Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recom-mended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar (� page 312). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure. ��

to readjust the tire inflation re for normal driving speeds. You wait until the tires are cold before ng the tire inflation pressure.

ehicles may have supplemental tire n pressure information for vehicle ess than the maximum loaded condition. If such information is d, it can be found on the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

lation pressure changes by approxi- 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of perature change. Keep this in mind hecking tire inflation pressure the temperature is different from tside temperature.

Checking tire inflation pressure

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.

314

Operation

Tires a

� Insta

� Repe

otential problems associated with nderinflated and overinflated tires

nderinflated tire inflation pressure

nderinflated tires can:

cause excessive and uneven tire wear

adversely affect fuel economy

lead to tire failure from being overheated

adversely affect handling characteristics

iIf youtire imetaa penpres

Warning! G

Follow recommended tire inflation pres-sures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

��

nd wheels

ll the valve cap.

at this procedure for each tire.

Pu

U

U

�

�

�

�

have overfilled the tire, release nflation pressure by pushing the l stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of . Then recheck the tire inflation

sure with the tire gauge.

Warning! G

Follow recommended tire inflation pres-sures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-cause they are more likely to become punc-tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

315

Operation

Tires and wheels

Overin

Overin

� advcha

� cau

� be haz

� adv

� inc

1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards (� page 322)

2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (� page 320)

3 Maximum tire load (� page 321)4 Maximum tire inflation pressure

(� page 322)5 Manufacturer6 Tire ply material (� page 324)7 Tire size designation, load and speed

rating (� page 316)8 Load identification (� page 319)9 Tire name

Warn

Followpress

Do nocan acomfodistan(blowobecomdebris

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

For more information, see “Rims and Tires” (� page 420).

flated tire inflation pressure

flated tires can:

ersely affect handling racteristics

se uneven tire wear

more prone to damage from road ards

ersely affect ride comfort

rease stopping distance

Tire labeling

Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.

Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires:

ing! G

recommended tire inflation ures.

t overinflate tires. Overinflated tires dversely affect handling and ride rt, wear unevenly, increase stopping ce, and result in sudden deflation ut) because they are more likely to e punctured or damaged by road , potholes etc.

316

Operation

Tires a

Tire sizerating

1 Tire 2 Aspe3 Radi4 Rim 5 Tire 6 Tire

ire width

he tire width 1 (� page 316) indicates e nominal tire width in mm.

spect ratio

he aspect ratio 2 (� page 316) is the imensional relationship between tire ection height and section width and is xpressed in percentage. The aspect ratio arrived at by dividing section height by ection width.

ire code

he tire code 3 (� page 316) indicates e tire construction type. The “R” stands r radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-

nal or bias ply construction; letter “B” eans belted-bias ply construction.

t the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire ith a speed capability above 149 mph 40 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size

esignation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). or additional information, see “Tire speed ting” (� page 318).

iFor idataand millust

nd wheels

designation, load and speed

width ct ratio in %al tire codediameterload ratingspeed rating

General:

Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.

No letter preceding the size designation (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards.

Letter “P” preceding the size designation: Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “T” preceding the size designation: Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

T

Tth

A

Tdseiss

T

Tthfoom

Aw(2dFra

llustration purposes only. Actual on tires is specific to each vehicle

ay vary from data shown in above ration.

317

Operation

Tires and wheels

Rim di

The rimdiametdiametindicat

Tire lo

The tirnumermaxim

For exasponds(615 kSee als(� pagsociatekilogra

For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification” (� page 319).

iTire load rating 5 (� page 316) and tire speed rating 6 (� page 316) are also referred to as “service descrip-tion”.

ameter

diameter 4 (� page 316) is the er of the bead seat, not the er of the rim edge. Rim diameter is ed in inches (in).

ad rating

e load rating 5 (� page 316) is a ical code associated with the um load a tire can support.

mple, a load rating of 91 corre- to a maximum load of 1356 lbs

g) the tire is designed to support. o “Maximum tire load”

e 321) where the maximum load as-d with the load index is indicated in ms and lbs.

Warning G

The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (� page 325) of your vehi-cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or seri-ous personal injury to you or others.

Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.

Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

318

Operation

Tires a

Tire spe

The tire indicatefor the t

is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (� page 316) and the tire speed rating 6 (� page 316).

If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (� page 316) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability.

If a service description 5 and 6 (� page 316) is given, the speed capa-bility is limited by the speed symbol in the service description. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capabil-ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).

Warni

Even wa vehicmaximu

Exceedtires arfailure, possiblpersonaand for

iTire tire salso tion”

nd wheels

ed rating

speed rating 6 (� page 316) s the approved maximum speed ire.

Summer tires

� At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to. The service description

ng! G

hen permitted by law, never operate le at speeds greater than the m speed rating of the tires.

ing the maximum speed for which e rated can lead to sudden tire causing loss of vehicle control and y resulting in an accident and/or l injury and possible death, for you

others.

load rating 5 (� page 316) and peed rating 6 (� page 316) are referred to as “service descrip-.

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)

319

Operation

Tires and wheels

� Any186“ZRserpar(99thecap186maper

All-sea

In addition to tire load rating, special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 1 (� page 319).

No specification given: absence of any text (like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire.

XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load (or reinforced) tire.

Light Load: designates a light load tire.

C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure.

Index

Q M+

T M+

H M+

V M+

iThedesand

tire with a speed capability above mph (300 km/h) must include a ” in the size designation AND the vice description must be placed in enthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-sis designates the maximum speed ability of the tire as being above mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire

nufacturer for the actual maximum missible speed of the tire.

son and winter tires

Load identification

1 Load identification

Speed rating

S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

S up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

marking “M+S” next to the service cription designates tires with mud snow capabilities.

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

320

Operation

Tires a

DOT, Tir

U.S. tiremanufacTIN intoproduce

The TIN tates effpurchassafety mpurchassuch tire

The TIN identificcode” an

OT (Department of Transportation)

tire branding symbol 1 (� page 320) hich denotes the tire meets require-ents of the U.S. Department of Transpor-tion.

anufacturer’s identification mark

he manufacturer’s identification mark 2 page 320) denotes the tire

anufacturer.

ew tires have a mark with two symbols.

etreaded tires have a mark with four sym-ols. For more information on retreaded res, see (� page 302).

ire size

he code 3 (� page 320) indicates the re size.

nd wheels

e Identification Number (TIN)

regulations require each new tire turer or tire retreader to mold a

or onto a sidewall of each tire d.

is a unique identifier which facili-orts by tire manufactures to notify ers in recall situations or other atters concerning tires and gives ers the means to easily identify s.

is comprised of “Manufacturer’s ation mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type d “Date of manufacture”.

1 DOT 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark3 Tire size4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire

manufacturer)5 Date of manufacture

D

Awmta

M

T(�m

N

Rbti

T

Tti

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

321

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire ty

The cooptiondescripcharac

Date o

The daidentifiture.

The firsstartinweek ofigures

For exaweek o

For more information on tire load rating (� page 317).

For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (� page 308).

Warning! G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

pe code

de 4 (� page 320) may, at the of the manufacturer, be used as a tive code for identifying significant teristics of the tire.

f manufacture

te of manufacture 5 (� page 320) es the week and year of manufac-

t two figures identify the week, g with “01” to represent the first full f the calendar year. The second two represent the year.

mple, “3202” represents the 32nd f 2002.

Maximum tire load

1 Maximum tire load rating

The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support.

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

322

Operation

Tires a

Maximu

1 Maxipres

This is thinflation

niform Tire Quality Grading Standards .S. vehicles)

ire manufacturers are required to grade res based on three performance ctors: treadwear, traction and mperature resistance.

TreadwearTractionTemperature resistance

iFor idataand millust

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

nd wheels

m tire inflation pressure

mum permissible tire inflation sure

e maximum permissible tire pressure for the tire.

Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (� page 311) for proper tire inflation.

U(U

Ttifate

123

llustration purposes only. Actual on tires is specific to each vehicle

ay vary from data shown in above ration.

Warning! G

Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride com-fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-tance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road de-bris, potholes etc.

323

Operation

Tires and wheels

Qualitycable, shouldexamp

All pasfederathese g

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to low-est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

Tread

200

Warning! G

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

grades can be found, where appli-on the tire sidewall between tread er and maximum section width. For le:

senger car tires must conform to l safety requirements in addition to rades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

wear Traction Temperature

AA A

324

Operation

Tires a

Temper

The temest), B, atance toability tocontrollelaboratoperatureto degencessive tire failulevel of car tirestor VehiGrades Bperformthan the

ire ply material

Plies in sidewallPlies under tread

his marking tells you about the type of ord and number of plies in the sidewall nd under the tread.

iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

nd wheels

ature

perature grades are A (the high-nd C, representing the tire’s resis- the generation of heat and its dissipate heat when tested under d conditions on a specified indoor ry test wheel. Sustained high tem- can cause the material of the tire erate and reduce tire life, and ex-

temperature can lead to sudden re. The grade C corresponds to a performance which all passenger must meet under the Federal Mo-cle Safety Standard No. 109. and A represent higher levels of

ance on the laboratory test wheel minimum required by law.

T

12

Tca

Warning! G

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

325

Operation

Tires and wheels

Tire an

Acces

The costandaautompower seats, these ifactoryinstalle

Air pre

The amoutwarAir presquarebar.

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the Certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

d loading terminology

sory weight

mbined weight (in excess of those rd items which may be replaced) of atic transmission, power steering, brakes, power windows, power radio, and heater, to the extent that tems are available as -installed equipment (whether d or not).

ssure

ount of air inside the tire pressing d on each square inch of the tire. ssure is expressed in pounds per inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or

Aspect ratio

Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage.

Bar

Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascal (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).

326

Operation

Tires a

GVW (G

The GVWvehicle iinstalledcargo anload. ThGWVR inlocated

GVWR (

This is thweight othe vehigers, fuetrailer toCertificadoor B-p

ormal occupant weight

he number of occupants the vehicle is esigned to seat, multiplied by 8 kilograms (150 lbs).

ccupant distribution

he distribution of occupants in a vehicle t their designated seating positions.

roduction options weight

he combined weight of those installed gular production options weighing over lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those

tandard items which they replace, not reviously considered in curb weight or ccessory weight, including heavy duty rakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty attery, and special trim.

nd wheels

ross Vehicle Weight)

comprises the weight of the ncluding fuel, tools, spare wheel, accessories, passengers and d, if applicable, trailer tongue

e GWV must never exceed the dicated on the Certification label

on the driver's door B-pillar.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

e maximum permissible vehicle f the fully loaded vehicle (weight of cle including all options, passen-l, and cargo and, if applicable, ngue load). It is indicated on tion label located on the driver’s illar.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascal (kPa) to one bar.

Maximum load rating

The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight.

Maximum tire inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions.

N

Td6

O

Ta

P

Tre5spabb

327

Operation

Tires and wheels

PSI (Po

A stand-> bar,

Recom

Recomlisted oB-pillarProvideriding c

Rim

A metaassemseated

Sidew

The pothe bea

Tire speed rating

Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved.

Traction

Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/6 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

unds per square inch)

ard unit of measure for air pressure kilopascal (kPa).

mended tire inflation pressure

mended tire inflation pressure n placard located on driver's door for normal driving conditions. s best handling, tread life and omfort.

l support for a tire or a tire and tube bly upon which the tire beads are .

all

rtion of a tire between the tread and d.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.

Tire load rating

Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

Tire ply composition and material used

This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

328

Operation

Tires a

Uniform

A tire inconsumtemperadetermingovernmratings atire.

Vehicle

Rated ca68 kilogdesignat

Vehicle

Load ondeterminshare ofweight a

applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-tion, tires can be rotated according to e tire manufacturer’s recommended in-rvals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty

amphlet located in your vehicle literature ortfolio. If none is available, tires should e rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-

ary, according to the degree of tire wear. he same rotation (spinning) direction ust be maintained (� page 305).

otate tires before the characteristic tire ear pattern becomes visible (shoulder ear on front tires and tread center wear n rear tires).

horoughly clean the mounting face of heels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side f the wheels/tires, during each rotation. heck for and ensure proper tire inflation ressure.

nd wheels

Tire Quality Grading Standards

formation system that provides ers with ratings for a tire’s traction, ture and treadwear. Ratings are ed by tire manufacturers using ent testing procedures. The re molded into the sidewall of the

capacity weight

rgo and luggage load plus rams (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s ed seating capacity.

maximum load on the tire

an individual tire that is ed by distributing to each axle its

the maximum loaded vehicle nd dividing it by two.

Rotating tires

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (� page 305).

In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

Ifrathteppb(5sTm

Rwwo

TwoCp

Warning! G

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension.

If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

329

Operation

Tires and wheels

For inf“Practi(� pag

Warn

Have changloose 80 lb-

Only ubolts

ormation on wheel change, see the cal hints” section (� page 370) and e 394).

ing! G

the tightening torque checked after ing a wheel. Wheels could become if not tightened with a torque of ft (110 Nm).

se genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel specified for your vehicle's rims.

Operation

r

t w

des

cc

itean tve bpa

teh een

nimi

te

lways observe the speed rating of the inter tires installed on your vehicle. If the aximum speed for which your tires are ted is below the speed rating of your

ehicle, you must place a notice to this ffect where it will be seen by the driver. uch notices are available from your tire ealer or from any authorized ercedes-Benz Center.

Warning! G

If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

330

Winte

BeforevehicleMerceinclude

� Checon

� Addwacle“S”solfor(�

� BatwitA wsureve

� Tirememin1/6win

driving

he onset of winter, have your interized at an authorized s-Benz Center. This service :

k of anticorrosion and antifreeze entration.

tion of cleaning concentrate to the r of the windshield and headlamp ing system. Add MB Concentrate

o a premixed windshield washer nt/antifreeze which is formulated elow freezing temperatures ge 436).

ry test. Battery capacity drops decreasing ambient temperature. ll charged battery helps to make that the engine can be started, at low ambient temperatures.

change. Mercedes-Benz recom-ds M+S rated radial-ply tires with a

um tread depth of approximately n (4 mm) on all four wheels for the r season.

Winter tires

Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP and 4MATIC in winter operation.

For safe handling, make sure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design.

AwmraveSdM

Warning! G

Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

331

Operation

Winter driving

Block

The enheater

The eleauthor

� Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

� Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.

!Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive use snow chains on rear tires only.

Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes:

� 245/40 R17 91W

� 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL

� 245/35 ZR18 92Y XL

� T 125/90 R16 98M

� T 125/80 R17 99M

� 145/70- 17 92P

heater (Canada only)

gine is equipped with a block .

ctrical cable may be installed at an ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.

Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:

� Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations.

� Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-turer’s mounting instructions.

iWhen driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP (� page 79) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.

Operation

te

onh

deinfoo

tai

at d

de

io i

he type of maintenance service due is dicated in the multifunction display:

Basic service (A)

Extended service (B)

iVehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service System) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between services.

332

Main

We stryour veMercethe Macalled indicat

Failureaccordand madesignvehicleMerce

The manotify yservice

nance

gly recommend that you have icle serviced by an authorized s-Benz Center, in accordance with tenance Booklet at the times r by the maintenance service r display.

o have the vehicle maintained in nce with the Maintenance Booklet ntenance service indicator at the ed times/mileage will result in amage not covered by the s-Benz Limited Warranty.

ntenance service indicator will u when your next maintenance s due.

Starting approximately one month before your next maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):

Service A in XX DaysService A in XX Miles (Km)A Service due now

Tin

9

´

333

Operation

Maintenance

Clearinindica

The maautom

� aftetheten

� aftema

You ca

1 Res

� Preins

Calling up the maintenance service indicator

� Switch on the ignition (� page 33).

The standard display of the control system appears (� page 123).

� Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator with the service symbol 9 or ´ and the service deadline appears in the multifunction display.

iIf the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator.

Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator :.

g the maintenance service tor

intenance service indicator is atically cleared

r ten seconds when you switch on ignition or when reaching the main-ance service threshold while driving

r 30 seconds, once the suggested intenance service term has passed

n also clear it yourself.

et button

ss reset button 1 on the trument cluster.

Maintenance service term exceeded

If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:

Service A exceeded by XX DaysService A exceeded by XX Miles (Km)

In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service.

334

Operation

Mainte

Resettinindicato

In the evon your authorizhave thereset. Thcarryingfind the maintenmaintenvehicle. either yoCenter o

nance

g the maintenance service r

ent that the maintenance service vehicle is not carried out by an ed Mercedes-Benz Center, you can maintenance service indicator e automotive maintenance facility out the maintenance service will information for resetting the ance service indicator in the ance-relevant information for your Such information is available from ur authorized Mercedes-Benz r directly from Mercedes-Benz.

iIf the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.

Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

335

Operation

Vehicle care

�Cl

Whveinfattbo

More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions:

� near the ocean

� in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)

� during winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-aged areas need to be re-undercoated.

Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.

W

MSAud

Nd

Vehiceaning

ile in ohicle is luencesack thedy and

arning

any cleome arelways folar contoors or

ever usesigned

le care and care of the vehicle

peration, even while parked, your subjected to varying external which, if gone unchecked, can paintwork as well as the under-cause lasting damage.

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:

� Air pollution

� Road salt

� Tar

� Gravel and stone chipping

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

� Grease and oil

� Fuel

� Coolant

� Brake fluid

� Bird droppings

� Insects

� Tree resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.

! G

aning products can be hazardous. poisonous, others are flammable. llow the instructions on the partic-

ainer. Always open your vehicle’s windows when cleaning the inside.

e fluids or solvents that are not for cleaning your vehicle.

336

Operation

Vehicl

We havecompilespeciallywhich alYou cancar-careMercede

Scratchedamagecannot athe car-cIn such authoriz

The folloand care“how-toto Merceproduct

ar stains

uickly remove tar stains before they dry nd become more difficult to remove. A tar mover is recommended.

aintwork, painted body components

ercedes-Benz approved Paint Care hould be applied when water drops on the aint surface do not “bead up”, normally very three to five months, depending on limate and washing detergent used.

ercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner hould be applied if the paint surface hows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of loss).

o not apply any of these products or wax your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the ood is still hot.

se the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick r quick and provisional repairs of minor

aint damage (i.e. chips from stones, ehicle doors, etc.).

e care

selected car-care products and d recommendations which are matched to our vehicles and ways reflect the latest technology. obtain Mercedes-Benz approved products at an authorized s-Benz Center.

s, corrosive deposits, corrosion or due to negligent or incorrect care lways be removed or repaired with are products recommended here.

cases it is best to seek aid at an ed Mercedes-Benz Center.

wing topics deal with the cleaning of your vehicle and give important

” information as well as references des-Benz approved car-care

s.

Power washer

When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle, always observe the manu-facturer’s operating instructions.

T

Qare

P

Mspec

Mssg

Difh

Ufopv

!Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connec-tors, seals, or other rubber parts.

337

Operation

Vehicle care

Engine

Prior tomake snents awater a

Corrosrosion enginecleaninlinkagelubricashould

Ornamental moldings

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.

To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

cleaning

cleaning the engine compartment, ure to protect electrical compo-nd connectors from the intrusion of nd cleaning agents.

ion protection, such as MB Anticor-Wax, should be applied to the compartment after every engine g. Before applying, all control bushings and joints should be ted. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys be protected from any wax.

Vehicle washing

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-fused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible.

When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

338

Operation

Vehicl

Wiper b

� Fold

� Cleaclean

ight alloy wheels

ercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care hould be used for regular cleaning of the ght alloy wheels.

possible, clean wheels once a week with ercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,

sing a soft bristle brush and a strong pray of water.

ollow the instructions on container.

strument cluster

se a gentle dishwashing detergent or ild detergent for delicate fabrics as a ashing solution. Wipe with a cloth moist-ned in lukewarm solution. Do not use couring agents.

Warni

For saferemovebefore wise, thon and

!Fold ontoSma

Holdwipeof thsprin

iOnly use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.

e care

lades

wiper arms forward.

n the wiper blade inserts with a cloth and detergent solution.

Window cleaning

� Fold wiper arms forward.

� Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces.

An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

L

Msli

IfMus

F

In

Umwes

ng! G

ty reasons, switch off wipers and SmartKey from starter switch cleaning the wiper blades. Other-e wiper motor could suddenly turn cause injury.

the windshield wiper arms back the windshield before turning the rtKey in the starter switch.

on to the wiper when folding the r arm back. If released, the force e impact from the tensioning g could crack the windshield.

Warning! G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the windshield. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

!Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

339

Operation

Vehicle care

Steeri

Wipe wor cleaLeathe

Cup ho

Use a gmild dewashinened inscourin

Hard p

Pour MCare owith lig

Upholstery

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently dis-colored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.

Leather upholstery

Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet.

ng wheel and gear selector lever

ith a damp cloth and dry thoroughly n with Mercedes-Benz approved r Care.

lders

entle dishwashing detergent or tergent for delicate fabrics as a g solution. Wipe with a cloth moist- lukewarm solution. Do not use g agents.

lastic trim items

ercedes-Benz approved Interior nto soft lint-free cloth and apply ht pressure.

Headliner and rear window shelf

Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts

The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Warning! G

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

340

Operation

Vehicl

Cloth up

Clean wdry-shamdirt.

MB Tex

Pour MeCare onwith ligh

Plastic

Do not u

Wood tr

Dampencloth to Do not uwheel clthese m

e care

holstery

ith soft bristle brush, or use a poo cleaner in case of excessive

upholstery

rcedes-Benz approved Interior to soft lint-free cloth and apply t pressure.

and rubber parts

se oil or wax on these parts.

ims

cloth using water and use damp clean wood trims in your vehicle. se solvents like tar remover or eaner nor polishes or waxes as ay be abrasive.

341

Practical hints

What to do if …

Where will I find ...?

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Opening/closing in an emergency

Replacing SmartKey batteries

Replacing bulbs

Replacing wiper blades

Flat tire

Battery

Jump starting

Towing the vehicle

Fuses

Practical hints

t

ulb self-check when switching on the nition, have the respective bulb checked nd replaced if necessary.

m uggested solution

Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

Read and observe messages in the display (� page 349).

Have the system checked at an autho-rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ailure to follow these instructions ncreases the risk of an accident.

Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed, e.g. seat heating*.

If necessary, have the generator (alternator) and battery checked.

hen the voltage is above this value gain, the ABS is operational again.

342

What

Lamps

Proble

-

o do if …

in instrument cluster General information:If any of the following lamps in the instru-ment cluster fails to come on during the

biga

Possible cause S

The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS and the ESP are also switched off (see messages in display).

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the navigation system* or the automatic transmission* may also be malfunctioning.

�

�

�

Fi

The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ABS has switched off.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

�

�

Wa

343

Practical hints

What to do if …

Proble Suggested solution

;

3

� Release the parking brake (� page 48).

� Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Warn

Drivinnatedbrakebrakebrakesystemcan reenginfire. Y

m Possible cause

(USA only)

(Canada only)

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

ing! G

g with the brake warning lamp illumi- can result in an accident. Have your system checked immediately if the warning lamp stays on. Don’t add fluid before checking the brake

. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir sult in spilling brake fluid on hot

e parts and the brake fluid catching ou can be seriously burned.

!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

344

Practical hints

What t

Problem uggested solution

ú

±

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys-tem. It allows the accurate identifica-tion of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal.

o do if …

Possible cause S

(USA only)

(Canada only)

The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in:

� The fuel management system

� The ignition system

� The emission control system

� Systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home (emergency operation) mode.

�

345

Practical hints

What to do if …

Proble Suggested solution

ú

±

� Check the fuel cap (� page 291).

If it is not closed properly:

� Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

� Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� After refuelling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession.

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

m Possible cause

(USA only)

(Canada only)

The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.

Your fuel tank is empty.

346

Practical hints

What t

Problem uggested solution

v Switch the ESP back on (� page 79).

f the ESP cannot be switched back on, ave the system checked at an autho-ized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as ossible.

When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Do not deactivate the ESP. Exceptions: (� page 79).

ailure to follow these instructions ncreases the risk of an accident.

o do if …

Possible cause S

The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving.

The ESP is deactivated.

Risk of accident!

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions.

�

Ihrp

The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving.

The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.

�

�

�

�

Fi

347

Practical hints

What to do if …

Proble Suggested solution

The yefuel ga

e � Refuel at the next gas station (� page 291).

< - � Fasten your seat belt.

The telltale goes out.

1

-t.

� Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warn

In theindicanot bestrongrized Mhave tSRS man accfatal iand uaccide

m Possible cause

llow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in the uge comes on while driving.

The fuel level has gone below the reservmark.

The red seat belt telltale illuminates for a brief period after starting the engine.

The telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts.

The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency ten-sioning device (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an acciden

ing! G

event a malfunction of the SRS is ted as outlined above, the SRS may operational. For your safety, we ly recommend that you visit an autho-ercedes-Benz Center immediately to

he system checked; otherwise the ay not be activated when needed in ident, which could result in serious or

njury, or it might deploy unexpectedly nnecessarily which could result in an nt and/or injury to you or to others.

348

Practical hints

What t

Lamp in

Problem ested solution

56

1 BabySm

ave the system checked as soon as ossible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz enter.

ake sure there is nothing between seat ushion and child seat and check stallation of the child seat.

the front passenger front air bag off dicator lamp remains out, have the

ystem checked as soon as possible by an uthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

o not use the BabySmartTM restraint to ansport children on the front passenger eat until the system has been repaired.

o do if …

center console

Possible cause Sugg

The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp comes on.

A BabySmartTM1 child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front air bag is switched off.

artTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the front passenger seat.

� HpC

The front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp does not come on with a BabySmartTM child seat properly installed on the front passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning. � Mcin

� Ifinsa

Dtrs

349

Practical hints

What to do if …

Vehiclmultif

Warninappearin the i

Certaines are

Addresfollow this Op

Selectimemor(� pagunclea

High-pmultifu

Warning! G

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

Warning! G

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

e status messages in the unction display

g and malfunction messages in the multifunction display located nstrument cluster.

warning and malfunction messag-accompanied by an audible signal.

s these messages accordingly and the additional instructions given in erator’s Manual.

ng the vehicle status message y menu in the control system e 132) displays both cleared and red messages.

riority messages appear in the nction display in red color.

Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (� page 119) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steering wheel.

Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button (� page 119) or button j, k, ÿ, or è on the steering wheel. They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (� page 132). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message dis-appear. Clearing a message will not cor-rect the condition that caused the message to appear.

350

Practical hints

What t

On the pcompilaand malappear i

For yourdivided

� Text

� Sym

iSwitinstrbeambeamturn activdispllampworkjourn

o do if …

ages that follow, you will find a tion of the most important warning function messages that may n the multifunction display.

convenience the messages are into two sections:

messages (� page 351)

bol messages (� page 355)

ching on the ignition causes all ument cluster lamps (except low headlamp indicator lamp, high headlamp indicator lamp, and

signal indicator lamps unless ated) as well as the multifunction ay to come on. Make sure the s and multifunction display are in ing order before starting your ey.

351

Practical hints

What to do if …

Text m

Displa Possible solution

ABS � Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

� Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

� Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

� Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

essages

y message Possible cause

malfunction.Visit workshop.

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.

352

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

BAS Continue driving with added caution.

If necessary, have the generator and battery checked.

hen the voltage is above this value gain, the BAS is operational again.

Continue driving with added caution.

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ailure to follow these instructions creases the risk of an accident.

Continue driving with added caution.

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ailure to follow these instructions creases the risk of an accident.

o do if …

message Possible cause P

unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The BAS has switched off.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available.

�

�

Wa

malfunction.Visit workshop.

The BAS has detected a malfunction and switched off.

�

�

Fin

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.

�

�

Fin

353

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

ESP � Continue driving with added caution.

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the electronic traction system switches on again.

The display will clear after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

� Continue driving with added caution.

� If necessary, have the generator and battery checked.

When the voltage is above this value again, the ESP is operational again.

y message Possible cause

unavailableSee Operator’s Manual

The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply.

The ABS might not be operational.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available.

If the yellow ESP warning lamp v flashes while driving and this message appears, the electronic traction system has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.

The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available.

The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ESP has switched off.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

354

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

ESP Continue driving with added caution.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ailure to follow these instructions creases the risk of an accident.

Continue driving with added caution.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

ailure to follow these instructions creases the risk of an accident.

SRS Drive with added caution to the near-est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warni

In the ecated aoperatirecomm

o do if …

message Possible cause P

malfunction.Visit workshop.

The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available.

�

�

Fin

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.

�

�

Fin

Restraint system malfunctionDrive to workshop

The system is malfunctioning. �

ng! G

vent a malfunction of the SRS is indi-s outlined above, the SRS may not be onal. For your safety, we strongly end that you visit an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

355

Practical hints

What to do if …

Symbo

Displa Possible solution

# � Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:

� Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If it is intact:

� Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

� Start the engine (� page 46).

� Turn off unnecessary electrical consumers.

l messages

y symbol Display message Possible cause

Battery AlternatorVisit workshop.

The battery is no longer charging.Possible causes:

� broken poly-V-belt

� alternator malfunctioning

Low voltageCharge battery

The battery has insufficient voltage.

Low voltageSwitch off consumers

The battery has insufficient voltage.

356

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

; (

! (

Release the parking brake (� page 48).

2 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.

; (

3 (

Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Warni

Drivingresult insystembrake fsystemcan resengine fire. Yo

!Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance booklet.

o do if …

symbol Display message Possible cause P

USA only)

Canada only)

Parking brakeRelease brake.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

�

Brake wearVisit workshop.

The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

�

USA only)

Canada only)

Brake fluidVisit workshop.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

�

ng! G

with this message displayed can an accident. Have your brake

checked immediately. Do not add luid before checking the brake . Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir ult in spilling brake fluid on hot parts and the brake fluid catching u can be seriously burned.

!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

357

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

B � Add coolant (� page 299).

� If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warn

Do noAntifrmay bengin

y symbol Display message Possible cause

CoolantCheck level

The coolant level is too low.

ing! G

t spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. eeze contains ethylene glycol which urn if it comes into contact with hot e parts. You can be seriously burned.

!Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.

358

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

• Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.

Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Warni

Drivingheated have leacatch fi

Steam fseriousthe hoosee or h

Turn ofand do engine

!The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

o do if …

During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

symbol Display message Possible cause P

CoolantStop, engine off!

The coolant is too hot. �

�

ng! G

when your engine is badly over-can cause some fluids which may ked into the engine compartment to

re. You could be seriously burned.

rom an overheated engine can cause burns and can occur just by opening d. Stay away from the engine if you ear steam coming from it.

f the engine, get out of the vehicle not stand near the vehicle until the has cooled down.

359

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa ible solution

• top immediately and check the oly-V-belt.

broken:

o not continue to drive. Otherwise the ngine will overheat due to an inoperative ater pump which may result in damage to e engine. Notify an authorized ercedes-Benz Center.

intact:

o not continue to drive the vehicle with is message displayed. Doing so could sult in serious engine damage that is not

overed by the Mercedes-Benz Limited arranty.

bserve the coolant temperature gauge in e instrument cluster (� page 24).

rive immediately to the nearest authorized ercedes-Benz Center.

bserve the coolant temperature gauge in e instrument cluster (� page 24).

ave the fan replaced as soon as possible.

y symbol Display message Possible cause Poss

CoolantStop, engine off!

The poly-V-belt could be broken. � Sp

If it is

� DewthM

If it is

� DthrecW

� Oth

� DM

CoolantVisit workshop.

The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.

� Oth

� H

360

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

Ñ Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G Continue driving with added caution.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

± Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

J Close the doors.

o do if …

symbol Display message Possible cause P

Cruise contr.Drive to workshop

Cruise control is malfunctioning. �

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.

�

�

The displays for several systems have malfunctioned. Some systems them-selves may also have malfunctioned.

�

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed:

� Coolant temperature display

� Tachometer

� Cruise control display

�

Doors open You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open.

�

361

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Suggested solution

: � Add engine oil (� page 297) and check the engine oil level (� page 296).

� Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible.

� Turn off the engine.

� Add engine oil (� page 297) and check the engine oil level (� page 296).

� Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal.

� Have the engine oil checked.

y symbol Display messages Possible cause

USA only:At next gas stationadd 1.0 qt engine oil

Canada only:At next gas stationadd 1.0 l engine oil

The engine oil level is too low.

Engine oil levelStop, engine off!

There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.

Engine oil levelReduce oil level

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.

Change engine oilVisit workshop.

It may be that there is water in the engine oil.

362

Practical hints

What t

When thadd 1.0appearsoperatinhas dropmum lev

Display uggested solution

: Check the engine oil level (� page 296) and add oil as required (� page 297).

If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks.

Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

o do if …

e message At next gas station qt engine oil (Canada: 1.0 l)

while the engine is running and at g temperature, the engine oil level ped to approximately the mini-el.

When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further.

Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet.

symbol Display messages Possible cause S

Engine oil levelVisit workshop.

The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

�

�

Oil sensor malfunctionVisit workshop.

The measuring system is malfunctioning. �

363

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

4 � Check the fuel cap (� page 291).

If it is not closed properly:

� Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

� Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Y � Close the hood (� page 294).

I � Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� Change the SmartKey.

y symbol Display message Possible cause

Check gas cap.See Operator’s Manual

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.

Hood open You are driving with the hood open.

Remove key. You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

Replace keyDrive to workshop

No additional code available for SmartKey.

364

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

. Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

o do if …

symbol Display message Possible cause P

3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working.

�

Backup lamp, left The left backup lamp is malfunctioning. �

Backup lamp, right The right backup lamp is malfunctioning. �

Brake lampDrive to workshop

Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on.

�

Brake lamp left The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. �

Brake lamp right The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. �

Display malfunction.Visit workshop.

The display for the lamps or the system is malfunctioning.

�

Front foglamp left The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. �

Front foglamp right The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. �

Front leftside marker lamp

The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

�

Front right sider marker lamp

The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

�

365

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (� page 144).

� Switch on the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (� page 110).

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Halogen headlamp:

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Bi-Xenon* headlamp:

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

y symbol Display message Possible cause

High beam left The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

High beam right The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.

License plate lamp,left

The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

License plate lamp,right

The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Light sensorDrive to workshop

The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps switch on automatically.

Low beam left The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

366

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

. alogen headlamp:

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

i-Xenon* headlamp:

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

o do if …

symbol Display message Possible cause P

Low beam right The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

H

�

B

�

Parking lampleft front

The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

�

Parking lampright front

The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

�

Rear fog lampSubstitute bulb on

The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.A substitute bulb is being used.

�

Switch off lights. Headlamps have been turned on with the driver’s door opened and the SmartKey removed from the starter switch.

�

Taillamp leftSubstitute bulb on

The left tail lamp is malfunctioning.A substitute bulb is being used.

�

Taillamp rightSubstitute bulb on

The right tail lamp is malfunctioning.A substitute bulb is being used.

�

367

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

. � Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

� Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

� Replace the bulb as soon as possible.

y symbol Display message Possible cause

Turn signalleft front

The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn signalright front

The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn signalleft mirror

The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working.

Turn signalright mirror

The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working.

Turn signalleft rearSubstitute bulb on

The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.A substitute bulb is being used.

Turn signalright rearSubstitute bulb on

The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.A substitute bulb is being used.

368

Practical hints

What t

Display ossible solution

< Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

_ Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warni

If the letoo lowfail. Muto turn

Do not steering

Do not checkeCenter

o do if …

symbol Display message Possible cause P

Belt systemDrive to workshop

The seat belt system is malfunctioning. �

Steering oilVisit workshop.

The steering gear oil level is too low. There is a danger of steering gear damage.

�

ng! G

vel of steering gear oil in reservoir is , the steering power assistance could ch greater effort will then be needed the steering wheel.

add steering oil without checking the system.

drive the vehicle. Have the system d at an authorized Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible.

369

Practical hints

What to do if …

Displa Possible solution

K � Close the tilt/sliding sunroof (� page 243).

J � Close the tilt/sliding sunroof (� page 243).

L � Have the Tele Aid system* checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

t

Ê � Close the trunk lid.

W � Add washer fluid (� page 301).

y symbol Display message Possible cause

Close slid./pop-upsunroof

You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.

Close slid./pop-upsunroof

You have opened the driver’s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the tilt/sliding sunroof open.

Tele Aid malfunction.Drive to workshop

One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system* are malfunctioning.

Function unavailable. This display appears if button t or s on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone*.

Trunk open This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open.

Washer fluidplease refill

The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.

Practical hints

e

id

stt sr

tok

fa

emoving the vehicle tool kit (except 55 AMG)

Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk.

Retaining screwStorage well casing

Loosen retaining screw 1 by turning it counterclockwise.

Remove storage well casing 2.

cc

370

Wher

First a

The firthe leffastene

1 Firs2 Ho

� Un

� Rem

iChefor and

will I find ...?

kit

aid kit is located in the trunk on ide secured by a hook and loop .

aid kit and loop fastener

sten hook and loop fastener 2.

ove first aid kit 1.

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

The following is included:

� Towing eye bolt

� Wheel wrench

� Alignment bolt

� Vehicle jack

� Spare wheel bolts

� Spare fuses

� Valve extractor (C 55 AMG only)

� Protective wrap (C 55 AMG only)

� Collapsible wheel chock

� A pair of gloves

RC

�

12

�

�

k expiration dates and contents ompleteness at least once a year replace missing/expired items.

371

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

3 Arr4 Min5 Veh6 Veh

� Rem

Storin

� Plakit

� Plavehandas wh

Removing the vehicle tool kit (C 55 AMG only)

� Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk.

1 Collapsible tire2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)3 Retaining screw

� Loosen retaining screw 3 by turning it counterclockwise.

� Remove collapsible tire 1.

� Remove vehicle tool kit 2. ��

ow ispare wheelicle tool kit storage well casingicle tool kit

ove vehicle tool kit 6.

g the vehicle tool kit

ce vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool storage well casing 5.

ce storage well casing 2 over the icle tool kit storage well casing 5 turn retaining screw 1 clockwise

far it will go to secure the Minispare eel.

iArrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5 must point in the direc-tion of travel. Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing 2 on top and secure the Minispare wheel with retaining screw 1.

!To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid.

372

Practical hints

Where

1 Vehi2 Colla

whee3 Towi4 Align5 Whe6 Spar7 Elect

he vehicle jack is located in the storage ompartment underneath the trunk floor.

torage position

Remove vehicle jack from its compartment.

Push crank handle up.

��

will I find ...?

cle jackpsible wheel chock and spare l bolts

ng eye boltment boltel wrenche fuses and valve extractorric air pump

Vehicle jack Tc

S

�

�

Warning! G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

373

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

Operat

� Tureng

Beforecompa

� It s

� Thepos

� Tilt both plates upward 1.

� Fold the lower plate outward 2.

� Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base plate 3.

ional position

n crank handle clockwise until it ages (operational position).

storing the vehicle jack in its rtment:

hould be fully collapsed.

handle must be folded in (storage ition).

Setting up the collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel.

1 Tilt the plate upward2 Fold the lower plate outward3 Insert the plate

374

Practical hints

Where

Minispa

The Minstorage trunk flo

Removi

� Lift utrunktrunk

� Loos(� pawell

� Rem(� pa

toring the Minispare wheel

Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel well.

Place vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.

Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 points in the direction of travel.

Place storage well casing (� page 370) over vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 and turn the retaining screw (� page 370) clockwise as far it will go to secure the Minispare wheel.

iArrow 2 on vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4 must point in the direction of travel. Otherwise you cannot place the storage well casing (� page 370) on top and secure the Minispare wheel with the retaining screw (� page 370).

will I find ...?

re wheel (except C 55 AMG)

ispare wheel is located in the compartment underneath the or.

ng the Minispare wheel

p trunk floor cover and engage floor handle in upper edge of .

en the retaining screw ge 370) in the middle of storage

casing.

ove the storage well casing ge 370).

1 Vehicle tool kit2 Arrow 3 Minispare wheel4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing

� Remove vehicle tool kit storage well casing 4.

� Remove Minispare wheel 3.

S

�

�

�

375

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only)

The collapsible tire is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

Removing the collapsible tire

� Lift up trunk floor cover and engage trunk floor handle in upper edge of trunk.

1 Collapsible tire2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire)3 Retaining screw

!To truntrunclo

Warn

The ddifferea resuchangmoun

The Mtemporegula

In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the Minispare wheel when observing the following restrictions:

� Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

� Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.

� Do not operate vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted.

For more information, see “Rims and Tires” (� page 420).

prevent damage, always disengage k floor handle from upper edge of k and lower trunk floor before

sing the trunk lid.

ing! G

imensions of the Minispare wheel are nt from those of the road wheels. As lt, the vehicle handling characteristics e when driving with a Minispare wheel ted.

inispare wheel should only be used rarily, and should be replaced with a r road wheel as quickly as possible.

376

Practical hints

Where

� Looscoun

� Rem

Storing

If you wiuse, carOtherwithe stor

� Unscof th

� Takevehic

!Makwhen

!To prevent damage, always disengage trunk floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower trunk floor before closing the trunk lid.

Warning! G

The dimensions of the collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a collapsible tire mounted.

The collapsible tire should only be used tem-porarily, and should be replaced with a reg-ular road wheel as quickly as possible.

will I find ...?

en retaining screw 3 by turning it terclockwise.

ove collapsible tire 1.

the collapsible tire

sh to store the collapsible tire after ry out the following steps. se the collapsible tire will not fit age compartment.

rew the valve cap from the valve e collapsible tire.

the valve extractor from the le tool kit (� page 372).

� Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape.

� Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

� Screw the valve cap back on the valve.

� Pull the protective wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit over the collapsible tire.

� Store the collapsible tire and the valve extractor in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

� Pierce the protective wrap with retaining screw 3.

� Secure the collapsible tire by turning retaining screw 3 clockwise.

e sure the collapsible tire is dry storing it.

iIt may take a few minutes for the col-lapsible tire to deflate completely.

377

Practical hints

Where will I find ...?

In the tempoobserv

� Do50

� Drito hrep

� Doone

For mo(� pag

!Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the Minispare wheel, collapsible tire, or other steel rims. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the Minispare wheel, collapsible tire, or other steel rims will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes.

Warning! G

Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired.

case of a flat tire, you may rarily use the collapsible tire when ing the following restrictions:

not exceed a vehicle speed of mph (80 km/h).

ve to the nearest tire repair facility ave the flat tire repaired or

laced as appropriate.

not operate vehicle with more than collapsible tire mounted.

re information, see “Rims and Tires” e 420).

Spare wheel bolts

1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims2 Wheel bolt for Minispare wheel,

collapsible tire, or other steel rims (located in trunk with spare wheel)

Practical hints

k

i

ran

nlocking the driver’s door

Unlocking

Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

Turn the mechanical key counterclock-wise to position 1.

The driver’s door is unlocked.

lonkg

cao

PS

Ins

378

Unloc

Unlock

If you athe Smthe tru

iUntrutrig

To foll

�

�

ing/locking in an emergency

ng the vehicle

e unable to unlock the vehicle with rtKey, open the driver’s door and k using the mechanical key.

Removing the mechanical key

1 Mechanical key locking tab2 Mechanical key

� Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.

� Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.

U

1

�

�

cking the driver’s door and/or the with the mechanical key will

er the anti-theft alarm system*.

ncel the alarm, do one of the wing:

ress button Œ or ‹ on the martKey.

sert the SmartKey in the starter witch.

379

Practical hints

locking/locking in an emergency

Unlock

A minim(1.74 m

The truhandle

1 Unl2 Han

Locking the vehicle

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the SmartKey, do the following:

� Close the passenger doors and the trunk lid.

� Press the central locking switch in the center console (� page 97).

� Check to see whether the locking knobs on the passenger doors have moved down.

� If necessary push them down manually.

Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle should now be locked.

Un

ing and opening the trunk

um height clearance of 5.71 ft ) is required to open the trunk lid.

nk lid lock is located next to the above the rear license plate recess.

ocking in an emergencydle

� Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock until it stops.

� Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1.

The trunk lid unlocks.

� Pull on handle 2.

The trunk lid opens.

� Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock.

!The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

380

Practical hints

Unlock

1 Lock

� Inserdrive

� Turnposit

The d

Side trimRelease button

Open the trunk lid.

Remove the side trim 1 from the right-hand side of the luggage compart-ment.

Turn release button 2 clockwise as far as will go.

The fuel filler flap is released.

Open the fuel filler flap from outside.

ing/locking in an emergency

ing

t the mechanical key into the r’s door lock until it stops.

the mechanical key clockwise to ion 1.

river’s door is locked.

Fuel filler flap

In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap, you can open it manually.

The release button is on the right-hand side of the luggage compartment behind the side trim.

12

�

�

�

�

Warning! G

If you operate the emergency release but-ton, be careful of the sharp edges so that you do not injure yourself.

381

Practical hints

locking/locking in an emergency

Manuagear s

In the sion geunlock

� Slid(�

1 Too

Un

lly unlocking the transmission elector lever

case of power failure the transmis-ar selector lever can be manually ed, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

e out the swiveling cup holder page 259).

l

� Insert a tool 1 (e.g. flat blade screwdriver) into the opening.

� Perform the following two steps simultaneously:

� Press tool 1 forward in the direction of the arrow.

� Move gear selector lever from position P.

� Remove tool 1 from the opening.

iThe gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P.

Practical hints

in

t

nf c

/ t

tc

oe

Turn crank 3 clockwise to:

� slide sunroof closed

� raise sunroof at the rear

Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:

� slide sunroof open

� lower sunroof at the rear

iTurn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized after being operated manually (� page 246).

382

Open

Power

You casunroomalfun

The tiltbehindlight.

� Remswi

� Pryscr

g/closing in an emergency

ilt/sliding sunroof*

open or close the tilt/sliding manually should an electrical tion occur.

sliding sunroof drive is located he lens 1 of the interior overhead

ove SmartKey from the starter h.

f lens 1 using a flat blade wdriver.

� Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction of the arrows.

� Lower the rear of the cover and remove.

� Remove the cover.

� Take the crank 3 out of the Operator’s Manual pouch.

� Insert crank 3 through hole on the left side.

�

�

iDo not disconnect electrical connectors.

383

Practical hints

Replacing SmartKey batteries

�If tdislochaau

W

K

Ifim

iWhen inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint.

iWhen replacing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center.

Replahe battchargeked or ve the bthorized

arning

eep the

a battemediat

cing SmartKey batterieseries in the SmartKey are d, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked. It is recommended to atteries replaced at an Mercedes-Benz Center.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

! G

batteries out of reach of children.

ry is swallowed, seek medical help ely.

384

Practical hints

Replac

SmartK

ReplaceCR 2025

� Rem(� pa

1 Mec2 Batte

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing up.

Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place.

Slide mechanical key 1 back into the SmartKey.

Check the operation of the SmartKey.

ing SmartKey batteries

ey

ment batteries: Lithium, type or equivalent.

ove the mechanical key ge 378).

hanical keyry compartment

� Insert mechanical key 1 in side opening and push grey slide.

Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.

� Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow.

� Remove the batteries.

3 Battery4 Contact spring

�

�

�

�

385

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

�Saexforastim

CoimreabuMead

Bulbs

Replafe vehicterior lie essensembliees.

rrect heportantdjuste

lb has brcedes

justmen

cing bulbsle operation depends on proper

ghting and signaling. It is there-tial that all bulbs and lamp s are in good working order at all

adlamp adjustment is extremely . Have headlamps checked and d at regular intervals and when a een replaced. See an authorized -Benz Center for headlamp t.

iIf the headlamps or front fog lamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging.

iSubstitute bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction. Observe the messages in the multifunction display (� page 364).

386

Practical hints

Replac

Front la ear lamps

La

1 Adlam

2 HaTuBi-Tu

3 HaLoBi-Lo

1 Vehicleand hignot repauthoriz

Lamp Type

7 High mounted brake lamp

LED

8 Brake lamp P 21 W

9 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W

a Parking and side marker lamp

P 21/5 W

b Backup lamp P 21 W

c License plate lamps C 5 W

d Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only), tail and standing lamp

P 21/4 W

ing bulbs

mps R

mp Type

ditional turn signal p

LED

logen headlamp:rn signal lampXenon* headlamp:rn signal lamp

1156 A

2357 A

logen headlamp:w beamXenon* headlamp:w and high beam1

s with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beamh beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Dolace the Xenon bulbs yourself. See aned Mercedes-Benz Center.

H7 (55 W)

D2S-35 W

Lamp Type

4 Halogen headlamp:High beam/high beam flasherBi-Xenon* headlamp:High beam flasher

H7 (55 W)

H7 (55 W)

Parking and standing lamp

W 5 W

5 Front fog lamp

Front fog lamp with cornering fog lamp*

HB4 (51 W)

H7 (55 W)

6 Side marker lamp W 5 W

387

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:

� Additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors

� High mounted brake lamp

� Xenon* lamps

� Front fog lamps

Warn

BulbsAllowchang

Keep

HalogA bulb

� to

� dr

� sc

Wear

Becaudangelamp that ytechn

iHave the headlamp adjustment checked regularly.

Notes on bulb replacement

� Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating.

� Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.

� Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.

� Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.

� If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

ing! G

and bulb sockets can be very hot. the lamp to cool down before ing a bulb.

bulbs out of reach of children.

en lamps contain pressurized gas. can explode if you

uch or move it when hot

op the bulb

ratch the bulb

eye and hand protection.

se of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is rous to replace the bulb or repair the and its components. We recommend ou have such work done by a qualified ician.

388

Practical hints

Replac

Replaci

Before yfront lam

� Turnposit

� Openfor s

Halogen

1 Hous2 Hous

lamp

ow beam bulb

Press the clamp on housing cover 1 and remove it.

Pull the electrical connector off.

Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise and take out the bulb.

Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing.

Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it engages.

Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb.

Align housing cover 1 and press until it engages.

ing bulbs

ng bulbs for front lamps

ou start to replace a bulb for a p, do the following first:

the exterior lamp switch to ion M (� page 110).

the hood (� page 294) (except ide marker lamps).

headlamp

ing cover for low beam headlamping cover for high beam head-, parking and standing lamp

3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb4 Bulb socket for low beam bulb5 Bulb socket for high beam bulb6 Bulb socket for parking and standing

lamp bulb

L

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

389

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

High b

� Preand

� Pul

� Turand

� Inslochou

� Tureng

� Plubul

� Aligit e

Parking and standing lamp bulb

� Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it.

� Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb.

� Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 6.

� Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6.

� Press bulb socket 6 back into the lamp.

� Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages.

eam bulb

ss the clamp on housing cover 2 remove it.

l the electrical connector off.

n bulb socket 5 counterclockwise take out the bulb.

ert the new bulb so that its socket ates in the recess of the lamp sing.

n bulb socket 5 clockwise until it ages.

g the electrical connector onto the b.

n housing cover 2 and press until ngages.

Front turn signal lamp bulb

� Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.

� Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 3.

� Press new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages.

� Place bulb socket 3 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise.

390

Practical hints

Replac

Bi-Xeno

1 Hous2 Hous

park

igh beam flasher bulb

Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it.

Pull the electrical connector off.

Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise and take out the bulb.

Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of the lamp housing.

Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it engages.

Plug the electrical connector onto the bulb.

Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages.

Warni

Do not Bi-Xenoin Bi-Xethe bulbnents. Wwork do

ing bulbs

n* headlamp

ing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamping cover for high beam flasher,

ing and standing lamp

3 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb4 Bulb socket for high beam flasher bulb5 Bulb socket for parking and standing

lamp bulb

H

�

�

�

�

�

�

�

ng! G

remove the cover 1 for the n headlamp. Because of high voltage non lamps, it is dangerous to replace or repair the lamp and its compo-e recommend that you have such

ne by a qualified technician.

391

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Front t

� Turcou

� Precousoc

� Presoceng

� Plalam

Side marker lamp

� Carefully slide the lamp towards the rear in direction of arrows.

� Remove the front end first.

� Turn the bulb socket with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.

� Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.

� Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.

� Place the bulb socket back into the lamp and turn it clockwise.

� To reinstall the lamp, set the rear end in the bumper and let the front end engage.

urn signal lamp bulb

n bulb socket 3 with the bulb nterclockwise and remove it.

ss gently onto the bulb and turn it nterclockwise out of bulb ket 3.

ss new bulb gently into bulb ket 3 and turn clockwise until it ages.

ce bulb socket 3 back into the p and turn it clockwise.

Parking and standing lamp bulb

� Press the clamp on housing cover 2 and remove it.

� Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.

� Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.

� Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.

� Press bulb socket 5 back into the lamp.

� Align housing cover 2 and press until it engages.

392

Practical hints

Replac

Replaci

Before ylamp, do

� Turnposit

� Open

Tail lam

1 Latc

� Foldthe s

� Turnremo

Reinstall the bulb carrier and lock it again with latch 1.

Reinstall the trim panel.

icense plate lamp

Screw

Loosen both screws 1.

Remove the license plate lamp.

Replace the bulb.

Reinstall the license plate lamp.

Retighten screws 1.

ing bulbs

ng bulbs for rear lamps

ou start to replace a bulb for a rear the following first:

the exterior lamp switch to ion M (� page 110).

the trunk lid (� page 93).

p unit

h

the corresponding trim panel to ide.

latch 1 to vertical position and ve the bulb carrier.

Bulb carrier

2 Brake lamp bulb3 Backup lamp bulb4 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only),

tail and standing lamp bulb5 Parking and side marker lamp bulb6 Turn signal lamp bulb

� Press gently onto the respective bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket.

� Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages.

�

�

L

1

�

�

�

�

�

393

Practical hints

Replacing wiper blades

�Re

�

�

12

W

Frbtc

!Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.

For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Replamovin

Remov

Fold w

UnlockLock

arning

or safetemove Sefore rehe wiperause inj

cing wiper bladesg wiper blades

e SmartKey from starter switch.

iper arm forward.

� Pull the tab in direction of arrow 1 and remove wiper blade.

Installing wiper blades

� Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on the wiper arm (see arrows).

� Slide the tab back in the direction of arrow 2 until it audibly engages.

� Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield. Make sure you hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back.

! G

y reasons, switch off wipers and martKey from starter switch placing a wiper blade. Otherwise, motor could suddenly turn on and ury.

Practical hints

ir

ounting the spare wheel

reparing the vehicle

repare the vehicle as described page 394).

ehicles with Minispare wheel:

Take the wheel wrench, the wheel bolts, and the jack out of the trunk (� page 370).

Take the Minispare wheel out of the trunk (� page 374).

ehicles with collapsible tire 55 AMG only):

Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench, wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump out of the trunk (� page 371).

i

imphh

d y

a de a

tone

opa

394

Flat t

Warn

The d(Minisfrom tthe vewhenAdapt

The spWhenensurceed

Drive as sooreplac

Neverone s

e

Preparing the vehicle

� Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface.

� Turn on the hazard warning flasher (� page 116).

� Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position.

� Set the parking brake (� page 54).

� Move the gear selector lever to P (manual transmission to first or reverse gear).

� Turn off the engine (� page 56).

� Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

� Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.

M

P

P(�

V

�

�

V(C

�

ng! G

ensions of the spare wheel are or collapsible tire) are different ose of the road wheels. As a result, icle handling characteristics change riving with a spare wheel mounted. our driving style accordingly.

re wheel is for temporary use only. riving with spare wheel mounted, proper tire pressure and do not ex-vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as possible to have the spare wheel d with a regular road wheel.

perate the vehicle with more than re wheel mounted.

iOpen doors only when conditions are safe to do so.

395

Practical hints

Flat tire

Lifting

� Preby or o

Onveh

When c

� Plaanowhwh

When c

� Plasizablo

� On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).

the vehicle

vent the vehicle from rolling away blocking wheels with wheel chocks ther sizable objects.

e wheel chock is included with the icle tool kit (� page 370).

hanging wheel on a level surface:

ce the wheel chock in front of and ther sizable object behind the

eel that is diagonally opposite to the eel being changed.

hanging wheel on a hill:

ce the wheel chock and another ble object on the downhill side

cking both wheels of the other axle.

Warning! G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-pacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

396

Practical hints

Flat tir

The jackdirectly and in fr

1 Take2 Jack

� Place

� Positbrac(plumeveninclin

emoving the wheel

Alignment bolt

Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and remove.

Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.

Remove the remaining bolts.

Remove the wheel.

!Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This could result in damage to the bolts and wheel hub threads.

e

take-up brackets are located behind the front wheel housings ont of the rear wheel housings.

-up bracket

jack 2 on firm ground.

ion jack 2 under take-up ket 1 so that it is always vertical b-line) as seen from the side,

if the vehicle is parked on an e.

� Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.

R

1

�

�

�

�

Warning! G

The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

� Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

� Never lie down under the raised vehicle.

397

Practical hints

Flat tire

Mount

1 Wh2 Wh

col(loc

� Guide spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

� Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.

!Whmocolusebolcolphybra

ing the spare wheel

eel bolt for light alloy rimseel bolt for Minispare wheel, lapsible tire, or other steel rims ated in trunk with spare wheel)

� Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.

eel bolts 2 must be used when unting the Minispare wheel, lapsible tire, or other steel rims. The of any wheel bolts other than wheel ts 2 for the Minispare wheel, lapsible tire, or other steel rims will sically damage the vehicle’s kes.

!To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

Warning! G

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

398

Practical hints

Flat tir

� Unscwhee

Take the electric air pump out of the trunk (� page 372).

FlapOn/off switchElectrical plugAir hose with pressure gauge and vent screwUnion nut

Open flap 1 on electric air pump.

Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4.

Remove the valve cap from the collapsible tire valve.

Warni

Only usMercedbolts m

Do not vehiclecould fa

e

rew the alignment bolt, install last l bolt and tighten slightly.

Inflating the collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only)

�

1234

5

�

�

�

ng! G

e genuine equipment es-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel ay come loose.

tighten the wheel bolts when the is raised. Otherwise the vehicle ll off the jack.

Warning! G

Vehicles with collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only):

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted.

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (� page 398) before lowering the vehicle.

Warning! G

Observe instructions on air pump label.

!Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged.

399

Practical hints

Flat tire

� Scrtire

� Inscig

� Turto p

� Pre

Theswitire

� Infl(3.5

Thicolnuttionburme

� Detach the electric air pump.

� Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the electric air pump back in the trunk.

Warning! G

Follow recommend inflation pressures.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-cause they are more likely to become punc-tured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

ew air hose 4 onto the collapsible valve.

ert electrical plug 3 into vehicle arette lighter socket.

n the SmartKey in the starter switch osition 1.

ss I on electric air pump switch 2.

electric air pump should now tch on and inflate the collapsible .

ate the tire to approximately 52 psi bar).

s takes about five minutes for the lapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union 5 can become hot duration infla-. Exercise proper caution to avoid ning yourself when using the equip-nt.

� Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.

� Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.

� If the tire pressure is above 52 psi (3.5 bar), release excess tire pressure using the vent screw.

!Do not operate the electric air pump longer than six minutes without inter-ruption. Otherwise it may overheat.

You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off.

400

Practical hints

Flat tir

Lowerin

� Lowecounresti

� Rem

efore storing the jack, it should be fully ollapsed, with handle folded in (storage osition) (� page 372).

Store the jack and the other vehicle tools in the trunk.

Warni

Vehicle(C 55 A

Inflate cproperl

Inflate tpump (hicle.

Warning! G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).

e

g the vehicle

r vehicle by turning crank terclockwise until vehicle is ng fully on its own weight.

ove the jack.

1 - 5 Wheel bolts

� Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 80 lb-ft (110 Nm).

Bcp

�

ng! G

s with collapsible tire MG only):

ollapsible tire only after the wheel is y mounted.

he collapsible tire using the electric � page 398) before lowering the ve-

401

Practical hints

Battery

�Thco

1

Re

�

�

Ins

�

�

!Never loosen or detach battery termi-nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se-verely damaged.

Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.

Warning! G

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

Battee battempartm

Clamp

moving

Releas

Remov

talling

Insert

Secure

ryry is located in the engine ent on the right hand side.

s

filter box:

e clamps 1.

e filter box.

filter box:

filter box properly.

it with clamps 1.

Warning! G

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries (� page 300).

Never lean over batteries while connecting, you might get injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

402

Practical hints

Batter

1 Nega2 Posit

harging and reinstalling the battery

Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.

Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order.

Warni

With a d

� youSm

� thelock

Warning! G

Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle. Gases may escape during charg-ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

y

tive terminalive terminal cover

Disconnecting the battery

� Turn off the engine (� page 56).

� Turn off all electrical consumers.

� Remove SmartKey from starter switch.

� Open the hood (� page 294).

� Remove the filter box (� page 401).

� Disconnect the battery negative lead from negative terminal 1.

� Remove cover 2 from the positive terminal.

� Disconnect the battery positive lead.

Removing the battery

� Remove the screw-nuts securing the battery.

� Remove the battery bracket.

� Take out the battery.

C

�

�

ng! G

isconnected battery

will no longer be able to turn the artKey in the starter switch

gear selector lever will remain ed in position P

403

Practical hints

Battery

Recon

� Tur

� Rem

� Confas

� Con

� Rei

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly. Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

!NEV

!Thetubwh

necting the battery

n off all electrical consumers.

ove SmartKey from starter switch.

nect the battery positive lead and ten its cover 2.

nect the battery negative lead.

nstall the filter box (� page 401).

ER invert the terminal connections!

battery, its filler caps and the vent e must always be securely installed en the vehicle is in operation.

iThe following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnec-tion):

� Set the clock (� page 139).Vehicles with COMAND*: See COMAND operator’s manual.

� Synchronize side windows (� page 242).

� Synchronize tilt/sliding sunroof* (� page 246).

Practical hints

s

i

e gea o

lp

ythr afa

e iss pin

ps

.

al

!Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.

If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.

Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.

404

Jump

Warn

Failurdamacan leinjury

Neveror jum

Batterallow skin oflush medic

A battwhichflameimprosmok

Attemcan reinjury

Read

tarting

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:

� Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic con-verter are cold.

� Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

� Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

� Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

� Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or oth-er parts that move when an engine is started or running.

ng! G

to follow these directions will cause to the electronic components, and

d to a battery explosion and severe r death.

ean over batteries while connecting starting, you might get injured.

fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not is fluid to come in contact with eyes, clothing. In case it does, immediately fected area with water, and seek l help if necessary.

ry will also produce hydrogen gas, flammable and very explosive. Keep

or sparks away from battery, avoid er connection of jumper cables, g, etc.

ting to jump start a frozen battery ult in it exploding, causing personal

l instructions before proceeding.

405

Practical hints

Jump starting

The bacompaterminfront o

� Matou

� Tur

� App

� Shi(ma

� Connect negative terminal 4 of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal 3 in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cables. Clamp cable to charged battery 4 first.

� Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

You can now again turn on the electrical consumers. Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances.

� Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 4 and then from positive terminals 2 and 1.

You can now turn on the lights.

� Have the battery checked at the near-est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warn

Keep Do no

Obsertions (� pa

!Vehicles with automatic transmission and/or 4MATIC:Do not tow-start the vehicle.

ttery is located in the engine rtment on the right hand side. The als for jump starting are located in f the battery.

ke sure the two vehicles do not ch.

n off all electrical consumers.

ly parking brake.

ft gear selector lever to position P nual transmission to Neutral).

1 Positive terminal of charged battery2 Positive under hood terminal in front of

discharged battery3 Negative under hood terminal in front

of discharged battery4 Negative terminal of charged battery

� Connect positive terminal 1 of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cables. Clamp cable to charged battery 1 first.

� Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed.

ing! G

flames or sparks away from battery. t smoke.

ve all safety instructions and precau-when handling automotive batteries ge 300).

Practical hints

g

de bu

lifb

ntc

ni

p

prnop

itpati

!If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised (not permissible for vehicles with 4MATIC), the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1). Otherwise the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever must be in position N (manual trans-mission: gears disengaged) and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

406

Towin

Mercevehiclethe growheel prefera

!Usemeswi

DoTowbumsup

To do sus

Sw(�ma

the vehicle

s-Benz recommends that the e transported with all wheels off nd using flatbed or appropriate t/dolly equipment. This method is le to other types of towing.

When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised (except vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equip-

t with the SmartKey in the starter h turned to position 0.

ot tow with sling-type equipment. ng with sling-type equipment over py roads will damage radiator and orts.

event damage during transport, t tie down vehicle by its chassis or

ension parts.

ch off the tow-away alarm* ge 85) and deactivate the auto-

c central locking (� page 147).

!Vehicles with automatic transmission and/or 4MATIC:Do not tow-start the vehicle.

!Vehicles with 4MATIC:Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could damage the transfer case, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

407

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

!To damrecnec(vetheanynea

iTo signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on the ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

be certain to avoid a possibility of age to the drivetrain, however, we

ommend the drive shaft be discon-ted at the rear axle drive flange

hicles with 4MATIC: disconnected at front and rear axle drive flanges) for towing beyond a short tow to a rby garage.

Warning! G

If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if:

� the engine will not run

� there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system

as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.

Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2.

If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.

408

Practical hints

Towing

Warni

With thpower asystemin mindeffort ishicle. A

iIf the battery is disconnected or discharged

� the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch. For more informa-tion, see “Battery” (� page 401) and “Jump starting” (� page 404).

� the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P. For informa-tion on manually unlocking the transmission gear selector lever see (� page 381).

the vehicle

ng! G

e engine not running, there is no ssistance for the brake and steering

s. In this case, it is important to keep that a considerably higher degree of necessary to brake and steer the ve-dapt your driving accordingly.

!When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following:

With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

Switch off the tow-away alarm* (� page 85).

To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (� page 147).

Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

409

Practical hints

Towing the vehicle

Install

1 Cov

Removing cover

� Press mark on cover 1 or 2 in direction of arrows.

� Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt.

The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit (located in the compartment under-neath the trunk floor).

� Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighten with lug wrench.

Reinstalling cover

� Fit cover 1 or 2 and snap into place.

ing towing eye bolt

er on right side of front bumper.

2 Cover on right side of rear bumper.

Practical hints

cemt n

lo

e

r

e

ids for changing fuses

use chart

he fuse chart is found in the main fuse ox in the passenger compartment

page 411). The amperages of the fuses re also given there.

pare fuses

pare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit the spare wheel well (� page 370).

use extractor

he fuse extractor is found in the fuse box over in the trunk (� page 412).

i

shes a

410

Fuses

The elestop ththat is prevenelectro

The folchange

� Fus

� Spa

� Fus

Warn

Only uwith tin queresult

trical fuses in your vehicle serve to supply of electricity to a device alfunctioning. This helps to damage to the other vehicle ics.

wing aids are available to help you fuses (� page 410):

chart

e fuses

extractor

The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes:

� Main fuse box in passenger compartment (� page 411)

� Fuse box in engine compartment (� page 411)

� Fuse box in trunk (� page 412)

A

F

Tb(�a

S

Sin

F

Tc

ng! G

e fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz specified amperage for the system

tion. Otherwise, a short circuit could nd cause a fire.

!Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and that have the specified amperage rating.

Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged.

Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

411

Practical hints

Fuses

Main fcompa

The mager comthe coc

1 Ma

Openin

� Op

� Pulscr

� Rem

Removing cover

� Twist screws 2 90° counterclockwise.

� Lift the rear of cover 1.

� Slide out retainer 3 and remove cover 1 by pulling towards front.

Opening fuse box

4 Fuse box cover5 Clamps

� With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from the fuse box.

� Release clamps 5.

� Remove fuse box cover 4.

use box in passenger rtment

in fuse box is located in the passen-partment on the driver’s side of

kpit.

in fuse box cover

g fuse box

en the driver’s door.

l fuse box cover 1 open with a ew driver or similar tool (see arrow).

ove fuse box cover 1 rearward.

Closing fuse box

� Attach fuse box cover 1 in the front.

� Fold fuse box cover 1 in until it engages.

Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side.

1 Cover2 Screws3 Retainer

412

Practical hints

Fuses

Closing

� Makprop

� Pressecu

Installin

� Inserretai

� Twis

pening fuse box

Pull away trim panel 1.

Remove fuse box cover 3.

losing fuse box

Insert fuse box cover 3 until it engages.

Insert trim panel 1.

fuse box

e sure that the sealing rubber is erly positioned.

s fuse box cover 4 down and re with clamps 5.

g cover

t cover 1 sideways into ner 3.

t screws 2 90° clockwise.

Fuse box in trunk

The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the left-hand trim panel.

1 Trim panel2 Fuse extractor3 Fuse box cover

O

�

�

C

�

�

413

Technical data

Parts service

Warranty coverage

Identification labels

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

Engine

Rims and Tires

Electrical system

Main dimensions

Weights

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Technical data

eca

s

!The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

414

The “Tnecess

Parts

hnical data” section provides the ry technical data for your vehicle.

ervice

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte-nance and repair work. In addition, strate-gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufac-tured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

415

Technical data

Warranty coverage

�YotheWarizor stathe

�

�

�

�

Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet

Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

Warrur vehic warrarranty

ed Mercrepair alled in terms

New V

Emiss

Emiss

CaliforVermoWarra

anty coveragele is covered under the terms of

nties printed in the Service and Information booklet. Your autho-edes-Benz Center will exchange ny defective parts originally in-

the vehicle in accordance with of the following warranties:

ehicle Limited Warranty

ion System Warranty

ion Performance Warranty

nia, Maine, Massachusetts, and nt Emission Control Systems

nty

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz Center.

Technical data

if

tlu

Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standardsEngine number (engraved on engine)VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)Vacuum line routing diagram label

iWhen ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine num-bers.

416

Ident

1 Cer(inc

ication labels

ification labeldes Paintwork code)

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 3

456

417

Technical data

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

�C 2

12345678

Layou30 Ko

PowerIdler pSuperAutomAir coCrankCoolanGener

t of poly-V-belt drivempressor (all models)

steering pumpulleychargeratic belt tensioner

nditioning compressorshaftt pump

ator (alternator)

C 240 (all models)/C 320 (all models)/C 55 AMG

1 Automatic belt tensioner2 Power steering pump 3 Air conditioning compressor4 Crankshaft 5 Coolant pump6 Generator (alternator)7 Idler pulley

Technical data

e

l

uo ing data of all special bodies and special equipment.

C 240 (203.061)1

C 240 4MATIC (203.081)1

e 112

o 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

c 6

3.54 in (89.90 mm)

e 2.68 in (68.20 mm)

p 158.5 cu in (2597 cm3)

re 10.5:1

t

ium

168 hp/5500 rpm2

(125 kW/5500 rpm)

u 177 lb-ft/4500 rpm (240 Nm/4500 rpm)

u 6200 rpm

o 1-4-3-6-2-5

- 2380 mm

418

Engin

Mode

1 The q

Engin

Mode

No. of

Bore

Strok

Total

Comp

Outputo SAE

2 Prem

Maximto SAE

Maxim

Firing

Poly-V

C 230 Kompressor (203.040)1 (Canada only)C 230 Kompressor Sport (203.040)1

ted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the correspond

271

f operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

ylinders 4

3.23 in (82.00 mm)

3.35 in (85.00 mm)

iston displacement 109.6 cu in (1796 cm3)

ssion ratio 8.5:1

acc. J 1349

189 hp/5800 rpm2

(141 kW/5800 rpm)

fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

m torque acc.J 1349

192 lb-ft/3500 - 4000 rpm (260 Nm/3500 - 4000 rpm)

m engine speed 6000 rpm

rder 1-3-4-2

belt 2420 mm

419

Technical data

Engine

Mode 55 AMG (203.076)1

Engin 13

Mode -stroke engine, gasoline injection

No. of

Bore .82 in (97.00 mm)

Strok .60 in (92.00 mm)

Total 31.8 cu in (5439 cm3)

Comp 1:1

Outpu 62 hp/5750 rpm2

270 kW/5750 rpm)

Maxim 76 lb-ft/4000 rpm 510 Nm/4000 rpm)

Maxim 700 rpm

Firing -5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V 380 mm1 The q ding data of all special bodies and special equipment.2 Premi

l C 320 (203.064)1 (USA only)C 320 Sport (203.064)1

C 320 4MATIC (203.084)1

C

e 112 1

of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4

cylinders 6 8

3.54 in (89.90 mm) 3

e 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3

piston displacement 195.2 cu in (3199 cm3) 3

ression ratio 10:1 1

t acc. to SAE J 1349 215 hp/5700 rpm2

(160 kW/5700 rpm)3(

um torque acc. to SAE J 1349 229 lb-ft/3000 - 4600 rpm (310 Nm/3000 - 4600 rpm)

3(

um engine speed 6000 rpm 6

order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1

-belt 2380 mm 2

uoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponum fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Technical data

a

seca air,

r

re

re

iFurther information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (� page 312) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provid-ed, it can be found on the placard locat-ed on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recom-mendation included with vehicle.

420

Rims

Only uspecifitestedOther teffects

� poo

� inc

� inc

nd Tires

tires and rims which have been lly developed for your vehicle and

nd approved by Mercedes-Benz. es and rims can have detrimental such as

handling characteristics

ased noise

ased fuel consumption

!Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteris-tics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.

421

Technical data

Rims and Tires

Same

Mode

Rims

Whee mm)

All-se

Summ

Winte 7 89H M+S

7 91H M+S1

1 For us

size tires

l C 230 Kompressor (Canada only) C 230 Kompressor SportC 240C 240 4MATICC 320 (USA only)C 320 SportC 320 4MATIC

C 55 AMG

(light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2 71/2 J x 17

l offset 1.22 in (31 mm) 1.46 in (37

ason tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91H M+S -

er tires (radial-ply tires) - -

r tires (radial-ply tires) 205/55 R16 91H M+S 205/50 R1or225/45 R1

e with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

422

Technical data

Rims a

Mixed s

Model

Front a

Rims (l

Wheel

Summe XL (Extra Load)1

Rear ax

Rims (l

Wheel

Summe1 Must no

XL (Extra Load)1

nd Tires

ize tires

C 230 Kompressor SportC 320 Sport

C 55 AMG

xle:

ight alloy) 71/2 J x 17 H2 71/2 J x 18 H2

offset 1.42 in (36 mm) 1.18 in (30 mm)

r tires (radial-ply tires) 225/45 R17 91W 225/40 ZR18 92Y

le:

ight alloy) 81/2 J x 17 H2 81/2 J x 18 H2

offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 1.34 in (34 mm)

r tires (radial-ply tires) 245/40 R17 91W1

t be used with snow chains.

245/35 ZR18 92Y

423

Technical data

Rims and Tires

Minisp

Collap

Mode

Rim (s

Whee

Tire1 Must

Mode

Rim (s

Whee

Tire1 Must

are wheel

sible tire (C 55 AMG only)

l C 230 Kompressor (Canada only)C 240C 240 4MATICC 320 (USA only)C 320 4MATIC

C 230 Kompressor SportC 320 Sport

teel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2

l offset 0.67 in (17 mm) 0.67 in (17 mm)

T 125/90 R16 98M1

not be used with snow chains.

T 125/80 R17 99M1

l C 55 AMG

teel) 4.5 B x 17 H2

l offset 0.47 in (12 mm)

145/70-17 92P1

not be used with snow chains.

Technical data

ri

l C 55 AMG

a 14 V/150 A

r 14 V/1.7 kW

ry 12 V/100 Ah

p NGK ILFR 6 A

o 0.031 in (0.8 mm)

n Nm) 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)

424

Elect

Mode

Gener

Starte

Batte

Spark

Electr

Tighte

cal system

C 230 Kompressor (all models) C 240 (all models)C 320 (all models)

tor (alternator) 14 V/120 A 14 V/120 A

motor 12 V/1.1 kW 12 V/1.7 kW

12 V/100 Ah 12 V/100 Ah

lugs Bosch F 6 MPP 332 Bosch F 8 DPP 332NGK PFR 5 R-11

de gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)

ing torque 18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30

425

Technical data

Main dimensions

�

M rt C 55 AMG

O 181.8 in (4617 mm)

O 68.7 in (1744 mm)

O 55.6 in (1412 mm)

W 106.9 in (2715 mm)

Tr 59.3 in (1507 mm)

Tr 58.0 in (1474 mm)

Main

odel

verall v

verall v

verall v

heelba

ack, fr

ack, re

dimensions

C 230 KompressorC 240C 240 4MATICC 320C 320 4MATIC

C 230 Kompressor SpoC 320 Sport

ehicle length 178.4 in (4531 mm) 178.4 in (4531 mm)

ehicle width 68.0 in (1728 mm) 68.0 in (1728 mm)

ehicle height 56.3 in (1429 mm) 55.6 in (1413 mm)

se 106.9 in (2715 mm) 106.9 in (2715 mm)

ont 59.3 in (1505 mm) 59.3 in (1505 mm)

ar 58.1 in (1476 mm) 58.1 in (1476 mm)

Technical data

h

o

l

426

Weig

Roof l

Trunk

ts

ad max. 220 lb (100 kg)

oad max. 220 lb (100 kg)

427

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

�Ca

Ve

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center.

uels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

En pproved engine oils

Au B Automatic Transmission Fluid

M B Manual Transmission Oil

Re ypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

Fuelspacitie

hicle co

gine w

tomat

anual t

ar axle

, coolants, lubricants, etc.s

mponents and their respective

lubricants must match. Therefore only use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Model Capacity F

ith oil filter C 230 Kompressor (all models)C 240C 240 4MATICC 320C 320 4MATICC 320 SportC 55 AMG

5.8 US qt (5.5 l)7.9 US qt (7.5 l)7.4 US qt (7.0 l)7.9 US qt (7.5 l)7.4 US qt (7.0 l)7.9 US qt (7.5 l)9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

A

ic transmission C 230 Kompressor (all models)C 240 (all models)C 320 (all models)C 55 AMG

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)8.5 US qt (8.0 l)8.5 US qt (8.0 l)9.3 US qt (8.7 l)

M

ransmission 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) M

C 230 Kompressor (all models)C 240 (all models)C 320 (all models)C 55 AMG

1.2 US qt (1.1 l)1.2 US qt (1.1 l)1.2 US qt (1.1 l)1.5 US qt (1.4 l)

H

428

Technical data

Fuels,

coolants, lubricants, etc.

Front a gear oil SAE 85 W 90

Transfe nsfer case fluid

Power wer Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

Front w mperature roller bearing grease

Brake s ake Fluid (DOT 4+)

Cooling 5.0 Anticorrosion/antifreeze agent

Fuel taincludia reser

m unleaded gasoline:um Posted Octane 91f 96 RON/86 MON)

e Fuel Vehicle (identified by a label g Premium gasoline or E85 only! on ler flap):tive fuel: Ethanol fuel (E85)

coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels,

xle C 240 4MATICC 320 4MATIC

0.5 US qt (0.46 l) Hypoid

r case C 240 4MATICC 320 4MATIC

approx. 0.62 US qt (0.59 l) MB Tra

steering approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Po

heel hubs approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each High te

ystem 0.5 US qt (0.5 l) MB Br

system C 230 Kompressor (all models)C 240 (all models)C 320 (all models)C 55 AMG

approx. 5.9 US qt (5.6 l)approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)approx. 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)approx. 12.8 US qt (12.0 l)

MB 32

nkngve of

All models except C 55 AMGC 55 AMG

16.4 US gal (62.0 l)2.1 US gal (8.0 l)2.6 US gal (10.0 l)

PremiuMinim(Avg. o

Flexiblreadinfuel filAlterna

429

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

s, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Air co 4a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil r R-12)

Winds indshield Washer Concentrate1

Windsheadl

1 Use M Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially availablepremi g ratios (� page 436).

Model Capacity Fuel

nditioning system R-13(neve

hield washer 3.2 US qt (3.0 l) MB W

hield washer and amp cleaning system*

6.4 US qt (6.0 l)

B Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshieldxed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixin

430

Technical data

Fuels,

Engine

Engine osuitabilitour servapproverequiredSystem vehiclesoils and Approvecontact Center.

Using enspecificarequired(U.S. vehchanginintervalsthe MainFSS (CadamageMercede

rake fluid

uring vehicle operation, the boiling point f the brake fluid is continuously reduced rough the absorption of moisture from e atmosphere. Under extremely strenu-

us operating conditions, this moisture ontent can lead to the formation of ubbles in the system, thus reducing the ystem’s efficiency.

herefore, the brake fluid must be placed every two years, preferably in the

pring.

nly brake fluid approved by ercedes-Benz is recommended. Your

uthorized Mercedes-Benz Center will rovide you with additional information.

coolants, lubricants, etc.

oils

ils are specifically tested for their y in our engines and durability for ice intervals. Therefore, only use d engine oils and oil filters for vehicles with Maintenance (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada ). For a listing of approved engine oil filters, refer to the Factory d Service Products pamphlet, or an authorized Mercedes-Benz

gine oils and oil filters of tion other than those expressly for the Maintenance System icles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or

g of oil and oil filter at change longer than those called for by tenance System (U.S. vehicles) or

nada Vehicles) will result in engine not covered by the s-Benz Limited Warranty.

Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Engine oil additives

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may damage the engine.

Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Air conditioning refrigerant

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.

Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system will occur.

B

Doththocbs

Tres

OMap

431

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Premi Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.

These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

!To perlineis nuse

�

�

�

�

um unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements

Only use premium unleaded fuel:

� The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane num-ber and the Motor (M) octane number: (R+M)/2. This is also known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

maintain the engine’s durability and formance, premium unleaded gaso- must be used. If premium unleaded ot available and low octane fuel is d, follow these precautions:

Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible.

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.

Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.

iFlexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on fuel filler flap are designed to operate on premium un-leaded gasoline or ethanol fuel (E85) or any mixture of these two.

For more information, see “Flexible Fuel Vehicles” (� page 432).

432

Technical data

Fuels,

Gasolin

A majormanufacby gasolonly theadditivecarbon d

After anwithout can buildand in thengine p

� Warm

� Unst

� Knoc

� Misf

� Powe

lexible Fuel Vehicles

lexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a bel reading Premium gasoline or E85 nly! on fuel filler flap.

hese vehicles are designed to operate on remium unleaded gasoline or ethanol el (E85), or on any mixture of these two.

thanol fuel (E85) is a mixture of pproximately 85% ethanol and 15% nleaded gasoline.

Warning! G

Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol fumes and skin contact with ethanol. Extin-guish all open flames before fueling. Never smoke or create sparks close to ethanol.

coolants, lubricants, etc.

e additives

concern among engine turers is carbon build-up caused ine. Mercedes-Benz recommends use of quality gasoline containing s that prevent the build-up of eposits.

extended period of using fuels such additives, carbon deposits up especially on the intake valves e combustion area, leading to erformance problems such as:

-up hesitation

able idle

king/pinging

ire

r loss

In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions on product label.

Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine operation.

Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

F

Flao

Tpfu

Eau

433

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Switch

For berecommother falternashould

When s

� Fue

� Fuewa

� Am5 g

� Ign

� Immstamin

These are supwhen swhich beforediffere

Hot weather performance

At ambient temperatures above 95°F (35°C) start times may increase and be accompanied by a rough idle following the start.

Cruising range

E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline. To make sure that engine performance with ethanol fuel is similar to that when using gasoline, the engine must burn more ethanol fuel. As a result, it is to be expected that the fuel consumption will increase when using E85 compared to gasoline operation.

Maintenance

Please inform your Mercedes-Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel when your vehicle is delivered for maintenance or repairs.

iUse of E85 may reduce your driving range.

ing fuels

st performance and driveability it is ended to use either one or the

uel. A refueling pattern that tes between the two different fuels be avoided if possible.

witching fuels, make sure:

l level is below half full.

l level is above reserve (fuel reserve rning lamp is not lit).

ount of added fuel is more than allons (20 liters).

ition is off during refill.

ediately after refueling engine is rted and operated for at least five utes.

precautions and recommendations posed to prevent any difficulties tarting and operating the engine otherwise may be experienced the engine has fully adapted to the nt fuel.

If in spite of these recommendations the engine does not perform properly, adding more gasoline [at least 3 gallons (12 liters)] to the fuel may improve the engine behavior.

Cold weather performance

It is possible that starting times will signif-icantly increase at temperatures below 32°F (0°C). At low temperatures the use of a block heater (Canada only) is recommended (see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information). Rough idling may also be experienced at such temperatures before the engine is fully warmed up.

!E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 14°F (-10°C).

434

Technical data

Fuels,

Coolant

The engand antiprovides

� Corr

� Free

� Boiliboilin

The coolwith a coto approcorrosio

If the anto -22°Fcoolant is reach

you use a solution that is more than 55% nticorrosion/antifreeze [freeze rotection to approx. -49°F (-45°C)], the ngine temperature will increase due to e lower heat transfer capability of the

olution. Therefore, do not use more than is amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

the coolant level is low, water and B 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should

e used to bring it up to the proper level ave cooling system checked for signs of akage). Please make sure the mixture is accordance with label instructions.

he water in the cooling system must meet inimum requirements, which are usually

atisfied by normal drinking water. If you re not sure about the water quality, onsult an authorized Mercedes-Benz enter.

coolants, lubricants, etc.

s

ine coolant is a mixture of water corrosion/antifreeze, which :

osion protection

ze protection

ng protection (by increasing the g point)

ing system was filled at the factory olant providing freeze protection ximately -22°F (-30°C) and n protection.

tifreeze mixture is effective (-30°C), the boiling point of the in the pressurized cooling system ed at approx. 266°F (130°C).

The coolant solution must be used year-round to provide the necessary corro-sion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.

Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification (see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.

To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze [equivalent to freeze protection to approx. -22°F (-30°C)].

Ifapethsth

IfMb(hlein

TmsacC

435

Technical data

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Antico

Your vealumincomponecesscoolancally foparts.

Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service.

Antico

Mode

C 230

C 240

C 320

C 55 A

rrosion/antifreeze

hicle contains a number of um parts. The use of aluminum nents in motor vehicle engines itates that anticorrosion/antifreeze t used in such engines be specifi-rmulated to protect the aluminum

Failure to use such anticorrosion/anti-freeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.

Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle: Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze Agent.

rrosion/antifreeze quantity

l Approx. freeze protection

–35°F (–37°C) –49°F (–45°C)

Kompressor (all models) 3.0 US qt (2.8 l) 3.3 US qt (3.1 l)

(all models) 3.4 US qt (3.2 l) 3.8 US qt (3.6 l)

(all models) 3.4 US qt (3.2 l) 3.8 US qt (3.6 l)

MG 6.4 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)

436

Technical data

Fuels,

Windshcleanin

Both thecleaningwindshie

The wasapprox.:

� 3.2 Uhead

� 6.4 Uhead

indshield and headlamp washer fluid ixing ratio

or temperatures above freezing point, use B Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”

nd water:

1 part “S” to 100 parts water

.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] ater)

or temperatures below freezing point, use B Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”

nd commercially available premixed indshield washer solvent/antifreeze:

1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent

.34 fl oz [40 ml] “S” to 1 gallon [4.0 l] olvent)

coolants, lubricants, etc.

ield washer and headlamp g system*

windshield washer and headlamp system* are supplied from the ld washer fluid reservoir.

her fluid reservoir has a capacity of

S qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without lamp cleaning system*

S qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with lamp cleaning system*

� Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Wm

FMa

�

(1w

FMaw

�

(1s

Warning! G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

Technical terms

ABS(AnPredurcon

Acces(�

Air pre(�

Alignm

BAS(Brake Assist System)System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied.

Bead(� page 325)

Bi-Xenon headlamps*

437

Mepinto a

Aspec(�

Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps. Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam.

CAC(Customer Assistance Center)Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown.

tilock Brake System)vents the wheels from locking up ing braking so that the vehicle can tinue to be steered.

sory weightpage 325)

ssurepage 325)

ent bolttal pin with thread. The centering is an aid used when changing a tire lign the wheel with the wheel hub.

t ratiopage 325)

BabySmartTM1 air bag deactivation system

This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed (the 56 indicator lamp located in the center console comes on).

BabySmartTM compatible child seatsSpecial restraint system for children. The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmartTM compatible child seat is installed. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Bar(� page 325)

1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

438

Technical terms

CAN sys(ConDatavehicor wvehiccond

CockpitAll inindicpassvehic

Cold tir(� pa

CollapsAn emustpumusedservi

OT(Department of Transportation) (� page 325)

ngine numberThe number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced.

ngine oil viscosityMeasurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temper-atures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity.

SP(Electronic Stability Program)Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.

temtroller Area Network) bus network serving to control le functions such as door locking

indshield wiping depending on le settings and/or ambient itions.

struments, switches, buttons and ator/warning lamps in the enger compartment needed for le operation and monitoring.

e inflation pressurege 325)

ible tirespecially compact spare tire that be inflated with a provided air p before using. It should only be to bring the vehicle to the nearest ce station (C 55 AMG only).

COMAND*(Cockpit Management and Data System)Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio and the navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer*, telephone*, etc.).

Control systemThe control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings.

Cruise controlDriving convenience system that automatically maintains the vehicle speed set by the driver.

Curb weight(� page 325)

D

E

E

E

439

Technical terms

ETD(EmDevandsyssea->S

FSS (C(FleMamudrivnanengspeandmanex

GAWR(Gr(�

Instrument clusterThe displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedo-meter, engine temperature display and fuel gauge.

KickdownDepressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis-sion down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs.

Kilopascal (kPa)(� page 326)

Lock buttonButton on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door.

ergency Tensioning Device)ice which deploys in certain frontal rear collisions exceeding the tem's threshold to tighten the t belts.RS

anada vehicles)xible Service System)intenance service indicator in the ltifunction display that informs the er when the next vehicle mainte-ce service is due. FSS evaluates ine temperature, oil level, vehicle ed, engine speed, distance driven the time elapsed since your last intenance service, and calls for the t maintenance service accordingly.

oss Axle Weight Rating) page 325)

Gear rangeNumber of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting. The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector lever.

GPS(Global Positioning System)Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for navigation.

GVW(Gross Vehicle Weight) (� page 326)

GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (� page 326)

440

Technical terms

MaintenMainmultdrivenancSystdrivelast mthe ningly

Maximu(� pa

Maximu(� pa

Maximu(� pa

MemoryUsedsteeeach

verspeed rangeEngine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

oly-V-belt driveDrives engine-components (alternator, AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.

ower trainCollective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including

� engine

� clutch/torque converter

� transmission

� transfer case

� drive shaft

� differential

� axle shafts/axles

ance System (U.S. vehicles)tenance service indicator in the ifunction display that informs the r when the next vehicle mainte-e service is due. The Maintenance em in your vehicle tracks distance n and the time elapsed since your aintenance service, and calls for

ext maintenance service accord-.

m load ratingge 326)

m loaded vehicle weightge 326)

m tire inflation pressurege 326)

function* to store three individual seat,

ring wheel and mirror positions for SmartKey.

MON(Motor Octane Number)The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and ->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Multifunction displayDisplay field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system.

Multifunction steering wheelSteering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.

Normal occupant weight(� page 326)

O

P

P

441

Technical terms

Produ(�

PrograUsetranopema

PSI(Po

Recom(�

RestraSeaandpenfun

Rim(�

SRS(Supplemental Restraint System)Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though indepen-dent systems, they are closely inter-faced to provide effective occupant protection.

Tele Aid* System(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assis-tance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call.The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

ction options weightpage 326)

m mode selector switchd to switch the automatic smission* between standard ration S, comfort operation C and

nual operation M (C 55 AMG only).

unds per square inch) (� page 327)

mended tire inflation pressurepage 327)

int systemst belts, belt tensioners, air bags child restraint systems. As inde-dent systems, their protective ctions complement one another.

page 327)

RON(Research Octane Number)The Research Octane Number for gaso-line as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gaso-line's ability to resist undesired deto-nation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Shift lockWhen the vehicle is parked, this lock prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal depressed.

Sidewall(� page 327)

442

Technical terms

TelemaA cocom

TightenForcwrensuch

TIN(Tire(� pa

Tire loa(� pa

Tire ply(� pa

IN(Vehicle Identification Number)The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced.

tics*mbination of the terms “tele-munications” and “informatics”.

ing torquee times lever arm (e.g. a lug ch) with which threaded fasteners as wheel bolts are tightened.

Identification Number) ge 327)

d ratingge 327)

composition and material usedge 327)

Tire speed rating(� page 327)

Traction(� page 327)

Tread(� page 327)

Treadwear indicators(� page 327)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(� page 328)

Vehicle capacity weight(� page 328)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire(� page 328)

V

Index

AABS

ABSIndMaMe

Acceletrans

AccessAccide

In c

Adjusting 35Air distribution 180, 190Air volume 180, 191Backrest contour 105Backrest side bolsters 105Backrest tilt, manual seat 36Backrest tilt, power seat* 38Exterior rear view mirrors 41Folding back rear seat head restraints,

electrical 103Folding back rear seat head restraints,

443

ActivatAir Air AntAutCenChaClimClimDefEasEleESPExtExt

manual 103Head restraint height, manual

seat 37Head restraint height, power

seat* 38Head restraint height, rear seats 102Head restraint tilt, manual seat 37Head restraint tilt, power seat* 39Head restraint tilt, rear seats 104Instrument cluster illumination 119Interior rear view mirror 41Manual seat 36Mirrors 41Multicontour seat* 105

77, 437 control 77

icator lamp 25lfunction indicator lamp 342ssages in display 351rator position, automatic mission* 165ory weight 325ntase of 53ingconditioning (cooling) 183, 196recirculation mode 181, 193i-theft alarm system* 84omatic climate control* 187tral locking (control system) 147rcoal filter 195ate control 177ate control system 179

rosting 180, 192y-entry/exit feature* 148ctric air pump 399

81erior headlamps 50erior lamps 111

Exterior rear view mirror parking position* 172

Hazard warning flasher 116Headlamps 50High beam headlamps 50High beams 114Ignition 33Immobilizer 56, 83Low beam headlamps 50Manual shift program (C 55 AMG

only) 168Rear window defroster 175Residual heat 197Seat heating* 106Tow-away alarm* 85Windshield wipers 51

AddingCoolant 299Engine oil 297

Additional turn signals 386Adjustable air vents, rear passenger

compartment 184, 198

444

Index

Placires

PoweRearSeatSeatSeatSeatSeat

seSeat

seSeatSeatSeatStee

eleSteeStee

eleSteeStee

Adjustinvolum

AdjustinAdjustin

ir volumeAdjusting 180, 191

larmAudible 76, 83Canceling 84, 86Visual 83

larm systemAnti-theft* 83Tow-away* 85

lignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 396, 437nticorrosion/antifreeze 435ntiglare

Manual 171ntilock Brake System see ABSnti-theft alarm system*

Arming 84Canceling alarm 84Disarming 84

nti-theft systems 83Anti-theft alarm system* 83Immobilizer 83Tow-away alarm* 85

quaplaning see Hydroplaningrmrest

Changing inclination of 258Storage spaces 258

ng upright rear seat head traints 103r seat* 38

seat head restraints 102 belt height 45 cushion depth 105 cushion tilt, manual seat 36 cushion tilt, power seat* 38 fore and aft adjustment, manual at 36 fore and aft adjustment, power at* 38 height, manual seat 36 height, power seat* 38s 35ring column height, ctrical* 41ring column height, manual 40ring column length, ctrical* 41ring column length, manual 40ring wheel 39g air distribution and e 180g sound functions 203g the volume 203

Aids for changing fuses 410Air bags 59

BabySmartTM deactivation system 70, 437

Children 60Front 63Passenger 63Safety guidelines 62Side impact 64Window curtain 64

Air conditioning (cooling) 183Turning off 183, 196Turning on 183, 196

Air conditioning refrigerant 430Air distribution

Adjusting 180, 190Air pressure 325Air pressure see Tire inflation pressureAir pump, electric

Turning on 399Air recirculation mode 181, 193

Activating 181, 193Deactivating 182, 194

Air vents, rear passenger compartmentAdjustable 184, 198

A

A

A

AAA

AA

A

AA

445

Index

Armrescom

AshtraAspectATF 2AUDIO

SelSel

Audio sAudButCDOpOpOpRadSwSwTel

Auto-dAutom

Acts

Gear shifting malfunctions 170Kickdown 165Kickdown, manual shift program (C 55

AMG only) 170Manual shift program (C 55 AMG

only) 168Manual shifting 160One-touch gearshifting 160Program mode selector switch, auto-

matic shift program 164Program mode selector switch, manual

shift program (C 55 AMG only) 168Starting with 47Steering wheel gearshift control (C 55

AMG only) 166Transmission fluid 298

BBabySmartTM

Air bag deactivation system 70, 437Compatible child seats 70, 437Self-test 70

BackrestFolding forward 254Folding rearward 254

t in rear passenger partment 259ys 261 ratio 32598

menu 129ecting radio station 130ecting satellite radio* station 130ystem 199io and telephone, operation 199ton and soft key operation 202* operation 217erating and display elements 200erating safety 199eration 202io operation 207

itching off 203itching on 202ephone* operation 224imming* for rear view mirror 171atic central lockingivating/deactivating (control ystem) 147

Automatic climate control* 186Activating 187Adjusting air distribution 190Air recirculation mode 193Deactivating 187Defrosting 192Setting the temperature 189

Automatic headlamp mode 111Automatic lighting control

Activating 117Deactivating 117

Automatic locking when driving 97Automatic shift program

Automatic transmission* 164Automatic time change (Daylight Saving

Time (DST) summer/winter) 141Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATFAutomatic transmission* 158

Accelerator position 165Automatic shift program 164Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode) 170Fluid level 298Gear ranges 161Gear selector lever 47, 158Gear selector lever position 158, 162

446

Index

BackresAdju

BackresAdju

BackresManPowe

Backup MessRepl

Bar 32BAS 7

MessBatterie

ChanChecChec

Battery Jump

Battery,CharDiscRecoReinRem

Bead 3

Fog lamps, front 386Front lamps 386High beam flasher 386High beam headlamps 386High mounted brake lamp 386License plate lamps 386, 392Low beam headlamps 386Parking lamps, front 386, 389, 391Parking lamps, rear 386, 392Rear lamps 386Side marker lamps, front 386, 391Side marker lamps, rear 386, 392Standing lamps, front 386, 389, 391Standing lamps, rear 386, 392Tail lamp unit 392Tail lamps 386, 392Turn signal lamps, front 386, 389,

391Turn signal lamps, rear 386, 392

uttonAudio system 202

t contoursting 105t side bolsterssting 105t tiltual seat 36r seat* 38

lampsages in display 364

acing bulbs 38658, 437ages in display 352

s, SmartKeyging 384k lamp 91king 91

discharged starting 404

vehicle 300, 401ging 402onnecting 402nnecting 403stalling 402oving 40225

Bi-Xenon headlamps* 437Bi-Xenon type*

Front lamp bulbs 390Block heater (Canada only) 331Blocking

Rear door window operation 75Bolts

For spare wheel 377Brake Assist System see BASBrake fluid 430

Checking 293Message in display 356

Brake lamp bulbs 386Brake lamp, high mounted 386Brake lamps

Messages in display 364Brake pads

Message in display 356Brakes 282

Warning lamp 25, 343Break-in period 280Bulbs, replacing 385

Additional turn signals 386Backup lamps 386, 392Brake lamps 386, 392Fog lamp, rear 386, 392

B

447

Index

CCACCalifor

ImpCalling

MaRan

CAN syCargo Cargo CatalytCD chaCD chaCD pla

OpCD* opCenter

Frot

LowUp

CenterCentig

Set

CheckingBrake fluid 293Coolant level 293, 299Engine oil level 293, 296Tire inflation pressure 293Vehicle lighting 293Washer reservoir level 293

Child safety 67Air bags 60Infant and child restraint systems 64,

67LATCH-type child seat anchors 73

Child safety switch see Blocking of rear door window operation

Child seat anchors see LATCH-type child seat anchors

Cigarette lighter 263Cleaning

Cloth upholstery 340Cup holders 339Gear selector lever 339Hard plastic trim items 339Headlamps 171Headliner and shelf below rear

window 339Instrument cluster 338

437niaortant notice 11 upintenance service indicator 333ge (distance to empty) 152stem 438

area see Trunktie-down rings* 256ic converter 289nger* 217nger* operation 219yer*erating 131eration 217

console 27nt passenger front air bag off indica-or lamp 27, 63, 70, 348er part 28

per part 27 console ashtray 261radeting temperature units 137

Central lockingAutomatic 97From inside 97Locking from inside 97Switch 97Switching on/off (control

system) 147Unlocking from inside 97

Central locking switch 97Central unlocking

Switch 97Unlocking from inside 97

Central unlocking switch 97Certification label 416Changing

Batteries (SmartKey) 384CDs 217

Changing key setting 149Charcoal filter 194

Activating 195Deactivating 195

ChargingVehicle battery 402

448

Index

LeatLightMB TPlastSeatSteeUphoWindWindWipeWoo

CleaningClimate ClockClosing

Cup GlovHoodTilt/Tilt/

emTilt/

SmTrunWindWind

Lighting submenu 143Menus 126, 127Multifunction display 123Multifunction steering wheel 124NAV* menu 132Selecting radio system 130Selecting satellite radio* system 130Settings menu 134Standard display menu 128Submenu Time/Date 139Submenus 125, 127TEL* menu 152Trip computer menu 150Vehicle status message memory

menu 132Vehicle submenu 147

ontroller Area Network see CAN systemonvenience submenu 148

Activating easy-entry/exit feature* 148

Setting key dependency 149Setting parking position* for exterior

rear view mirror 150

her upholstery 339 alloy wheels 338ex upholstery 340ic and rubber parts 340 belts 339ring wheel 339lstery 339ows 338shield 52r blades 338d trims 340 tires 304control 17625, 123, 139, 140

holder, in rear seat armrest 261e box 257

295sliding sunroof* 243sliding sunroof* in an ergency 382

sliding sunroof* with artKey 245

k lid 94ows 239, 240ows with SmartKey 241

Cloth upholsteryCleaning 340

Cockpit 22, 438Cockpit Management and Data System

see COMAND*Cold tire inflation pressure 325Collapsible tire 423, 438Collapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) 375Collapsible wheel chock 373COMAND* 438COMAND* see separate operating instruc-

tionsCombination switch 114

High beam flasher 50Turn signals 50Windshield wipers 51

Control and operation of radio transmitters 288

Control system 123, 438AUDIO menu 129Convenience submenu 148Display digital speedometer 129Display outside temperature 129Functions 124, 127Instrument cluster submenu 137,

139

CC

449

Index

CoolanAddAnt

qCapCheMeTemTem

CoolanChe

CoolanCoolanCorner

SwSw

CruiseCanDriDriFinMeSetSet

CruiseCruisin

Cruise control 248Defrost 192Defrosting 181Engine with the SmartKey 56ESP 80Exterior lamps 111Exterior lamps delayed shut-off 145Hazard warning flasher 116Headlamps 55Immobilizer 83Interior lighting delayed shut-off 147Manual shift program (C 55 AMG

only) 170Rear window defroster 175Residual heat 197Seat heating* 106Tow-away alarm* 85

Deep water see Standing waterDefogging

Windshield 180, 191Defrosting 180, 192Delayed shut-off

Exterior lamps 145Interior lighting 147

Department of Transportation see DOT

t 299ing 299icorrosion/antifreeze uantity 434acities 427, 428cking level 299

ssages in display 357–359perature 290perature gauge 120

t levelcking 293, 299t temperature gauge 25ts 434ing fog lamps* 115itching off 115, 116itching on 115, 116 control 247, 438celing 248

ving downhill 248ving uphill 248e adjustment 249ssage in display 360ting current speed 248ting speeds 249 control lever 247g range, fuel 433

Cup holderIn rear seat armrest 260

Cup holdersCleaning 339In front of seat armrest 259

Curb weight 325Customer Assistance Center see CAC

DDate (day)

Setting 142Date (month)

Setting 141Date (year)

Setting 143Daytime running lamp mode 112

Setting 144Deactivating

Air conditioning (cooling) 183, 196Air recirculation mode 182, 194Alarm 84Anti-theft alarm system* 84Automatic climate control* 187Central locking (control system) 147Charcoal filter 195Climate control 177Climate control system 179

450

Index

DialingA nu

DifficultWhil

ingWith

Digital cDigital sDirectioDischarg

JumpDisconn

VehiDisplay

MessDisplay

AudiDisplays

DigitMainOutsSele

indShow

meSym

Safety systems 77Through standing water 287

riving abroad 288riving instructions 281riving off 283riving safety systems

4MATIC 82ABS 77BAS 78ESP 79

riving systems 247Cruise control 247Driving safety systems 77

asy-entry/exit feature* 99Activating 148

lectrical fuses 410lectrical outlet in rear passenger compartment 263

lectrical systemTechnical data 424

lectronic Stability Program see ESPmergency call

911 237mergency call system* 265

mber (telephone*) 154iese driving see Problems while driv-

starting 48lock 123peedometer 129n of rotation (tires) 305ed battery starting 404ectingcle battery 402

ages in display 360elementso system 200

al speedometer 129tenance service indicator 332ide temperature 129cting display for status icator 138ing vehicle status ssages 133

bol messages 355

Text messages 351Vehicle status messages 349

Distance to empty (range)Calling up 152

Door control panel 30Door entry lamps 118Door handle 92Door unlock

With Tele Aid* 271Doors

Message in display 360Opening from inside vehicle 92Opening from the outside 90

DOT 325Downhill driving

Cruise control 248Downshifting 160

Manual transmission 157Drink holder see Cup holdersDrinking and driving 281Driving

Driving abroad 288General instructions 43, 281Hydroplaning 284In winter 286Problems 53

DDDD

D

EE

EE

E

EE

E

451

Index

EmergInitWit

EmergMod

EmergClo

sLocOp

sRelRemUnl

EmergEmissiEmissiEnding

A cEngine

ComSta

tSta

t

Engine oil levelChecking 293, 296

Engine oils 430ESP 79, 438

Four wheel electronic traction system with ESP 82

Messages in display 353–354Switching off 80Switching on 81Warning lamp 25, 346

ETD 67, 439Safety guidelines 62

Ethanol fuelAt the gas station 291Requirements 432Switching fuels 433

Exterior lamp switch 50, 110Exterior lamps

Delayed shut-off 145Exterior rear view mirrors

Adjusting 41Parking position* for 150

ency callsiating an emergency call 267h Tele Aid* 266ency operation (Limp Home e) 170ency operationssing power tilt/sliding unroof* 382king the vehicle 379

ening power tilt/sliding unroof* 382easing trunk lid from inside 96

ote door unlock 271ocking the vehicle 378ency Tensioning Device see ETDon control 289on control information label 416

all (telephone*) 154

partment 294rting with automatic ransmission* 47rting with manual ransmission 47

Starting with the SmartKey, automatic transmission* 47

Starting with the SmartKey, manual transmission 47

Technical data 418Turning off with the SmartKey 56

Engine cleaning 337Engine compartment 294

Fuse box in 411Hood 294

Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25, 344

Engine number 416, 438Engine oil 295

Adding 297Additives 430Checking level 293, 296Consumption 295Display messages 296, 361–362Filler neck, C 230 Kompressor (all

models) 298Filler neck, C 240 (all models), C 320

(all models), C 55 AMG 298Messages in display 296, 361–362Viscosity 438

452

Index

FFahrenh

SettiFasteninFiller ne

C 23C 24

C 5Fine adj

CruisFirst aidFlat tire

CollaLoweMini

AMMouPrep

Flexible At thSwit

Flexible Fog lam

MessReplSwit

ront seatsHeating* 106

SS (Flexible Service System) (Canada vehicles) 332, 439

uel 292Additives 432Cruising range 433E85 (Ethanol fuel) 433Fuel reserve warning lamp 347Gasoline additives 432Premium unleaded gasoline 292,

428, 431Requirements 431, 432Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) 433Technical data 427, 428

uel additives 432uel cap

Message in display 345, 363uel consumption statistics

After start 151Since last reset 151

uel filler flap 291Locking 291Opening in an emergency 380Unlocking 291

uel gauge 25

eitng temperature units 137g the seat belts 43ck0 Kompressor (all models) 2980 (all models), C 320 (all models), 5 AMG 298

ustmente control 249

kit 370394

psible tire (C 55 AMG only) 375ring the vehicle 400

spare wheel (except C 55 G) 374

nting the spare wheel 394aring the vehicle 394fuel vehicles 432e gas station 291ching fuels 433Service System see FSSp, rearage in display 366

acing bulb 386ching on 114

Fog lamps, frontMessages in display 364Replacing bulbs 386Switching on 113

Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) with ESP 82

4MATIC 82Front air bags 63Front fog lamps

Indicator lamp 110Switching on 113

Front lampsBi-Xenon* type 390Halogen-type 388Messages in display 364–367Replacing bulbs 386, 388Switching on 110

Front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 27, 63, 70, 348

Front seat head restraintsInstalling, manual seat 101Installing, power seat* 102Manual seat 101Power seat* 101Removing, manual seat 101Removing, power seat* 101

F

F

F

FF

F

F

F

453

Index

Fuel reFor

Fuel reWa

Fuel taCapFill

Fuels, Cap

FunctioRes

Fuse bIn eIn t

Fuse cFuse eFuses

AidFusFusFusFusMa

cSpa

Glove box 257Closing 257Locking 257Opening 257Unlocking 257

Good visibility 171GPS 439Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWRGross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWRGross Vehicle Weight see GVWGVW 326GVWR 326

HHalogen-type

Front lamp bulbs 388Hands-free microphone 29Hard plastic trim items

Cleaning 339Hazard warning flasher 116

Switching off 116Switching on 116

quirements 431 ethanol fuel 432serverning lamp 25nkacity 428

er flap 291coolants, lubricants etc.acities 427ns (control system) 124, 127etting 135oxngine compartment 411runk 412hart 410xtractor 410, 412

410s for changing fuses 410e box in engine compartment 411e box in trunk 412e chart 410e extractor 410, 412in fuse box in passenger ompartment 411re fuses 410

GGarage door opener* 272Gasoline additives 432Gasoline see FuelGAWR 325Gear range 439

Automatic transmission* 161Limiting 161Shifting into optimal 160

Gear range limitCanceling 160

Gear selector lever 47, 158Cleaning 339Lock 47Position (Automatic

transmission*) 123, 162Position (automatic

transmission*) 158Gearshift lever 46, 157Global

Locking 90Unlocking 90

Global Positioning System see GPS

454

Index

Head reFronFronManPoweRear

Head unTime

HeadlamHeadlam

shut-oHeadlam

AutoBi-XeBi-Xe

RCleaCleaHaloRefilSwitSwitWash

HeadlineClea

Heated

entification labels 416Certification label 416Emission control information

label 416Vacuum line routing diagram

label 416Vehicle Identification Number 416

nition 33Switching on, automatic

transmission* 47Switching on, manual

transmission 47mobilizer 83Activating 83Deactivating 83

dicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and warningfant and child restraint systems 67

Installing 72LATCH-type child seat anchors 73

formationAbout service and warranty 10

side door handle 92

straints 100t seats, manual seat 101t seats, power seat* 101ual seat 37r seat* 38

seats 102it synchronization* with 139p cleaning system* 301p shut-off delay see Delayed ff, exterior lampsps

matic control 111non* 437non* typeeplacing bulbs 390ning 337ning system* 171, 301, 436gen-type, replacing bulbs 388ling washer fluid 301ching off 55ching on 50er fluid 436r and shelf below rear window

ning 339seats* 106

Height adjustmentHead restraints, manual seat 37Head restraints, power seat* 38Rear seat head restraints 102Seat belts 45Steering wheel, electrical*

adjustment 40Steering wheel, manual

adjustment 40High beam flasher 50, 114High beam headlamps

Indicator lamp 25Messages in display 365Replacing bulbs 386, 389Switching on 50, 114

High beam headlamps xenon type*Replacing bulbs 390

High mounted brake lamp 386Hood 294

Closing 295Message in display 363Opening 294

Horn 23Hydroplaning 284

IId

Ig

Im

In

In

In

In

455

Index

InstalliInfaSkiTowWip

InstrumCleCooIlluLamMuOuSel

InstrumInstrumInterio

ActDeaDelMa

InterioAdjAnt

InterioArmCup

Restoring to factory setting 91Selective setting 90Starting the engine, automatic

transmission* 47Starting the engine, manual

transmission 47Turning off the engine 56Unlocking the trunk lid 92Unlocking with 32

Kickdown 165, 439Kilometers/miles in speedometer 137Kilopascal 326Km/h or mph in speedometer 137

LLabels, identification 416Lamp bulbs, exterior 385Lamp sensor

Message in display 365Lamps, exterior

Front 386Light sensor 365Messages in display 364–367Rear 386

ngnt and child restraint systems 72

sack* (Canada only) 253ing eye bolt 409er blades 393ent cluster 24, 119, 439

aning 338lant temperature gauge 120

mination 119ps in 342–347

ltifunction display 123tside temperature indicator 121ecting language 138ent lighting 119ents and controls see Cockpit

r lighting 117ivating automatic control 117ctivating automatic control 117

ayed shut-off 147nual operation 117r rear view mirrorusting 41iglare 171r storage spaces 257rest 258 holder in rear seat armrest 260

Cup holders in front of seat armrest 259

Glove box 257Parcel net in front passenger

footwell 261Intermittent wiping 52

JJack 370Jump starting 404

KKey 207Key dependency memory

Settings 149Key positions in starter switch 33Key, mechanical 378Key, SmartKey

Battery check lamp 90Checking the batteries 91Factory setting 90Global locking 90Global unlocking 90Loss of 92Messages in display 363Positions in starter switch 33Remote control 88

456

Index

Lamps, ABSBatteBrakEngiEngiESPFronFron

63Fuel HighInstrLow MainRearSeatSRSTurn

LanguagMultSetti

LATCH-tFold

Layout o

Rear fog lamp 114Settings (control system) 143Standing lamps 110Trunk lamp 118

imiting the gear range 161imp Home Mode 170oading 250

Cargo tie-down rings* 256Instructions 255Roof rack* 250Split rear bench seat* 253

oading terminology 325oading the vehicle 305ocator lighting 113

Setting 145ock button 439ocking 54, 88

Automatic while driving 97Centrally from inside 97Fuel filler flap 291Global, SmartKey 90Glove box 257Vehicle in an emergency 379

oss of keys 92oss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 415

indicator and warning25, 342

ry (SmartKey) 90es 25, 343ne diagnostics 344, 347ne malfunction 25, 344–345

25, 346t fog lamps 110t passenger front air bag off 27, , 70, 348reserve 25, 347 beam headlamps 25ument cluster 342–347beam headlamps 25tenance service indicator 332 fog lamp 110 belt telltale 25, 347

25, 59, 347 signals 25eifunction display 138ng 138ype child seat anchors 73ing back 74f poly-V-belt drive 417

Leather upholsteryCleaning 339

License plate lampsMessages in display 365Replacing bulbs 386

Light alloy wheelsCleaning 338Technical data 421, 422

Light sensor 365Lighter see Cigarette lighterLighting 110

Automatic headlamp mode 111Combination switch 114Daytime running lamp mode 112Door entry lamps 118Exterior lamp switch 110Front fog lamps 113High beams 114Instrument cluster illumination 119Instruments 119Interior 117Locator lighting 113Low beam 110Manual headlamp mode 111Night security illumination 113Parking lamps 110

LLL

LLL

LL

LL

457

Index

Low beIndMeRepSw

LoweriVeh

LubricaTec

MMain dMain fu

In pMainodMainte

VehMainte

Calin

MaMinOveTypWh

Manual shift program (C 55 AMG only)Activating 168Automatic transmission* 168Deactivating 170

Manual transmission 156Gearshift lever 46, 157Shifting into reverse 157Starting with 47

MAXCOOL maximum cooling 192Maximum load rating 326Maximum loaded vehicle weight 326Maximum tire inflation pressure 326MB Tex upholstery

Cleaning 340Mechanical key 378Memory

TV station 216Memory function* 107, 440

Recalling positions from memory 108

Storing exterior rear view mirror park-ing position 109

Storing key dependent settings 108

am headlampsicator lamp 25ssages in display 365–366lacing bulbs 386, 388

itching on 50ngicle 400ntshnical data 427

imensions 425se boxassenger compartment 411ometer 123nance 12, 332icles with E85 fuel 433nance serviceling up the maintenance service dicator 333

jor service (Service B) 332or service (Service A) 332rdue 333es 333en due 332

Maintenance service indicator 332Calling up 333, 334Clearing 333, 334

Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) 332, 440

Manual headlamp mode 111Manual operation

Interior lighting control 117Manual operations

Fuel filler flap 380Locking the vehicle 379Tilt/sliding sunroof* 382Unlocking the driver’s door 378Unlocking the trunk 379Unlocking transmission gear selector

lever 381Manual seat

Adjusting 36Adjusting backrest tilt 36Adjusting head restraint height 37Adjusting head restraint tilt 37Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36Adjusting seat height 36Front seat head restraints 101Seat fore and aft adjustment 36

458

Index

MenusAUDIn coNAVSettiStanSubmTEL*Trip Vehi

MicrophHand

Miles/kSetti

MinispaMinispaMirrors

Activpa

AdjuAuto

miAuto

miExte

Fuel cap 345, 363Hood 363Key, SmartKey 363Lamps, exterior 364–367Oil 361–362Parking brake 356Restraint system 354Seat belt system 368SRS 354Steering gear oil level 368Tele Aid* 369Telephone* 369Tilt/sliding sunroof* 369Trunk lid 369Windshield washer fluid 369

ultifunction steering wheel 26, 124, 440

Buttons 124

avigation system*Operating 132See separate COMAND* operating in-

structionsight security illumination 113

Setting 145ormal occupant weight 326

124IO 129ntrol system 126, 127* 132ngs menu 134dard display 128enus 125

152computer 150cle status message memory 132ones-free microphone 29

ilometers in speedometerng 137re wheel 423re wheel (except C 55 AMG) 374

ating exterior rear view mirror rking position* 172sting 41-dimming* for interior rror 171-dimming* for rear view rror 171rior rear view mirror 41

Exterior rear view mirror parking position* 150

Interior rear view mirror 41Storing exterior rear view mirror park-

ing position* 109MON 292, 440Motor Octane Number see MONMph or km/h in speedometer 137Multicontour seats* 105Multifunction display 123, 440

Displaying gear range 161Selecting language 138Setting date (day) 142Setting date (month) 141Setting date (year) 143

Multifunction display messagesABS 351BAS 352Brake fluid 356Brake pads 356Coolant 357–359Cruise control 360Display 360Doors 360Engine oil 361–362ESP 353–354

M

NN

N

N

459

Index

OOccupOccup

Air ChiChiFasInfaLATSea

OdomeOil

AddOil leveOil seeOne-to

CanDoUp

OpeninCupDoFueFueGloHoo

Ornamental moldings 337Outer seats

Rear seat head restraints 102, 104Outside temperature 129Outside temperature indicator 121Overdue maintenance service 333Overhead control panel 29Overspeed range 440

PPaintwork 336Panic alarm* 76

Panic button on SmartKey 76Parcel net

In front passenger footwell 261Parking 54, 283Parking brake 48, 54

Engaging 54Message in display 356Releasing 48

Parking lampsMessages in display 366

Parking lamps, frontReplacing bulbs 386

Parking lamps, rearReplacing bulbs 386

ant distribution 326ant safety 58bags 59ldren and air bags 60ldren in the vehicle 67tening the seat belt 43nt and child restraint systems 67CH-type child seat anchors 73t belts 43, 62ter, main 123

ing 297l see Engine oil level Engine oiluch gearshifting 160celing gear range limit 160

wnshifting 160shifting 160g holder, in rear seat armrest 261

ors from the inside 92l filler flap 292l filler flap manually 380ve box 257d 294

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* in an emergency 382

Side windows 239Tilt/sliding sunroof* 243, 382Tilt/sliding sunroof* with

SmartKey 245Trunk 92Trunk from the inside 94Trunk from the outside 93Windows 239Windows with SmartKey 241

OperatingAudio system 199CD player* 131COMAND* see separate operating in-

structionsNavigation system* 132Radio 130Radio transmitters 288Satellite radio* 130Telephone* 152, 199, 224Vehicle outside the USA and

Canada 13Operating safety

Audio system 199Operator’s Manual 10

460

Index

Parking Exte

17Parts sePasseng

InterInterMainParc

fooPassengPedalsPerform

In coIn ho

Phone bLoadQuic

Phone nDialiRedi

Plastic aClea

PlayingCDs

ractical hintsCollapsible tire (C 55 AMG only) 375Collapsible wheel chock 373First aid kit 370Fuses 410Lamp in center console 348Lamps in instrument cluster 342Minispare wheel (except C 55

AMG) 374Spare wheel bolts 377Symbol messages 355Text messages 351Towing the vehicle 406Vehicle jack 370, 372Vehicle status messages in the

display 349Vehicle tool kit 370

remium unleaded gasoline 431roblems

While driving 53With vehicle 17

roduct information 9roduction options weight 326rogram mode 123

position*rior rear view mirrors 109, 150, 2rvice 414er compartment 288ior lighting 117ior rear view mirror 41 fuse box in 411el net in front passenger twell 261er safety see Occupant safety281

anceld weather 433t weather 433ook*ing 154k search 155umber*ng 154aling 155nd rubber partsning 340

220

Poly-V-belt drive 440Layout 417

Positions (Memory function*)Recalling from memory 108Storing into memory 108

Potential problems associated with under-inflated and overinflated tires 314

Power assistance 281Power seat*

Adjusting backrest tilt 38Adjusting head restraint height 38Adjusting head restraint tilt 39Adjusting seat cushion tilt 38Adjusting seat height 38Memory function* 107Removing/installing front head

restraints 101Seat fore and aft adjustment 38

Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 243Power train 440Power washer 336Power windows 239

Blocking of rear door window operation 75

Side windows 239Synchronizing 242

P

PP

PPP

461

Index

PrograAut

tMa

aPSI 3

QQuick

Pho

RRadio

SelRadio oRadio sRadio t

operRange

Cal

Rear seat head restraints 102Adjusting 102Adjusting tilt 104Folding back, electrical 103Folding back, manual 103Installing 104Outer seats 104Placing upright 103Removing 104

Rear view mirrors see MirrorsRear window defroster 175Rear window sunshade* 174Recommended tire inflation

pressure 327Reconnecting

Vehicle battery 403Recovery services

For stolen vehicle 272Refrigerant

Air conditioning 430Refueling 291

m mode selector switch 441omatic shift program, automatic ransmission* 164nual shift program (C 55 AMG only), utomatic transmission* 16827

searchne book* 155

ecting stations 130peration 207ee Radio operationransmitters, control and ation 288(distance to empty)ling up 152

Reading lamp 117Rear bench seat

Foldable* 253Rear door window

Blocking operation 75Rear fog lamp 386

Bulb 386Indicator lamp 110Switching on 114

Rear lamp bulbsReplacing 392

Rear lampsMessages in display 364–367

Rear lamps see Tail lampsRear outer seats

Adjusting head restraint height 102Rear passenger compartment

Adjustable air vents 198Rear passenger compartment, adjustable

air vents 184Rear seat ashtray 262

462

Index

Regular ReinstalRemote

SmaRemote

WithRemovin

Ski sVehiVehiVehi

AMWheWipe

ReplacinBackBrakBulbFog FronFuseHighHigh

heLicenLow

estraint systemMessage in display 354

estraint system see Infant and child re-straint systems

everse (manual transmission)Shifting into 157

im 327ims 420oadside Assistance 12ON 292, 441oof rack* 250ubber parts

Cleaning 340

afetyOccupant 58

afety belts see Seat beltsafety defects

Reporting 18afety systems

Driving 77atellite radio

additional text information 216general information 212manual channel input 214storing of station 216

checks 293ling vehicle battery 402controlrtKey 88door unlock Tele Aid* 271gack* (Canada only) 253cle battery 402cle tool kit (C 55 AMG only) 371cle tool kit (except C 55 G) 370

el 396r blades 393gup lamp bulbs 392e lamp bulbs 392s 385lamp bulb, rear 392t lamp bulbs 386, 388s 410 beam bulbs 389 beam bulbs (xenon-type* adlamps) 390se plate lamp bulbs 392

beam bulbs 388

Parking lamp bulbs, front 389, 391Parking lamp bulbs, rear 392Rear lamp bulbs 386, 392Side marker lamp bulbs, front 391Side marker lamp bulbs, rear 392Standing lamp bulbs, front 389, 391Standing lamp bulbs, rear 392Tail lamp bulbs 392Turn signal lamp bulbs, front 389,

391Turn signal lamp bulbs, rear 392Wiper blades 393

ReportingSafety defects 18

Research Octane Number see RONReset button in the instrument

cluster 119, 134, 135Resetting

All functions (control system) 134All functions of a submenu 135Fuel consumption 152Maintenance service indicator 334Trip odometer 121

Residual heat utilization 197Residual ventilation 197

R

R

R

RRRRRR

SS

SS

S

S

463

Index

Seat bSeat bSeat b

seatSeat b

MeSeat bSeat b

CleFasHeiProSafTel

Seat cuAdj

Seat hSwSw

SeatingSeats

AdjEasHeaMaMu

SettingConvenience functions 148Cruise control 248Date (day) 142Date (month) 141Date (year) 143Daytime running lamp mode 144Exterior rear view mirror parking

position* 109Higher speed in cruise control 249Hours (clock) 139Individual vehicle settings 134Instrument lighting 119Interior lighting delayed shut-off 147Key dependent memory 149Lamps and lighting (control

system) 143Language, multifunction display 138Locator lighting 145Lower speed in cruise control 249Miles/kilometers in

speedometer 137Minutes (clock) 140Night security illumination 145Parking position* for exterior rear view

mirrors 150

elt force limiter 67elt height adjustment 45elt height adjustment, front s 45elt systemssage in display 368elt telltale 25elts 64aning 339tening 43ght adjustment 45per use of 45, 66ety guidelines 62ltale 347shion depth

usting 105eating*itching off 106itching on 106 capacity 30799

usting 35y entry/exit feature* 99ting* 106

nual seat 36lticontour seat* 105

Power seat* 38Split rear bench seat* 253

Securing cargoCargo tie-down rings* 256

SelectingAutomatic time change (Daylight Sav-

ing Time (DST) summer/winter) 141

Display for status indicator 138station (satellite radio) 214

Selecting radio mode 207Selector lever see gear selector leverSelf-test

BabySmartTM air bag deactivation system 70

Tele Aid* 266Service

Parts 414Service and Warranty Booklet

Loss of 415Service and warranty information 10Service life (tires) 303Service see MaintenanceService System see FSS

464

Index

RadiSpeeSpeeTemTemTemTimeUnits

ST

Setting cSetting tSettings

ConvFactIndivLightMenReseReseSele

SettingsFuncIndivSubm

Shift loc

Stopping 241Synchronizing power windows 242

idewall 327imultaneous wiping and washing

Windshield wipers 52ingle CD mode selector 201ingle wipe 52ki sack* (Canada only) 250

Installing 253Removing 253Unfolding and loading 250Unloading and folding 252

liding inSwiveling cup holder, in front of seat

armrest 260liding out

Swiveling cup holder, in front of seat armrest 259

martKey 88Changing batteries 384Locking and unlocking 88Opening and closing the tilt/sliding

sunroof* with 245Opening and closing the windows

with 241Unlocking with 32

o station 214d in cruise control 249dometer display mode 137

perature (Interior) 179perature (interior) 189perature indicator 137 display mode (Clock) 141

peedometer 137emperature 137urrent speed 248he temperature 179

enience functions 148ory, SmartKey 90idual, SmartKey 149ing (control system) 143us and submenus 125tting all (control system) 134tting in the submenu 135ctive, SmartKey 90 menutions in 134idual vehicle settings 134enus 135

k 441

Shift program mode 123Shifting

Gear selector lever 47, 158Gear selector lever positions 162Gearshift lever 46, 157Into optimal gear range (automatic

transmission*) 160Into reverse (Manual

transmission) 157Side impact air bags 64Side marker lamps, front

Messages in display 364Replacing bulbs 386

Side marker lamps, rearReplacing bulbs 386

Side markersCleaning 337

Side windowsAutomatic opening 240Cleaning 338Closing 239, 240, 241Closing fully 240Closing with SmartKey 241Opening 239, 240, 241Opening fully 240Opening with SmartKey 241

SS

SSS

S

S

S

465

Index

Snow cSoft ke

AudSoundSpare Spare

BolMo

SpeedSet

Speed Cru

SpeedoSet

SpeedoSel

Split reSRS

IndMe

StandiRep

StandiRep

StandiDri

StoppingTilt/sliding sunroof* 245Windows 241

Storage compartmentsGlove box 257

Storage spacesCup holder in rear seat armrest 260Cup holders in front of seat

armrest 259Storing

station (satellite radio) 216Storing (Memory function*)

Positions into memory 108Storing tires 304Submenus

Convenience 148For settings 125In control system 127Instrument cluster 137, 139Lighting 143Resetting functions in Control

system 135Selecting 135Settings menu 135Time/Date 139Vehicle 147

hains 331ysio system 202

system* 204fuses 410wheel 423ts 377unting 394

ting current 248settingsise control 249meter 25

tings units 137meter display mode

ecting 137ar bench seat* 25366, 441icator lamp 25, 347ssage in display 354ng lamps, frontlacing bulbs 386

ng lamps, rearlacing bulbs 386

ng waterving instructions 287

Starter switch 23, 33Positions 33

Starting difficulties 48Starting position 33Starting the engine 46Station (satellite radio)

selecting 214Steering column

Height adjustment, electrical* 41Height adjustment, manual 40Length adjustment, electrical* 41Length adjustment, manual 40

Steering gear oilMessage in display 368

Steering wheelAdjusting 39Buttons 26Cleaning 339Electrical adjustment* 40Manual adjustment 40

Steering wheel gearshift control (C 55 AMG only)

Automatic transmission* 166Stolen vehicle

Recovery services 272

466

Index

SubstituBulb

Sun visoSunshadSupplemSwitchin

Fuel Switchin

AudiAuto

syCornDelaEngiESPHazaHeadSeat

SwitchinAudiAuto

syCornESPFronHaza

Engine oil additives 430Engine oils 430Flexible fuel vehicles 432Fuel requirements 431Fuels 427, 428Gasoline additives 432Lubricants 427Main dimensions 425Premium unleaded gasoline 431Rims and tires 420Weights 426Windshield washer 429Windshield washer and headlamp

cleaning* system 429, 436ele Aid* 265

Emergency calls 266Hands-free microphone 29Information 269Initiating an emergency call

manually 267Message in display 369Remote door unlock 271Roadside Assistance 268SOS button 267Stolen Vehicle Recovery

services 272

te lampss 385rs 173e* 174ental Restraint System see SRSg(Flexible fuel vehicle) 433g offo system 202matic central locking (control stem) 147ering fog lamps* 115, 116yed (exterior lamps) 145ne 56

80rd warning flasher 116lamps 55

heating* 106g ono system 202matic central locking (control stem) 147ering fog lamps* 115, 116

81t fog lamps 113rd warning flasher 116

Headlamps 50High beam headlamps 50High beams 114Low beam headlamps 50Rear fog lamp 114Seat heating* 106Windshield wipers 51

Symbols 15Synchronizing

Power windows 242Tilt/sliding sunroof* 246

TTachometer 25, 121

Overspeed range 121Tail lamps

Cleaning 337Messages in display 366Replacing bulbs 386, 392

Tar stains 336Technical data

Air conditioning refrigerant 430Brake fluid 430Coolant 427, 428Coolants 434Electrical system 424Engine 418

T

467

Index

SysTelUp

TelemaTeleph

AnsDia

bEndHanLoaMeOpRed

TempeDisSetSetTire

Tie-dowTighten

442Tilt

HeaHea

Tire ply composition and material used 327

Tire speed rating 285, 318, 327Tire terminology 325Tire traction 285Tires 302, 420

Direction of rotation 305Driving instructions 284Retreads 302Rims and tires 420Rotating 328Service life 303Temperature 312, 324Tread depth 304, 330Wear pattern 328Winter 330

Tools 370Tow away alarm*

Canceling alarm 86Tow-away alarm* 85

Arming 85Disarming 85Disarming for transport 85

Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit)Installing 409

Towing the vehicle 406

tem self-check 266e Aid System 265, 441grade scenario 270tics* 442one* 26, 264wering a call 153ling a number from the phone ook 154ing a call 154ds-free microphone 29ding phone book 154ssage in display 369eration 152, 224ialing 155

ratureplay mode 137ting interior temperature 179ting units in display 137s 312n rings* (Trunk) 256ing torque (Wheel bolts) 400,

d restraint, manual seat 37d restraint, power seat* 39

Tilt/sliding sunroof*Closing 243, 382Closing with SmartKey 245Messages in display 369Opening 243, 382Opening with SmartKey 245Stopping 245Synchronizing 246

TimeSetting hours 139Setting minutes 140

Time displaySetting 141

Time synchronization*With head unit 139

TIN 327Tire

Vehicle maximum load on 328Tire and Loading Information 306Tire and loading terminology 325Tire care and maintenance 303Tire Identification Number see TINTire inflation pressure

Checking 293, 311, 313Tire inspection 303Tire load rating 327

468

Index

TractionTransmi

UnloTransmi

transmTravelinTreadTread deTread deTreadweTrip comTrip odo

ReseTrunk

ClosFuseLamOpenOpenOpenTie-dTrun

Trunk lidClosEmeMess

niform Tire Quality Grading Standards 328nits

Setting speedometer units 137Setting temperature units 137

nlocking 32, 88Centrally from inside 97Driver’s door in an emergency 378Fuel filler flap 291Global 90Glove box 257In an emergency 378Selective settings 90Transmission gear selector lever

manually 381Trunk in an emergency 379Vehicle in an emergency 271With the SmartKey 32

pgrade scenarioTele Aid* 270

phill drivingCruise control 248

pholsteryCleaning 339

pshifting 160

164, 327ssion gear selector levercking manually 381ssion see Automatic* or Manual ission

g abroad 288327pth 304pth (tires) 330ar indicators 327puter 150metertting 121

ing the lid 94 box in 412p 118ing 92ing from inside vehicle 94ing from outside vehicle 93own rings 256k lid emergency release 96

ing 94rgency release 96age in display 369

Turn signal lamps, frontMessages in display 367Replacing bulbs 386

Turn signal lamps, in mirrorsMessages in display 367

Turn signal lamps, rearMessages in display 367Replacing bulbs 386

Turn signals 50Additional in mirrors 386Cleaning lenses 337Front bulbs 386Indicator lamps 25Rear bulbs 386

Turning inwardSwiveling cup holder, in front of seat

armrest 260Turning off

Engine 56Turning outward

Swiveling cup holder, in front of seat armrest 260

UU

U

U

U

U

U

U

469

Index

UsefulAshCigEleInteTelTel

VVacuumVehicle

IndLocLocLowPerPerSerTowUnlUnlWit

VehicleVehicleVehicle

CloCup

Vehicle lightingChecking 293

Vehicle loading terminology 325Vehicle maximum load on the tire 328Vehicle status message memory 132

Calling up 132Clearing 133

Vehicle status messagesDisplaying 133

Vehicle tool kit 370Alignment bolt 370Collapsible wheel chock 370Gloves 370Jack 370Protective wrap (C 55 AMG only) 370Removing (C 55 AMG only) 371Removing (except C 55 AMG) 370Spare fuses 370Spare wheel bolts 370Towing eye bolt 370Valve extractor (C 55 AMG only) 370,

372Vehicle jack 370Wheel wrench 370

Vehicle washing 337VIN 416, 442

features 257trays 261arette lighter 263ctrical outlet 263rior storage spaces 257

e Aid* 265ephone* 264

line routing diagram label 416

ividual settings 134, 136king 97king in an emergency 379ering 400

formance in cold weather 433formance in hot weather 433vice battery 401ing 406

ocking 97ocking in an emergency 378h flexible fuel 432 battery 401 capacity weight 328 care 335th upholstery 340 holders 339

Engine cleaning 337Gear selector lever 339Hard plastic trim items 339Headlamps 337Instrument cluster 338Leather upholstery 339Light alloy wheels 338MB Tex upholstery 340Ornamental moldings 337Paintwork 336Plastic and rubber parts 340Power washer 336Seat belts 339Side markers 337Steering wheel 339Tail lamps 337Tar stains 336Turn signals 337Upholstery 339Vehicle washing 337Window cleaning 338Wiper blades 338Wood trims 340

Vehicle Identification Number see VINVehicle jack 372

470

Index

WWarning

warninWarning

DrivePark

WarrantWasher Washer

ChecWashingWear paWeightsWheel bWheel c

TightWheels

TiresWindowWindow

inter driving 330Block heater (Canada only) 331Snow chains 331Tires 330

inter driving instructions 286inter tires 330iper blades

Cleaning 338Installing 393Removing 393Replacing 393

ipingWith windshield washer fluid 52

ood trimsCleaning 340

enon headlampsBi-Xenon* 437

lamps see Lamps, indicator and g

soundsrs seat belts 64

ing brake 49y coverage 415fluid see Windshield washer fluidreservoir levelking 293 the vehicle 335ttern (tires) 328

426olts 377hangeening torque 400

and wheels 302 curtain air bags 64s see Side windows

WindshieldDefogging 180, 191Refilling washer fluid 301Replacing wiper blades 393Washer fluid 301, 436Washer system 436

Windshield washer fluid 436Message in display 369Mixing ratio 436Refilling 301Wiping with 52

Windshield washer system 436Windshield wipers 51

Fast wiper speed 51Intermittent wiping 52Replacing wiper blades 393Single wipe 52Switching on 51Wiping with windshield washer

fluid 52

W

WWW

W

W

XX

Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.

For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.

Title illustration no. P00.01-2840-31

Press time June 02, 2004GSP/TIP

Printed in Germany

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.

If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operator’s ManualC-Class Sedan

Order No. 6515 0149 13 Part No. 203 584 26 71 USA Edition C 2005

Ê4Ct:grË2035842671

Oper

ator

’s M

anua

lC-C

lass

Sed

an